diff options
Diffstat (limited to 'Documentation')
236 files changed, 6352 insertions, 767 deletions
diff --git a/Documentation/ABI/testing/configfs-usb-gadget b/Documentation/ABI/testing/configfs-usb-gadget index 37559a06393..95a36589a66 100644 --- a/Documentation/ABI/testing/configfs-usb-gadget +++ b/Documentation/ABI/testing/configfs-usb-gadget @@ -62,6 +62,40 @@ KernelVersion: 3.11 Description: This group contains functions available to this USB gadget. +What: /config/usb-gadget/gadget/functions/<func>.<inst>/interface.<n> +Date: May 2014 +KernelVersion: 3.16 +Description: + This group contains "Feature Descriptors" specific for one + gadget's USB interface or one interface group described + by an IAD. + + The attributes: + + compatible_id - 8-byte string for "Compatible ID" + sub_compatible_id - 8-byte string for "Sub Compatible ID" + +What: /config/usb-gadget/gadget/functions/<func>.<inst>/interface.<n>/<property> +Date: May 2014 +KernelVersion: 3.16 +Description: + This group contains "Extended Property Descriptors" specific for one + gadget's USB interface or one interface group described + by an IAD. + + The attributes: + + type - value 1..7 for interpreting the data + 1: unicode string + 2: unicode string with environment variable + 3: binary + 4: little-endian 32-bit + 5: big-endian 32-bit + 6: unicode string with a symbolic link + 7: multiple unicode strings + data - blob of data to be interpreted depending on + type + What: /config/usb-gadget/gadget/strings Date: Jun 2013 KernelVersion: 3.11 @@ -79,3 +113,14 @@ Description: product - gadget's product description manufacturer - gadget's manufacturer description +What: /config/usb-gadget/gadget/os_desc +Date: May 2014 +KernelVersion: 3.16 +Description: + This group contains "OS String" extension handling attributes. + + use - flag turning "OS Desctiptors" support on/off + b_vendor_code - one-byte value used for custom per-device and + per-interface requests + qw_sign - an identifier to be reported as "OS String" + proper diff --git a/Documentation/ABI/testing/sysfs-bus-iio b/Documentation/ABI/testing/sysfs-bus-iio index 6e02c502915..a9757dcf2e8 100644 --- a/Documentation/ABI/testing/sysfs-bus-iio +++ b/Documentation/ABI/testing/sysfs-bus-iio @@ -114,14 +114,17 @@ What: /sys/bus/iio/devices/iio:deviceX/in_temp_raw What: /sys/bus/iio/devices/iio:deviceX/in_tempX_raw What: /sys/bus/iio/devices/iio:deviceX/in_temp_x_raw What: /sys/bus/iio/devices/iio:deviceX/in_temp_y_raw -What: /sys/bus/iio/devices/iio:deviceX/in_temp_z_raw +What: /sys/bus/iio/devices/iio:deviceX/in_temp_ambient_raw +What: /sys/bus/iio/devices/iio:deviceX/in_temp_object_raw KernelVersion: 2.6.35 Contact: linux-iio@vger.kernel.org Description: Raw (unscaled no bias removal etc.) temperature measurement. If an axis is specified it generally means that the temperature sensor is associated with one part of a compound device (e.g. - a gyroscope axis). Units after application of scale and offset + a gyroscope axis). The ambient and object modifiers distinguish + between ambient (reference) and distant temperature for contact- + less measurements. Units after application of scale and offset are milli degrees Celsius. What: /sys/bus/iio/devices/iio:deviceX/in_tempX_input @@ -210,6 +213,14 @@ Contact: linux-iio@vger.kernel.org Description: Scaled humidity measurement in milli percent. +What: /sys/bus/iio/devices/iio:deviceX/in_X_mean_raw +KernelVersion: 3.5 +Contact: linux-iio@vger.kernel.org +Description: + Averaged raw measurement from channel X. The number of values + used for averaging is device specific. The converting rules for + normal raw values also applies to the averaged raw values. + What: /sys/bus/iio/devices/iio:deviceX/in_accel_offset What: /sys/bus/iio/devices/iio:deviceX/in_accel_x_offset What: /sys/bus/iio/devices/iio:deviceX/in_accel_y_offset @@ -784,6 +795,7 @@ What: /sys/.../iio:deviceX/scan_elements/in_incli_x_en What: /sys/.../iio:deviceX/scan_elements/in_incli_y_en What: /sys/.../iio:deviceX/scan_elements/in_pressureY_en What: /sys/.../iio:deviceX/scan_elements/in_pressure_en +What: /sys/.../iio:deviceX/scan_elements/in_rot_quaternion_en KernelVersion: 2.6.37 Contact: linux-iio@vger.kernel.org Description: @@ -799,6 +811,7 @@ What: /sys/.../iio:deviceX/scan_elements/in_voltageY_supply_type What: /sys/.../iio:deviceX/scan_elements/in_timestamp_type What: /sys/.../iio:deviceX/scan_elements/in_pressureY_type What: /sys/.../iio:deviceX/scan_elements/in_pressure_type +What: /sys/.../iio:deviceX/scan_elements/in_rot_quaternion_type KernelVersion: 2.6.37 Contact: linux-iio@vger.kernel.org Description: @@ -845,6 +858,7 @@ What: /sys/.../iio:deviceX/scan_elements/in_incli_y_index What: /sys/.../iio:deviceX/scan_elements/in_timestamp_index What: /sys/.../iio:deviceX/scan_elements/in_pressureY_index What: /sys/.../iio:deviceX/scan_elements/in_pressure_index +What: /sys/.../iio:deviceX/scan_elements/in_rot_quaternion_index KernelVersion: 2.6.37 Contact: linux-iio@vger.kernel.org Description: @@ -881,6 +895,25 @@ Description: on-chip EEPROM. After power-up or chip reset the device will automatically load the saved configuration. +What: /sys/.../iio:deviceX/in_illuminanceY_input +What: /sys/.../iio:deviceX/in_illuminanceY_raw +What: /sys/.../iio:deviceX/in_illuminanceY_mean_raw +KernelVersion: 3.4 +Contact: linux-iio@vger.kernel.org +Description: + Illuminance measurement, units after application of scale + and offset are lux. + +What: /sys/.../iio:deviceX/in_intensityY_raw +What: /sys/.../iio:deviceX/in_intensityY_ir_raw +What: /sys/.../iio:deviceX/in_intensityY_both_raw +KernelVersion: 3.4 +Contact: linux-iio@vger.kernel.org +Description: + Unit-less light intensity. Modifiers both and ir indicate + that measurements contains visible and infrared light + components or just infrared light, respectively. + What: /sys/.../iio:deviceX/in_intensity_red_integration_time What: /sys/.../iio:deviceX/in_intensity_green_integration_time What: /sys/.../iio:deviceX/in_intensity_blue_integration_time @@ -891,3 +924,12 @@ Contact: linux-iio@vger.kernel.org Description: This attribute is used to get/set the integration time in seconds. + +What: /sys/bus/iio/devices/iio:deviceX/in_rot_quaternion_raw +KernelVersion: 3.15 +Contact: linux-iio@vger.kernel.org +Description: + Raw value of quaternion components using a format + x y z w. Here x, y, and z component represents the axis about + which a rotation will occur and w component represents the + amount of rotation. diff --git a/Documentation/ABI/testing/sysfs-bus-iio-proximity-as3935 b/Documentation/ABI/testing/sysfs-bus-iio-proximity-as3935 new file mode 100644 index 00000000000..6708c5e264a --- /dev/null +++ b/Documentation/ABI/testing/sysfs-bus-iio-proximity-as3935 @@ -0,0 +1,16 @@ +What /sys/bus/iio/devices/iio:deviceX/in_proximity_raw +Date: March 2014 +KernelVersion: 3.15 +Contact: Matt Ranostay <mranostay@gmail.com> +Description: + Get the current distance in meters of storm (1km steps) + 1000-40000 = distance in meters + +What /sys/bus/iio/devices/iio:deviceX/sensor_sensitivity +Date: March 2014 +KernelVersion: 3.15 +Contact: Matt Ranostay <mranostay@gmail.com> +Description: + Show or set the gain boost of the amp, from 0-31 range. + 18 = indoors (default) + 14 = outdoors diff --git a/Documentation/ABI/testing/sysfs-bus-pci b/Documentation/ABI/testing/sysfs-bus-pci index ab8d76dfaa8..6615fda0abf 100644 --- a/Documentation/ABI/testing/sysfs-bus-pci +++ b/Documentation/ABI/testing/sysfs-bus-pci @@ -250,3 +250,24 @@ Description: valid. For example, writing a 2 to this file when sriov_numvfs is not 0 and not 2 already will return an error. Writing a 10 when the value of sriov_totalvfs is 8 will return an error. + +What: /sys/bus/pci/devices/.../driver_override +Date: April 2014 +Contact: Alex Williamson <alex.williamson@redhat.com> +Description: + This file allows the driver for a device to be specified which + will override standard static and dynamic ID matching. When + specified, only a driver with a name matching the value written + to driver_override will have an opportunity to bind to the + device. The override is specified by writing a string to the + driver_override file (echo pci-stub > driver_override) and + may be cleared with an empty string (echo > driver_override). + This returns the device to standard matching rules binding. + Writing to driver_override does not automatically unbind the + device from its current driver or make any attempt to + automatically load the specified driver. If no driver with a + matching name is currently loaded in the kernel, the device + will not bind to any driver. This also allows devices to + opt-out of driver binding using a driver_override name such as + "none". Only a single driver may be specified in the override, + there is no support for parsing delimiters. diff --git a/Documentation/ABI/testing/sysfs-devices-system-cpu b/Documentation/ABI/testing/sysfs-devices-system-cpu index d5a0d33c571..acb9bfc89b4 100644 --- a/Documentation/ABI/testing/sysfs-devices-system-cpu +++ b/Documentation/ABI/testing/sysfs-devices-system-cpu @@ -128,7 +128,7 @@ Description: Discover cpuidle policy and mechanism What: /sys/devices/system/cpu/cpu#/cpufreq/* Date: pre-git history -Contact: cpufreq@vger.kernel.org +Contact: linux-pm@vger.kernel.org Description: Discover and change clock speed of CPUs Clock scaling allows you to change the clock speed of the @@ -146,7 +146,7 @@ Description: Discover and change clock speed of CPUs What: /sys/devices/system/cpu/cpu#/cpufreq/freqdomain_cpus Date: June 2013 -Contact: cpufreq@vger.kernel.org +Contact: linux-pm@vger.kernel.org Description: Discover CPUs in the same CPU frequency coordination domain freqdomain_cpus is the list of CPUs (online+offline) that share diff --git a/Documentation/ABI/testing/sysfs-driver-hid-thingm b/Documentation/ABI/testing/sysfs-driver-hid-thingm deleted file mode 100644 index abcffeedd20..00000000000 --- a/Documentation/ABI/testing/sysfs-driver-hid-thingm +++ /dev/null @@ -1,23 +0,0 @@ -What: /sys/class/leds/blink1::<serial>/rgb -Date: January 2013 -Contact: Vivien Didelot <vivien.didelot@savoirfairelinux.com> -Description: The ThingM blink1 is an USB RGB LED. The color notation is - 3-byte hexadecimal. Read this attribute to get the last set - color. Write the 24-bit hexadecimal color to change the current - LED color. The default color is full white (0xFFFFFF). - For instance, set the color to green with: echo 00FF00 > rgb - -What: /sys/class/leds/blink1::<serial>/fade -Date: January 2013 -Contact: Vivien Didelot <vivien.didelot@savoirfairelinux.com> -Description: This attribute allows to set a fade time in milliseconds for - the next color change. Read the attribute to know the current - fade time. The default value is set to 0 (no fade time). For - instance, set a fade time of 2 seconds with: echo 2000 > fade - -What: /sys/class/leds/blink1::<serial>/play -Date: January 2013 -Contact: Vivien Didelot <vivien.didelot@savoirfairelinux.com> -Description: This attribute is used to play/pause the light patterns. Write 1 - to start playing, 0 to stop. Reading this attribute returns the - current playing status. diff --git a/Documentation/ABI/testing/sysfs-platform-brcmstb-gisb-arb b/Documentation/ABI/testing/sysfs-platform-brcmstb-gisb-arb new file mode 100644 index 00000000000..f1bad92bbe2 --- /dev/null +++ b/Documentation/ABI/testing/sysfs-platform-brcmstb-gisb-arb @@ -0,0 +1,8 @@ +What: /sys/devices/../../gisb_arb_timeout +Date: May 2014 +KernelVersion: 3.17 +Contact: Florian Fainelli <f.fainelli@gmail.com> +Description: + Returns the currently configured raw timeout value of the + Broadcom Set Top Box internal GISB bus arbiter. Minimum value + is 1, and maximum value is 0xffffffff. diff --git a/Documentation/ABI/testing/sysfs-platform-chipidea-usb-otg b/Documentation/ABI/testing/sysfs-platform-chipidea-usb-otg new file mode 100644 index 00000000000..151c59578db --- /dev/null +++ b/Documentation/ABI/testing/sysfs-platform-chipidea-usb-otg @@ -0,0 +1,56 @@ +What: /sys/bus/platform/devices/ci_hdrc.0/inputs/a_bus_req +Date: Feb 2014 +Contact: Li Jun <b47624@freescale.com> +Description: + Can be set and read. + Set a_bus_req(A-device bus request) input to be 1 if + the application running on the A-device wants to use the bus, + and to be 0 when the application no longer wants to use + the bus(or wants to work as peripheral). a_bus_req can also + be set to 1 by kernel in response to remote wakeup signaling + from the B-device, the A-device should decide to resume the bus. + + Valid values are "1" and "0". + + Reading: returns 1 if the application running on the A-device + is using the bus as host role, otherwise 0. + +What: /sys/bus/platform/devices/ci_hdrc.0/inputs/a_bus_drop +Date: Feb 2014 +Contact: Li Jun <b47624@freescale.com> +Description: + Can be set and read + The a_bus_drop(A-device bus drop) input is 1 when the + application running on the A-device wants to power down + the bus, and is 0 otherwise, When a_bus_drop is 1, then + the a_bus_req shall be 0. + + Valid values are "1" and "0". + + Reading: returns 1 if the bus is off(vbus is turned off) by + A-device, otherwise 0. + +What: /sys/bus/platform/devices/ci_hdrc.0/inputs/b_bus_req +Date: Feb 2014 +Contact: Li Jun <b47624@freescale.com> +Description: + Can be set and read. + The b_bus_req(B-device bus request) input is 1 during the time + that the application running on the B-device wants to use the + bus as host, and is 0 when the application no longer wants to + work as host and decides to switch back to be peripheral. + + Valid values are "1" and "0". + + Reading: returns if the application running on the B device + is using the bus as host role, otherwise 0. + +What: /sys/bus/platform/devices/ci_hdrc.0/inputs/a_clr_err +Date: Feb 2014 +Contact: Li Jun <b47624@freescale.com> +Description: + Only can be set. + The a_clr_err(A-device Vbus error clear) input is used to clear + vbus error, then A-device will power down the bus. + + Valid value is "1" diff --git a/Documentation/ABI/testing/sysfs-power b/Documentation/ABI/testing/sysfs-power index 64c9276e942..f4551816329 100644 --- a/Documentation/ABI/testing/sysfs-power +++ b/Documentation/ABI/testing/sysfs-power @@ -7,19 +7,30 @@ Description: subsystem. What: /sys/power/state -Date: August 2006 +Date: May 2014 Contact: Rafael J. Wysocki <rjw@rjwysocki.net> Description: - The /sys/power/state file controls the system power state. - Reading from this file returns what states are supported, - which is hard-coded to 'freeze' (Low-Power Idle), 'standby' - (Power-On Suspend), 'mem' (Suspend-to-RAM), and 'disk' - (Suspend-to-Disk). + The /sys/power/state file controls system sleep states. + Reading from this file returns the available sleep state + labels, which may be "mem", "standby", "freeze" and "disk" + (hibernation). The meanings of the first three labels depend on + the relative_sleep_states command line argument as follows: + 1) relative_sleep_states = 1 + "mem", "standby", "freeze" represent non-hibernation sleep + states from the deepest ("mem", always present) to the + shallowest ("freeze"). "standby" and "freeze" may or may + not be present depending on the capabilities of the + platform. "freeze" can only be present if "standby" is + present. + 2) relative_sleep_states = 0 (default) + "mem" - "suspend-to-RAM", present if supported. + "standby" - "power-on suspend", present if supported. + "freeze" - "suspend-to-idle", always present. Writing to this file one of these strings causes the system to - transition into that state. Please see the file - Documentation/power/states.txt for a description of each of - these states. + transition into the corresponding state, if available. See + Documentation/power/states.txt for a description of what + "suspend-to-RAM", "power-on suspend" and "suspend-to-idle" mean. What: /sys/power/disk Date: September 2006 diff --git a/Documentation/Changes b/Documentation/Changes index 07c75d18154..2254db0f00a 100644 --- a/Documentation/Changes +++ b/Documentation/Changes @@ -73,6 +73,11 @@ Perl You will need perl 5 and the following modules: Getopt::Long, Getopt::Std, File::Basename, and File::Find to build the kernel. +BC +-- + +You will need bc to build kernels 3.10 and higher + System utilities ================ diff --git a/Documentation/CodingStyle b/Documentation/CodingStyle index 7fe0546c504..6b6bef31e95 100644 --- a/Documentation/CodingStyle +++ b/Documentation/CodingStyle @@ -660,15 +660,23 @@ There are a number of driver model diagnostic macros in <linux/device.h> which you should use to make sure messages are matched to the right device and driver, and are tagged with the right level: dev_err(), dev_warn(), dev_info(), and so forth. For messages that aren't associated with a -particular device, <linux/printk.h> defines pr_debug() and pr_info(). +particular device, <linux/printk.h> defines pr_notice(), pr_info(), +pr_warn(), pr_err(), etc. Coming up with good debugging messages can be quite a challenge; and once -you have them, they can be a huge help for remote troubleshooting. Such -messages should be compiled out when the DEBUG symbol is not defined (that -is, by default they are not included). When you use dev_dbg() or pr_debug(), -that's automatic. Many subsystems have Kconfig options to turn on -DDEBUG. -A related convention uses VERBOSE_DEBUG to add dev_vdbg() messages to the -ones already enabled by DEBUG. +you have them, they can be a huge help for remote troubleshooting. However +debug message printing is handled differently than printing other non-debug +messages. While the other pr_XXX() functions print unconditionally, +pr_debug() does not; it is compiled out by default, unless either DEBUG is +defined or CONFIG_DYNAMIC_DEBUG is set. That is true for dev_dbg() also, +and a related convention uses VERBOSE_DEBUG to add dev_vdbg() messages to +the ones already enabled by DEBUG. + +Many subsystems have Kconfig debug options to turn on -DDEBUG in the +corresponding Makefile; in other cases specific files #define DEBUG. And +when a debug message should be unconditionally printed, such as if it is +already inside a debug-related #ifdef secton, printk(KERN_DEBUG ...) can be +used. Chapter 14: Allocating memory diff --git a/Documentation/DMA-API-HOWTO.txt b/Documentation/DMA-API-HOWTO.txt index 5e983031cc1..dcbbe3602d7 100644 --- a/Documentation/DMA-API-HOWTO.txt +++ b/Documentation/DMA-API-HOWTO.txt @@ -9,16 +9,76 @@ This is a guide to device driver writers on how to use the DMA API with example pseudo-code. For a concise description of the API, see DMA-API.txt. -Most of the 64bit platforms have special hardware that translates bus -addresses (DMA addresses) into physical addresses. This is similar to -how page tables and/or a TLB translates virtual addresses to physical -addresses on a CPU. This is needed so that e.g. PCI devices can -access with a Single Address Cycle (32bit DMA address) any page in the -64bit physical address space. Previously in Linux those 64bit -platforms had to set artificial limits on the maximum RAM size in the -system, so that the virt_to_bus() static scheme works (the DMA address -translation tables were simply filled on bootup to map each bus -address to the physical page __pa(bus_to_virt())). + CPU and DMA addresses + +There are several kinds of addresses involved in the DMA API, and it's +important to understand the differences. + +The kernel normally uses virtual addresses. Any address returned by +kmalloc(), vmalloc(), and similar interfaces is a virtual address and can +be stored in a "void *". + +The virtual memory system (TLB, page tables, etc.) translates virtual +addresses to CPU physical addresses, which are stored as "phys_addr_t" or +"resource_size_t". The kernel manages device resources like registers as +physical addresses. These are the addresses in /proc/iomem. The physical +address is not directly useful to a driver; it must use ioremap() to map +the space and produce a virtual address. + +I/O devices use a third kind of address: a "bus address" or "DMA address". +If a device has registers at an MMIO address, or if it performs DMA to read +or write system memory, the addresses used by the device are bus addresses. +In some systems, bus addresses are identical to CPU physical addresses, but +in general they are not. IOMMUs and host bridges can produce arbitrary +mappings between physical and bus addresses. + +Here's a picture and some examples: + + CPU CPU Bus + Virtual Physical Address + Address Address Space + Space Space + + +-------+ +------+ +------+ + | | |MMIO | Offset | | + | | Virtual |Space | applied | | + C +-------+ --------> B +------+ ----------> +------+ A + | | mapping | | by host | | + +-----+ | | | | bridge | | +--------+ + | | | | +------+ | | | | + | CPU | | | | RAM | | | | Device | + | | | | | | | | | | + +-----+ +-------+ +------+ +------+ +--------+ + | | Virtual |Buffer| Mapping | | + X +-------+ --------> Y +------+ <---------- +------+ Z + | | mapping | RAM | by IOMMU + | | | | + | | | | + +-------+ +------+ + +During the enumeration process, the kernel learns about I/O devices and +their MMIO space and the host bridges that connect them to the system. For +example, if a PCI device has a BAR, the kernel reads the bus address (A) +from the BAR and converts it to a CPU physical address (B). The address B +is stored in a struct resource and usually exposed via /proc/iomem. When a +driver claims a device, it typically uses ioremap() to map physical address +B at a virtual address (C). It can then use, e.g., ioread32(C), to access +the device registers at bus address A. + +If the device supports DMA, the driver sets up a buffer using kmalloc() or +a similar interface, which returns a virtual address (X). The virtual +memory system maps X to a physical address (Y) in system RAM. The driver +can use virtual address X to access the buffer, but the device itself +cannot because DMA doesn't go through the CPU virtual memory system. + +In some simple systems, the device can do DMA directly to physical address +Y. But in many others, there is IOMMU hardware that translates bus +addresses to physical addresses, e.g., it translates Z to Y. This is part +of the reason for the DMA API: the driver can give a virtual address X to +an interface like dma_map_single(), which sets up any required IOMMU +mapping and returns the bus address Z. The driver then tells the device to +do DMA to Z, and the IOMMU maps it to the buffer at address Y in system +RAM. So that Linux can use the dynamic DMA mapping, it needs some help from the drivers, namely it has to take into account that DMA addresses should be @@ -29,17 +89,17 @@ The following API will work of course even on platforms where no such hardware exists. Note that the DMA API works with any bus independent of the underlying -microprocessor architecture. You should use the DMA API rather than -the bus specific DMA API (e.g. pci_dma_*). +microprocessor architecture. You should use the DMA API rather than the +bus-specific DMA API, i.e., use the dma_map_*() interfaces rather than the +pci_map_*() interfaces. First of all, you should make sure #include <linux/dma-mapping.h> -is in your driver. This file will obtain for you the definition of the -dma_addr_t (which can hold any valid DMA address for the platform) -type which should be used everywhere you hold a DMA (bus) address -returned from the DMA mapping functions. +is in your driver, which provides the definition of dma_addr_t. This type +can hold any valid DMA or bus address for the platform and should be used +everywhere you hold a DMA address returned from the DMA mapping functions. What memory is DMA'able? @@ -123,9 +183,9 @@ Here, dev is a pointer to the device struct of your device, and mask is a bit mask describing which bits of an address your device supports. It returns zero if your card can perform DMA properly on the machine given the address mask you provided. In general, the -device struct of your device is embedded in the bus specific device -struct of your device. For example, a pointer to the device struct of -your PCI device is pdev->dev (pdev is a pointer to the PCI device +device struct of your device is embedded in the bus-specific device +struct of your device. For example, &pdev->dev is a pointer to the +device struct of a PCI device (pdev is a pointer to the PCI device struct of your device). If it returns non-zero, your device cannot perform DMA properly on @@ -147,8 +207,7 @@ exactly why. The standard 32-bit addressing device would do something like this: if (dma_set_mask_and_coherent(dev, DMA_BIT_MASK(32))) { - printk(KERN_WARNING - "mydev: No suitable DMA available.\n"); + dev_warn(dev, "mydev: No suitable DMA available\n"); goto ignore_this_device; } @@ -170,8 +229,7 @@ all 64-bits when accessing streaming DMA: } else if (!dma_set_mask(dev, DMA_BIT_MASK(32))) { using_dac = 0; } else { - printk(KERN_WARNING - "mydev: No suitable DMA available.\n"); + dev_warn(dev, "mydev: No suitable DMA available\n"); goto ignore_this_device; } @@ -187,22 +245,20 @@ the case would look like this: using_dac = 0; consistent_using_dac = 0; } else { - printk(KERN_WARNING - "mydev: No suitable DMA available.\n"); + dev_warn(dev, "mydev: No suitable DMA available\n"); goto ignore_this_device; } -The coherent coherent mask will always be able to set the same or a -smaller mask as the streaming mask. However for the rare case that a -device driver only uses consistent allocations, one would have to -check the return value from dma_set_coherent_mask(). +The coherent mask will always be able to set the same or a smaller mask as +the streaming mask. However for the rare case that a device driver only +uses consistent allocations, one would have to check the return value from +dma_set_coherent_mask(). Finally, if your device can only drive the low 24-bits of address you might do something like: if (dma_set_mask(dev, DMA_BIT_MASK(24))) { - printk(KERN_WARNING - "mydev: 24-bit DMA addressing not available.\n"); + dev_warn(dev, "mydev: 24-bit DMA addressing not available\n"); goto ignore_this_device; } @@ -232,14 +288,14 @@ Here is pseudo-code showing how this might be done: card->playback_enabled = 1; } else { card->playback_enabled = 0; - printk(KERN_WARNING "%s: Playback disabled due to DMA limitations.\n", + dev_warn(dev, "%s: Playback disabled due to DMA limitations\n", card->name); } if (!dma_set_mask(dev, RECORD_ADDRESS_BITS)) { card->record_enabled = 1; } else { card->record_enabled = 0; - printk(KERN_WARNING "%s: Record disabled due to DMA limitations.\n", + dev_warn(dev, "%s: Record disabled due to DMA limitations\n", card->name); } @@ -331,7 +387,7 @@ context with the GFP_ATOMIC flag. Size is the length of the region you want to allocate, in bytes. This routine will allocate RAM for that region, so it acts similarly to -__get_free_pages (but takes size instead of a page order). If your +__get_free_pages() (but takes size instead of a page order). If your driver needs regions sized smaller than a page, you may prefer using the dma_pool interface, described below. @@ -343,11 +399,11 @@ the consistent DMA mask has been explicitly changed via dma_set_coherent_mask(). This is true of the dma_pool interface as well. -dma_alloc_coherent returns two values: the virtual address which you +dma_alloc_coherent() returns two values: the virtual address which you can use to access it from the CPU and dma_handle which you pass to the card. -The cpu return address and the DMA bus master address are both +The CPU virtual address and the DMA bus address are both guaranteed to be aligned to the smallest PAGE_SIZE order which is greater than or equal to the requested size. This invariant exists (for example) to guarantee that if you allocate a chunk @@ -359,13 +415,13 @@ To unmap and free such a DMA region, you call: dma_free_coherent(dev, size, cpu_addr, dma_handle); where dev, size are the same as in the above call and cpu_addr and -dma_handle are the values dma_alloc_coherent returned to you. +dma_handle are the values dma_alloc_coherent() returned to you. This function may not be called in interrupt context. If your driver needs lots of smaller memory regions, you can write -custom code to subdivide pages returned by dma_alloc_coherent, +custom code to subdivide pages returned by dma_alloc_coherent(), or you can use the dma_pool API to do that. A dma_pool is like -a kmem_cache, but it uses dma_alloc_coherent not __get_free_pages. +a kmem_cache, but it uses dma_alloc_coherent(), not __get_free_pages(). Also, it understands common hardware constraints for alignment, like queue heads needing to be aligned on N byte boundaries. @@ -373,37 +429,37 @@ Create a dma_pool like this: struct dma_pool *pool; - pool = dma_pool_create(name, dev, size, align, alloc); + pool = dma_pool_create(name, dev, size, align, boundary); The "name" is for diagnostics (like a kmem_cache name); dev and size are as above. The device's hardware alignment requirement for this type of data is "align" (which is expressed in bytes, and must be a power of two). If your device has no boundary crossing restrictions, -pass 0 for alloc; passing 4096 says memory allocated from this pool +pass 0 for boundary; passing 4096 says memory allocated from this pool must not cross 4KByte boundaries (but at that time it may be better to -go for dma_alloc_coherent directly instead). +use dma_alloc_coherent() directly instead). -Allocate memory from a dma pool like this: +Allocate memory from a DMA pool like this: cpu_addr = dma_pool_alloc(pool, flags, &dma_handle); -flags are SLAB_KERNEL if blocking is permitted (not in_interrupt nor -holding SMP locks), SLAB_ATOMIC otherwise. Like dma_alloc_coherent, +flags are GFP_KERNEL if blocking is permitted (not in_interrupt nor +holding SMP locks), GFP_ATOMIC otherwise. Like dma_alloc_coherent(), this returns two values, cpu_addr and dma_handle. Free memory that was allocated from a dma_pool like this: dma_pool_free(pool, cpu_addr, dma_handle); -where pool is what you passed to dma_pool_alloc, and cpu_addr and -dma_handle are the values dma_pool_alloc returned. This function +where pool is what you passed to dma_pool_alloc(), and cpu_addr and +dma_handle are the values dma_pool_alloc() returned. This function may be called in interrupt context. Destroy a dma_pool by calling: dma_pool_destroy(pool); -Make sure you've called dma_pool_free for all memory allocated +Make sure you've called dma_pool_free() for all memory allocated from a pool before you destroy the pool. This function may not be called in interrupt context. @@ -418,7 +474,7 @@ one of the following values: DMA_FROM_DEVICE DMA_NONE -One should provide the exact DMA direction if you know it. +You should provide the exact DMA direction if you know it. DMA_TO_DEVICE means "from main memory to the device" DMA_FROM_DEVICE means "from the device to main memory" @@ -489,14 +545,14 @@ and to unmap it: dma_unmap_single(dev, dma_handle, size, direction); You should call dma_mapping_error() as dma_map_single() could fail and return -error. Not all dma implementations support dma_mapping_error() interface. +error. Not all DMA implementations support the dma_mapping_error() interface. However, it is a good practice to call dma_mapping_error() interface, which will invoke the generic mapping error check interface. Doing so will ensure -that the mapping code will work correctly on all dma implementations without +that the mapping code will work correctly on all DMA implementations without any dependency on the specifics of the underlying implementation. Using the returned address without checking for errors could result in failures ranging from panics to silent data corruption. A couple of examples of incorrect ways -to check for errors that make assumptions about the underlying dma +to check for errors that make assumptions about the underlying DMA implementation are as follows and these are applicable to dma_map_page() as well. @@ -516,13 +572,13 @@ Incorrect example 2: goto map_error; } -You should call dma_unmap_single when the DMA activity is finished, e.g. +You should call dma_unmap_single() when the DMA activity is finished, e.g., from the interrupt which told you that the DMA transfer is done. -Using cpu pointers like this for single mappings has a disadvantage, +Using CPU pointers like this for single mappings has a disadvantage: you cannot reference HIGHMEM memory in this way. Thus, there is a -map/unmap interface pair akin to dma_{map,unmap}_single. These -interfaces deal with page/offset pairs instead of cpu pointers. +map/unmap interface pair akin to dma_{map,unmap}_single(). These +interfaces deal with page/offset pairs instead of CPU pointers. Specifically: struct device *dev = &my_dev->dev; @@ -550,7 +606,7 @@ Here, "offset" means byte offset within the given page. You should call dma_mapping_error() as dma_map_page() could fail and return error as outlined under the dma_map_single() discussion. -You should call dma_unmap_page when the DMA activity is finished, e.g. +You should call dma_unmap_page() when the DMA activity is finished, e.g., from the interrupt which told you that the DMA transfer is done. With scatterlists, you map a region gathered from several regions by: @@ -588,18 +644,16 @@ PLEASE NOTE: The 'nents' argument to the dma_unmap_sg call must be it should _NOT_ be the 'count' value _returned_ from the dma_map_sg call. -Every dma_map_{single,sg} call should have its dma_unmap_{single,sg} -counterpart, because the bus address space is a shared resource (although -in some ports the mapping is per each BUS so less devices contend for the -same bus address space) and you could render the machine unusable by eating -all bus addresses. +Every dma_map_{single,sg}() call should have its dma_unmap_{single,sg}() +counterpart, because the bus address space is a shared resource and +you could render the machine unusable by consuming all bus addresses. If you need to use the same streaming DMA region multiple times and touch the data in between the DMA transfers, the buffer needs to be synced -properly in order for the cpu and device to see the most uptodate and +properly in order for the CPU and device to see the most up-to-date and correct copy of the DMA buffer. -So, firstly, just map it with dma_map_{single,sg}, and after each DMA +So, firstly, just map it with dma_map_{single,sg}(), and after each DMA transfer call either: dma_sync_single_for_cpu(dev, dma_handle, size, direction); @@ -611,7 +665,7 @@ or: as appropriate. Then, if you wish to let the device get at the DMA area again, -finish accessing the data with the cpu, and then before actually +finish accessing the data with the CPU, and then before actually giving the buffer to the hardware call either: dma_sync_single_for_device(dev, dma_handle, size, direction); @@ -623,9 +677,9 @@ or: as appropriate. After the last DMA transfer call one of the DMA unmap routines -dma_unmap_{single,sg}. If you don't touch the data from the first dma_map_* -call till dma_unmap_*, then you don't have to call the dma_sync_* -routines at all. +dma_unmap_{single,sg}(). If you don't touch the data from the first +dma_map_*() call till dma_unmap_*(), then you don't have to call the +dma_sync_*() routines at all. Here is pseudo code which shows a situation in which you would need to use the dma_sync_*() interfaces. @@ -690,12 +744,12 @@ to use the dma_sync_*() interfaces. } } -Drivers converted fully to this interface should not use virt_to_bus any -longer, nor should they use bus_to_virt. Some drivers have to be changed a -little bit, because there is no longer an equivalent to bus_to_virt in the +Drivers converted fully to this interface should not use virt_to_bus() any +longer, nor should they use bus_to_virt(). Some drivers have to be changed a +little bit, because there is no longer an equivalent to bus_to_virt() in the dynamic DMA mapping scheme - you have to always store the DMA addresses -returned by the dma_alloc_coherent, dma_pool_alloc, and dma_map_single -calls (dma_map_sg stores them in the scatterlist itself if the platform +returned by the dma_alloc_coherent(), dma_pool_alloc(), and dma_map_single() +calls (dma_map_sg() stores them in the scatterlist itself if the platform supports dynamic DMA mapping in hardware) in your driver structures and/or in the card registers. @@ -709,9 +763,9 @@ as it is impossible to correctly support them. DMA address space is limited on some architectures and an allocation failure can be determined by: -- checking if dma_alloc_coherent returns NULL or dma_map_sg returns 0 +- checking if dma_alloc_coherent() returns NULL or dma_map_sg returns 0 -- checking the returned dma_addr_t of dma_map_single and dma_map_page +- checking the dma_addr_t returned from dma_map_single() and dma_map_page() by using dma_mapping_error(): dma_addr_t dma_handle; @@ -794,7 +848,7 @@ Example 2: (if buffers are allocated in a loop, unmap all mapped buffers when dma_unmap_single(array[i].dma_addr); } -Networking drivers must call dev_kfree_skb to free the socket buffer +Networking drivers must call dev_kfree_skb() to free the socket buffer and return NETDEV_TX_OK if the DMA mapping fails on the transmit hook (ndo_start_xmit). This means that the socket buffer is just dropped in the failure case. @@ -831,7 +885,7 @@ transform some example code. DEFINE_DMA_UNMAP_LEN(len); }; -2) Use dma_unmap_{addr,len}_set to set these values. +2) Use dma_unmap_{addr,len}_set() to set these values. Example, before: ringp->mapping = FOO; @@ -842,7 +896,7 @@ transform some example code. dma_unmap_addr_set(ringp, mapping, FOO); dma_unmap_len_set(ringp, len, BAR); -3) Use dma_unmap_{addr,len} to access these values. +3) Use dma_unmap_{addr,len}() to access these values. Example, before: dma_unmap_single(dev, ringp->mapping, ringp->len, diff --git a/Documentation/DMA-API.txt b/Documentation/DMA-API.txt index e865279cec5..52088408668 100644 --- a/Documentation/DMA-API.txt +++ b/Documentation/DMA-API.txt @@ -4,22 +4,26 @@ James E.J. Bottomley <James.Bottomley@HansenPartnership.com> This document describes the DMA API. For a more gentle introduction -of the API (and actual examples) see -Documentation/DMA-API-HOWTO.txt. +of the API (and actual examples), see Documentation/DMA-API-HOWTO.txt. -This API is split into two pieces. Part I describes the API. Part II -describes the extensions to the API for supporting non-consistent -memory machines. Unless you know that your driver absolutely has to -support non-consistent platforms (this is usually only legacy -platforms) you should only use the API described in part I. +This API is split into two pieces. Part I describes the basic API. +Part II describes extensions for supporting non-consistent memory +machines. Unless you know that your driver absolutely has to support +non-consistent platforms (this is usually only legacy platforms) you +should only use the API described in part I. Part I - dma_ API ------------------------------------- -To get the dma_ API, you must #include <linux/dma-mapping.h> +To get the dma_ API, you must #include <linux/dma-mapping.h>. This +provides dma_addr_t and the interfaces described below. +A dma_addr_t can hold any valid DMA or bus address for the platform. It +can be given to a device to use as a DMA source or target. A CPU cannot +reference a dma_addr_t directly because there may be translation between +its physical address space and the bus address space. -Part Ia - Using large dma-coherent buffers +Part Ia - Using large DMA-coherent buffers ------------------------------------------ void * @@ -33,20 +37,21 @@ to make sure to flush the processor's write buffers before telling devices to read that memory.) This routine allocates a region of <size> bytes of consistent memory. -It also returns a <dma_handle> which may be cast to an unsigned -integer the same width as the bus and used as the physical address -base of the region. -Returns: a pointer to the allocated region (in the processor's virtual +It returns a pointer to the allocated region (in the processor's virtual address space) or NULL if the allocation failed. +It also returns a <dma_handle> which may be cast to an unsigned integer the +same width as the bus and given to the device as the bus address base of +the region. + Note: consistent memory can be expensive on some platforms, and the minimum allocation length may be as big as a page, so you should consolidate your requests for consistent memory as much as possible. The simplest way to do that is to use the dma_pool calls (see below). -The flag parameter (dma_alloc_coherent only) allows the caller to -specify the GFP_ flags (see kmalloc) for the allocation (the +The flag parameter (dma_alloc_coherent() only) allows the caller to +specify the GFP_ flags (see kmalloc()) for the allocation (the implementation may choose to ignore flags that affect the location of the returned memory, like GFP_DMA). @@ -61,24 +66,24 @@ void dma_free_coherent(struct device *dev, size_t size, void *cpu_addr, dma_addr_t dma_handle) -Free the region of consistent memory you previously allocated. dev, -size and dma_handle must all be the same as those passed into the -consistent allocate. cpu_addr must be the virtual address returned by -the consistent allocate. +Free a region of consistent memory you previously allocated. dev, +size and dma_handle must all be the same as those passed into +dma_alloc_coherent(). cpu_addr must be the virtual address returned by +the dma_alloc_coherent(). Note that unlike their sibling allocation calls, these routines may only be called with IRQs enabled. -Part Ib - Using small dma-coherent buffers +Part Ib - Using small DMA-coherent buffers ------------------------------------------ To get this part of the dma_ API, you must #include <linux/dmapool.h> -Many drivers need lots of small dma-coherent memory regions for DMA +Many drivers need lots of small DMA-coherent memory regions for DMA descriptors or I/O buffers. Rather than allocating in units of a page or more using dma_alloc_coherent(), you can use DMA pools. These work -much like a struct kmem_cache, except that they use the dma-coherent allocator, +much like a struct kmem_cache, except that they use the DMA-coherent allocator, not __get_free_pages(). Also, they understand common hardware constraints for alignment, like queue heads needing to be aligned on N-byte boundaries. @@ -87,7 +92,7 @@ for alignment, like queue heads needing to be aligned on N-byte boundaries. dma_pool_create(const char *name, struct device *dev, size_t size, size_t align, size_t alloc); -The pool create() routines initialize a pool of dma-coherent buffers +dma_pool_create() initializes a pool of DMA-coherent buffers for use with a given device. It must be called in a context which can sleep. @@ -102,25 +107,26 @@ from this pool must not cross 4KByte boundaries. void *dma_pool_alloc(struct dma_pool *pool, gfp_t gfp_flags, dma_addr_t *dma_handle); -This allocates memory from the pool; the returned memory will meet the size -and alignment requirements specified at creation time. Pass GFP_ATOMIC to -prevent blocking, or if it's permitted (not in_interrupt, not holding SMP locks), -pass GFP_KERNEL to allow blocking. Like dma_alloc_coherent(), this returns -two values: an address usable by the cpu, and the dma address usable by the -pool's device. +This allocates memory from the pool; the returned memory will meet the +size and alignment requirements specified at creation time. Pass +GFP_ATOMIC to prevent blocking, or if it's permitted (not +in_interrupt, not holding SMP locks), pass GFP_KERNEL to allow +blocking. Like dma_alloc_coherent(), this returns two values: an +address usable by the CPU, and the DMA address usable by the pool's +device. void dma_pool_free(struct dma_pool *pool, void *vaddr, dma_addr_t addr); This puts memory back into the pool. The pool is what was passed to -the pool allocation routine; the cpu (vaddr) and dma addresses are what +dma_pool_alloc(); the CPU (vaddr) and DMA addresses are what were returned when that routine allocated the memory being freed. void dma_pool_destroy(struct dma_pool *pool); -The pool destroy() routines free the resources of the pool. They must be +dma_pool_destroy() frees the resources of the pool. It must be called in a context which can sleep. Make sure you've freed all allocated memory back to the pool before you destroy it. @@ -187,9 +193,9 @@ dma_map_single(struct device *dev, void *cpu_addr, size_t size, enum dma_data_direction direction) Maps a piece of processor virtual memory so it can be accessed by the -device and returns the physical handle of the memory. +device and returns the bus address of the memory. -The direction for both api's may be converted freely by casting. +The direction for both APIs may be converted freely by casting. However the dma_ API uses a strongly typed enumerator for its direction: @@ -198,31 +204,30 @@ DMA_TO_DEVICE data is going from the memory to the device DMA_FROM_DEVICE data is coming from the device to the memory DMA_BIDIRECTIONAL direction isn't known -Notes: Not all memory regions in a machine can be mapped by this -API. Further, regions that appear to be physically contiguous in -kernel virtual space may not be contiguous as physical memory. Since -this API does not provide any scatter/gather capability, it will fail -if the user tries to map a non-physically contiguous piece of memory. -For this reason, it is recommended that memory mapped by this API be -obtained only from sources which guarantee it to be physically contiguous -(like kmalloc). - -Further, the physical address of the memory must be within the -dma_mask of the device (the dma_mask represents a bit mask of the -addressable region for the device. I.e., if the physical address of -the memory anded with the dma_mask is still equal to the physical -address, then the device can perform DMA to the memory). In order to +Notes: Not all memory regions in a machine can be mapped by this API. +Further, contiguous kernel virtual space may not be contiguous as +physical memory. Since this API does not provide any scatter/gather +capability, it will fail if the user tries to map a non-physically +contiguous piece of memory. For this reason, memory to be mapped by +this API should be obtained from sources which guarantee it to be +physically contiguous (like kmalloc). + +Further, the bus address of the memory must be within the +dma_mask of the device (the dma_mask is a bit mask of the +addressable region for the device, i.e., if the bus address of +the memory ANDed with the dma_mask is still equal to the bus +address, then the device can perform DMA to the memory). To ensure that the memory allocated by kmalloc is within the dma_mask, the driver may specify various platform-dependent flags to restrict -the physical memory range of the allocation (e.g. on x86, GFP_DMA -guarantees to be within the first 16Mb of available physical memory, +the bus address range of the allocation (e.g., on x86, GFP_DMA +guarantees to be within the first 16MB of available bus addresses, as required by ISA devices). Note also that the above constraints on physical contiguity and dma_mask may not apply if the platform has an IOMMU (a device which -supplies a physical to virtual mapping between the I/O memory bus and -the device). However, to be portable, device driver writers may *not* -assume that such an IOMMU exists. +maps an I/O bus address to a physical memory address). However, to be +portable, device driver writers may *not* assume that such an IOMMU +exists. Warnings: Memory coherency operates at a granularity called the cache line width. In order for memory mapped by this API to operate @@ -281,9 +286,9 @@ cache width is. int dma_mapping_error(struct device *dev, dma_addr_t dma_addr) -In some circumstances dma_map_single and dma_map_page will fail to create +In some circumstances dma_map_single() and dma_map_page() will fail to create a mapping. A driver can check for these errors by testing the returned -dma address with dma_mapping_error(). A non-zero return value means the mapping +DMA address with dma_mapping_error(). A non-zero return value means the mapping could not be created and the driver should take appropriate action (e.g. reduce current DMA mapping usage or delay and try again later). @@ -291,7 +296,7 @@ reduce current DMA mapping usage or delay and try again later). dma_map_sg(struct device *dev, struct scatterlist *sg, int nents, enum dma_data_direction direction) -Returns: the number of physical segments mapped (this may be shorter +Returns: the number of bus address segments mapped (this may be shorter than <nents> passed in if some elements of the scatter/gather list are physically or virtually adjacent and an IOMMU maps them with a single entry). @@ -299,7 +304,7 @@ entry). Please note that the sg cannot be mapped again if it has been mapped once. The mapping process is allowed to destroy information in the sg. -As with the other mapping interfaces, dma_map_sg can fail. When it +As with the other mapping interfaces, dma_map_sg() can fail. When it does, 0 is returned and a driver must take appropriate action. It is critical that the driver do something, in the case of a block driver aborting the request or even oopsing is better than doing nothing and @@ -335,7 +340,7 @@ must be the same as those and passed in to the scatter/gather mapping API. Note: <nents> must be the number you passed in, *not* the number of -physical entries returned. +bus address entries returned. void dma_sync_single_for_cpu(struct device *dev, dma_addr_t dma_handle, size_t size, @@ -350,7 +355,7 @@ void dma_sync_sg_for_device(struct device *dev, struct scatterlist *sg, int nelems, enum dma_data_direction direction) -Synchronise a single contiguous or scatter/gather mapping for the cpu +Synchronise a single contiguous or scatter/gather mapping for the CPU and device. With the sync_sg API, all the parameters must be the same as those passed into the single mapping API. With the sync_single API, you can use dma_handle and size parameters that aren't identical to @@ -391,10 +396,10 @@ The four functions above are just like the counterpart functions without the _attrs suffixes, except that they pass an optional struct dma_attrs*. -struct dma_attrs encapsulates a set of "dma attributes". For the +struct dma_attrs encapsulates a set of "DMA attributes". For the definition of struct dma_attrs see linux/dma-attrs.h. -The interpretation of dma attributes is architecture-specific, and +The interpretation of DMA attributes is architecture-specific, and each attribute should be documented in Documentation/DMA-attributes.txt. If struct dma_attrs* is NULL, the semantics of each of these @@ -458,7 +463,7 @@ Note: where the platform can return consistent memory, it will guarantee that the sync points become nops. Warning: Handling non-consistent memory is a real pain. You should -only ever use this API if you positively know your driver will be +only use this API if you positively know your driver will be required to work on one of the rare (usually non-PCI) architectures that simply cannot make consistent memory. @@ -492,30 +497,29 @@ continuing on for size. Again, you *must* observe the cache line boundaries when doing this. int -dma_declare_coherent_memory(struct device *dev, dma_addr_t bus_addr, +dma_declare_coherent_memory(struct device *dev, phys_addr_t phys_addr, dma_addr_t device_addr, size_t size, int flags) -Declare region of memory to be handed out by dma_alloc_coherent when +Declare region of memory to be handed out by dma_alloc_coherent() when it's asked for coherent memory for this device. -bus_addr is the physical address to which the memory is currently -assigned in the bus responding region (this will be used by the -platform to perform the mapping). +phys_addr is the CPU physical address to which the memory is currently +assigned (this will be ioremapped so the CPU can access the region). -device_addr is the physical address the device needs to be programmed -with actually to address this memory (this will be handed out as the +device_addr is the bus address the device needs to be programmed +with to actually address this memory (this will be handed out as the dma_addr_t in dma_alloc_coherent()). size is the size of the area (must be multiples of PAGE_SIZE). -flags can be or'd together and are: +flags can be ORed together and are: DMA_MEMORY_MAP - request that the memory returned from dma_alloc_coherent() be directly writable. DMA_MEMORY_IO - request that the memory returned from -dma_alloc_coherent() be addressable using read/write/memcpy_toio etc. +dma_alloc_coherent() be addressable using read()/write()/memcpy_toio() etc. One or both of these flags must be present. @@ -572,7 +576,7 @@ region is occupied. Part III - Debug drivers use of the DMA-API ------------------------------------------- -The DMA-API as described above as some constraints. DMA addresses must be +The DMA-API as described above has some constraints. DMA addresses must be released with the corresponding function with the same size for example. With the advent of hardware IOMMUs it becomes more and more important that drivers do not violate those constraints. In the worst case such a violation can @@ -690,11 +694,11 @@ architectural default. void debug_dmap_mapping_error(struct device *dev, dma_addr_t dma_addr); dma-debug interface debug_dma_mapping_error() to debug drivers that fail -to check dma mapping errors on addresses returned by dma_map_single() and +to check DMA mapping errors on addresses returned by dma_map_single() and dma_map_page() interfaces. This interface clears a flag set by debug_dma_map_page() to indicate that dma_mapping_error() has been called by the driver. When driver does unmap, debug_dma_unmap() checks the flag and if this flag is still set, prints warning message that includes call trace that leads up to the unmap. This interface can be called from dma_mapping_error() -routines to enable dma mapping error check debugging. +routines to enable DMA mapping error check debugging. diff --git a/Documentation/DMA-ISA-LPC.txt b/Documentation/DMA-ISA-LPC.txt index e767805b418..b1a19835e90 100644 --- a/Documentation/DMA-ISA-LPC.txt +++ b/Documentation/DMA-ISA-LPC.txt @@ -16,7 +16,7 @@ To do ISA style DMA you need to include two headers: #include <asm/dma.h> The first is the generic DMA API used to convert virtual addresses to -physical addresses (see Documentation/DMA-API.txt for details). +bus addresses (see Documentation/DMA-API.txt for details). The second contains the routines specific to ISA DMA transfers. Since this is not present on all platforms make sure you construct your @@ -50,7 +50,7 @@ early as possible and not release it until the driver is unloaded.) Part III - Address translation ------------------------------ -To translate the virtual address to a physical use the normal DMA +To translate the virtual address to a bus address, use the normal DMA API. Do _not_ use isa_virt_to_phys() even though it does the same thing. The reason for this is that the function isa_virt_to_phys() will require a Kconfig dependency to ISA, not just ISA_DMA_API which diff --git a/Documentation/DMA-attributes.txt b/Documentation/DMA-attributes.txt index cc2450d8031..18dc52c4f2a 100644 --- a/Documentation/DMA-attributes.txt +++ b/Documentation/DMA-attributes.txt @@ -98,5 +98,5 @@ DMA_ATTR_FORCE_CONTIGUOUS By default DMA-mapping subsystem is allowed to assemble the buffer allocated by dma_alloc_attrs() function from individual pages if it can be mapped as contiguous chunk into device dma address space. By -specifing this attribute the allocated buffer is forced to be contiguous +specifying this attribute the allocated buffer is forced to be contiguous also in physical memory. diff --git a/Documentation/DocBook/Makefile b/Documentation/DocBook/Makefile index b444f2e8fe3..bec06659e0e 100644 --- a/Documentation/DocBook/Makefile +++ b/Documentation/DocBook/Makefile @@ -14,7 +14,8 @@ DOCBOOKS := z8530book.xml device-drivers.xml \ genericirq.xml s390-drivers.xml uio-howto.xml scsi.xml \ 80211.xml debugobjects.xml sh.xml regulator.xml \ alsa-driver-api.xml writing-an-alsa-driver.xml \ - tracepoint.xml drm.xml media_api.xml w1.xml + tracepoint.xml drm.xml media_api.xml w1.xml \ + writing_musb_glue_layer.xml include Documentation/DocBook/media/Makefile diff --git a/Documentation/DocBook/drm.tmpl b/Documentation/DocBook/drm.tmpl index 677a02553ec..ba60d93c185 100644 --- a/Documentation/DocBook/drm.tmpl +++ b/Documentation/DocBook/drm.tmpl @@ -79,7 +79,7 @@ <partintro> <para> This first part of the DRM Developer's Guide documents core DRM code, - helper libraries for writting drivers and generic userspace interfaces + helper libraries for writing drivers and generic userspace interfaces exposed by DRM drivers. </para> </partintro> @@ -459,7 +459,7 @@ char *date;</synopsis> providing a solution to every graphics memory-related problems, GEM identified common code between drivers and created a support library to share it. GEM has simpler initialization and execution requirements than - TTM, but has no video RAM management capabitilies and is thus limited to + TTM, but has no video RAM management capabilities and is thus limited to UMA devices. </para> <sect2> @@ -889,7 +889,7 @@ int (*prime_fd_to_handle)(struct drm_device *dev, vice versa. Drivers must use the kernel dma-buf buffer sharing framework to manage the PRIME file descriptors. Similar to the mode setting API PRIME is agnostic to the underlying buffer object manager, as - long as handles are 32bit unsinged integers. + long as handles are 32bit unsigned integers. </para> <para> While non-GEM drivers must implement the operations themselves, GEM @@ -2356,7 +2356,7 @@ void intel_crt_init(struct drm_device *dev) first create properties and then create and associate individual instances of those properties to objects. A property can be instantiated multiple times and associated with different objects. Values are stored in property - instances, and all other property information are stored in the propery + instances, and all other property information are stored in the property and shared between all instances of the property. </para> <para> @@ -2697,10 +2697,10 @@ int num_ioctls;</synopsis> <sect1> <title>Legacy Support Code</title> <para> - The section very brievely covers some of the old legacy support code which + The section very briefly covers some of the old legacy support code which is only used by old DRM drivers which have done a so-called shadow-attach to the underlying device instead of registering as a real driver. This - also includes some of the old generic buffer mangement and command + also includes some of the old generic buffer management and command submission code. Do not use any of this in new and modern drivers. </para> diff --git a/Documentation/DocBook/filesystems.tmpl b/Documentation/DocBook/filesystems.tmpl index 4f676838da0..bcdfdb9a927 100644 --- a/Documentation/DocBook/filesystems.tmpl +++ b/Documentation/DocBook/filesystems.tmpl @@ -62,7 +62,7 @@ !Efs/mpage.c !Efs/namei.c !Efs/buffer.c -!Efs/bio.c +!Eblock/bio.c !Efs/seq_file.c !Efs/filesystems.c !Efs/fs-writeback.c diff --git a/Documentation/DocBook/media/Makefile b/Documentation/DocBook/media/Makefile index f9fd615427f..1d27f0a1abd 100644 --- a/Documentation/DocBook/media/Makefile +++ b/Documentation/DocBook/media/Makefile @@ -195,7 +195,7 @@ DVB_DOCUMENTED = \ # install_media_images = \ - $(Q)cp $(OBJIMGFILES) $(MEDIA_SRC_DIR)/v4l/*.svg $(MEDIA_OBJ_DIR)/media_api + $(Q)-cp $(OBJIMGFILES) $(MEDIA_SRC_DIR)/v4l/*.svg $(MEDIA_OBJ_DIR)/media_api $(MEDIA_OBJ_DIR)/%: $(MEDIA_SRC_DIR)/%.b64 $(Q)base64 -d $< >$@ diff --git a/Documentation/DocBook/media/v4l/pixfmt.xml b/Documentation/DocBook/media/v4l/pixfmt.xml index ea514d6075c..91dcbc84f3f 100644 --- a/Documentation/DocBook/media/v4l/pixfmt.xml +++ b/Documentation/DocBook/media/v4l/pixfmt.xml @@ -772,7 +772,7 @@ extended control <constant>V4L2_CID_MPEG_STREAM_TYPE</constant>, see </row> <row id="V4L2-PIX-FMT-H264-MVC"> <entry><constant>V4L2_PIX_FMT_H264_MVC</constant></entry> - <entry>'MVC'</entry> + <entry>'M264'</entry> <entry>H264 MVC video elementary stream.</entry> </row> <row id="V4L2-PIX-FMT-H263"> @@ -812,7 +812,7 @@ extended control <constant>V4L2_CID_MPEG_STREAM_TYPE</constant>, see </row> <row id="V4L2-PIX-FMT-VP8"> <entry><constant>V4L2_PIX_FMT_VP8</constant></entry> - <entry>'VP8'</entry> + <entry>'VP80'</entry> <entry>VP8 video elementary stream.</entry> </row> </tbody> diff --git a/Documentation/DocBook/media/v4l/vidioc-subscribe-event.xml b/Documentation/DocBook/media/v4l/vidioc-subscribe-event.xml index f016254377a..17efa870d4d 100644 --- a/Documentation/DocBook/media/v4l/vidioc-subscribe-event.xml +++ b/Documentation/DocBook/media/v4l/vidioc-subscribe-event.xml @@ -167,7 +167,7 @@ or the pad index (when used with a subdevice node) from which you want to receive events.</para> - <para>This event has a &v4l2-event-source-change; associated + <para>This event has a &v4l2-event-src-change; associated with it. The <structfield>changes</structfield> bitfield denotes what has changed for the subscribed pad. If multiple events occurred before application could dequeue them, then the changes diff --git a/Documentation/DocBook/writing_musb_glue_layer.tmpl b/Documentation/DocBook/writing_musb_glue_layer.tmpl new file mode 100644 index 00000000000..837eca77f27 --- /dev/null +++ b/Documentation/DocBook/writing_musb_glue_layer.tmpl @@ -0,0 +1,873 @@ +<?xml version="1.0" encoding="UTF-8"?> +<!DOCTYPE book PUBLIC "-//OASIS//DTD DocBook XML V4.1.2//EN" + "http://www.oasis-open.org/docbook/xml/4.1.2/docbookx.dtd" []> + +<book id="Writing-MUSB-Glue-Layer"> + <bookinfo> + <title>Writing an MUSB Glue Layer</title> + + <authorgroup> + <author> + <firstname>Apelete</firstname> + <surname>Seketeli</surname> + <affiliation> + <address> + <email>apelete at seketeli.net</email> + </address> + </affiliation> + </author> + </authorgroup> + + <copyright> + <year>2014</year> + <holder>Apelete Seketeli</holder> + </copyright> + + <legalnotice> + <para> + This documentation is free software; you can redistribute it + and/or modify it under the terms of the GNU General Public + License as published by the Free Software Foundation; either + version 2 of the License, or (at your option) any later version. + </para> + + <para> + This documentation is distributed in the hope that it will be + useful, but WITHOUT ANY WARRANTY; without even the implied + warranty of MERCHANTABILITY or FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE. + See the GNU General Public License for more details. + </para> + + <para> + You should have received a copy of the GNU General Public License + along with this documentation; if not, write to the Free Software + Foundation, Inc., 59 Temple Place, Suite 330, Boston, MA + 02111-1307 USA + </para> + + <para> + For more details see the file COPYING in the Linux kernel source + tree. + </para> + </legalnotice> + </bookinfo> + +<toc></toc> + + <chapter id="introduction"> + <title>Introduction</title> + <para> + The Linux MUSB subsystem is part of the larger Linux USB + subsystem. It provides support for embedded USB Device Controllers + (UDC) that do not use Universal Host Controller Interface (UHCI) + or Open Host Controller Interface (OHCI). + </para> + <para> + Instead, these embedded UDC rely on the USB On-the-Go (OTG) + specification which they implement at least partially. The silicon + reference design used in most cases is the Multipoint USB + Highspeed Dual-Role Controller (MUSB HDRC) found in the Mentor + Graphics Inventra™ design. + </para> + <para> + As a self-taught exercise I have written an MUSB glue layer for + the Ingenic JZ4740 SoC, modelled after the many MUSB glue layers + in the kernel source tree. This layer can be found at + drivers/usb/musb/jz4740.c. In this documentation I will walk + through the basics of the jz4740.c glue layer, explaining the + different pieces and what needs to be done in order to write your + own device glue layer. + </para> + </chapter> + + <chapter id="linux-musb-basics"> + <title>Linux MUSB Basics</title> + <para> + To get started on the topic, please read USB On-the-Go Basics (see + Resources) which provides an introduction of USB OTG operation at + the hardware level. A couple of wiki pages by Texas Instruments + and Analog Devices also provide an overview of the Linux kernel + MUSB configuration, albeit focused on some specific devices + provided by these companies. Finally, getting acquainted with the + USB specification at USB home page may come in handy, with + practical instance provided through the Writing USB Device Drivers + documentation (again, see Resources). + </para> + <para> + Linux USB stack is a layered architecture in which the MUSB + controller hardware sits at the lowest. The MUSB controller driver + abstract the MUSB controller hardware to the Linux USB stack. + </para> + <programlisting> + ------------------------ + | | <------- drivers/usb/gadget + | Linux USB Core Stack | <------- drivers/usb/host + | | <------- drivers/usb/core + ------------------------ + ⬍ + -------------------------- + | | <------ drivers/usb/musb/musb_gadget.c + | MUSB Controller driver | <------ drivers/usb/musb/musb_host.c + | | <------ drivers/usb/musb/musb_core.c + -------------------------- + ⬍ + --------------------------------- + | MUSB Platform Specific Driver | + | | <-- drivers/usb/musb/jz4740.c + | aka "Glue Layer" | + --------------------------------- + ⬍ + --------------------------------- + | MUSB Controller Hardware | + --------------------------------- + </programlisting> + <para> + As outlined above, the glue layer is actually the platform + specific code sitting in between the controller driver and the + controller hardware. + </para> + <para> + Just like a Linux USB driver needs to register itself with the + Linux USB subsystem, the MUSB glue layer needs first to register + itself with the MUSB controller driver. This will allow the + controller driver to know about which device the glue layer + supports and which functions to call when a supported device is + detected or released; remember we are talking about an embedded + controller chip here, so no insertion or removal at run-time. + </para> + <para> + All of this information is passed to the MUSB controller driver + through a platform_driver structure defined in the glue layer as: + </para> + <programlisting linenumbering="numbered"> +static struct platform_driver jz4740_driver = { + .probe = jz4740_probe, + .remove = jz4740_remove, + .driver = { + .name = "musb-jz4740", + }, +}; + </programlisting> + <para> + The probe and remove function pointers are called when a matching + device is detected and, respectively, released. The name string + describes the device supported by this glue layer. In the current + case it matches a platform_device structure declared in + arch/mips/jz4740/platform.c. Note that we are not using device + tree bindings here. + </para> + <para> + In order to register itself to the controller driver, the glue + layer goes through a few steps, basically allocating the + controller hardware resources and initialising a couple of + circuits. To do so, it needs to keep track of the information used + throughout these steps. This is done by defining a private + jz4740_glue structure: + </para> + <programlisting linenumbering="numbered"> +struct jz4740_glue { + struct device *dev; + struct platform_device *musb; + struct clk *clk; +}; + </programlisting> + <para> + The dev and musb members are both device structure variables. The + first one holds generic information about the device, since it's + the basic device structure, and the latter holds information more + closely related to the subsystem the device is registered to. The + clk variable keeps information related to the device clock + operation. + </para> + <para> + Let's go through the steps of the probe function that leads the + glue layer to register itself to the controller driver. + </para> + <para> + N.B.: For the sake of readability each function will be split in + logical parts, each part being shown as if it was independent from + the others. + </para> + <programlisting linenumbering="numbered"> +static int jz4740_probe(struct platform_device *pdev) +{ + struct platform_device *musb; + struct jz4740_glue *glue; + struct clk *clk; + int ret; + + glue = devm_kzalloc(&pdev->dev, sizeof(*glue), GFP_KERNEL); + if (!glue) + return -ENOMEM; + + musb = platform_device_alloc("musb-hdrc", PLATFORM_DEVID_AUTO); + if (!musb) { + dev_err(&pdev->dev, "failed to allocate musb device\n"); + return -ENOMEM; + } + + clk = devm_clk_get(&pdev->dev, "udc"); + if (IS_ERR(clk)) { + dev_err(&pdev->dev, "failed to get clock\n"); + ret = PTR_ERR(clk); + goto err_platform_device_put; + } + + ret = clk_prepare_enable(clk); + if (ret) { + dev_err(&pdev->dev, "failed to enable clock\n"); + goto err_platform_device_put; + } + + musb->dev.parent = &pdev->dev; + + glue->dev = &pdev->dev; + glue->musb = musb; + glue->clk = clk; + + return 0; + +err_platform_device_put: + platform_device_put(musb); + return ret; +} + </programlisting> + <para> + The first few lines of the probe function allocate and assign the + glue, musb and clk variables. The GFP_KERNEL flag (line 8) allows + the allocation process to sleep and wait for memory, thus being + usable in a blocking situation. The PLATFORM_DEVID_AUTO flag (line + 12) allows automatic allocation and management of device IDs in + order to avoid device namespace collisions with explicit IDs. With + devm_clk_get() (line 18) the glue layer allocates the clock -- the + <literal>devm_</literal> prefix indicates that clk_get() is + managed: it automatically frees the allocated clock resource data + when the device is released -- and enable it. + </para> + <para> + Then comes the registration steps: + </para> + <programlisting linenumbering="numbered"> +static int jz4740_probe(struct platform_device *pdev) +{ + struct musb_hdrc_platform_data *pdata = &jz4740_musb_platform_data; + + pdata->platform_ops = &jz4740_musb_ops; + + platform_set_drvdata(pdev, glue); + + ret = platform_device_add_resources(musb, pdev->resource, + pdev->num_resources); + if (ret) { + dev_err(&pdev->dev, "failed to add resources\n"); + goto err_clk_disable; + } + + ret = platform_device_add_data(musb, pdata, sizeof(*pdata)); + if (ret) { + dev_err(&pdev->dev, "failed to add platform_data\n"); + goto err_clk_disable; + } + + return 0; + +err_clk_disable: + clk_disable_unprepare(clk); +err_platform_device_put: + platform_device_put(musb); + return ret; +} + </programlisting> + <para> + The first step is to pass the device data privately held by the + glue layer on to the controller driver through + platform_set_drvdata() (line 7). Next is passing on the device + resources information, also privately held at that point, through + platform_device_add_resources() (line 9). + </para> + <para> + Finally comes passing on the platform specific data to the + controller driver (line 16). Platform data will be discussed in + <link linkend="device-platform-data">Chapter 4</link>, but here + we are looking at the platform_ops function pointer (line 5) in + musb_hdrc_platform_data structure (line 3). This function + pointer allows the MUSB controller driver to know which function + to call for device operation: + </para> + <programlisting linenumbering="numbered"> +static const struct musb_platform_ops jz4740_musb_ops = { + .init = jz4740_musb_init, + .exit = jz4740_musb_exit, +}; + </programlisting> + <para> + Here we have the minimal case where only init and exit functions + are called by the controller driver when needed. Fact is the + JZ4740 MUSB controller is a basic controller, lacking some + features found in other controllers, otherwise we may also have + pointers to a few other functions like a power management function + or a function to switch between OTG and non-OTG modes, for + instance. + </para> + <para> + At that point of the registration process, the controller driver + actually calls the init function: + </para> + <programlisting linenumbering="numbered"> +static int jz4740_musb_init(struct musb *musb) +{ + musb->xceiv = usb_get_phy(USB_PHY_TYPE_USB2); + if (!musb->xceiv) { + pr_err("HS UDC: no transceiver configured\n"); + return -ENODEV; + } + + /* Silicon does not implement ConfigData register. + * Set dyn_fifo to avoid reading EP config from hardware. + */ + musb->dyn_fifo = true; + + musb->isr = jz4740_musb_interrupt; + + return 0; +} + </programlisting> + <para> + The goal of jz4740_musb_init() is to get hold of the transceiver + driver data of the MUSB controller hardware and pass it on to the + MUSB controller driver, as usual. The transceiver is the circuitry + inside the controller hardware responsible for sending/receiving + the USB data. Since it is an implementation of the physical layer + of the OSI model, the transceiver is also referred to as PHY. + </para> + <para> + Getting hold of the MUSB PHY driver data is done with + usb_get_phy() which returns a pointer to the structure + containing the driver instance data. The next couple of + instructions (line 12 and 14) are used as a quirk and to setup + IRQ handling respectively. Quirks and IRQ handling will be + discussed later in <link linkend="device-quirks">Chapter + 5</link> and <link linkend="handling-irqs">Chapter 3</link>. + </para> + <programlisting linenumbering="numbered"> +static int jz4740_musb_exit(struct musb *musb) +{ + usb_put_phy(musb->xceiv); + + return 0; +} + </programlisting> + <para> + Acting as the counterpart of init, the exit function releases the + MUSB PHY driver when the controller hardware itself is about to be + released. + </para> + <para> + Again, note that init and exit are fairly simple in this case due + to the basic set of features of the JZ4740 controller hardware. + When writing an musb glue layer for a more complex controller + hardware, you might need to take care of more processing in those + two functions. + </para> + <para> + Returning from the init function, the MUSB controller driver jumps + back into the probe function: + </para> + <programlisting linenumbering="numbered"> +static int jz4740_probe(struct platform_device *pdev) +{ + ret = platform_device_add(musb); + if (ret) { + dev_err(&pdev->dev, "failed to register musb device\n"); + goto err_clk_disable; + } + + return 0; + +err_clk_disable: + clk_disable_unprepare(clk); +err_platform_device_put: + platform_device_put(musb); + return ret; +} + </programlisting> + <para> + This is the last part of the device registration process where the + glue layer adds the controller hardware device to Linux kernel + device hierarchy: at this stage, all known information about the + device is passed on to the Linux USB core stack. + </para> + <programlisting linenumbering="numbered"> +static int jz4740_remove(struct platform_device *pdev) +{ + struct jz4740_glue *glue = platform_get_drvdata(pdev); + + platform_device_unregister(glue->musb); + clk_disable_unprepare(glue->clk); + + return 0; +} + </programlisting> + <para> + Acting as the counterpart of probe, the remove function unregister + the MUSB controller hardware (line 5) and disable the clock (line + 6), allowing it to be gated. + </para> + </chapter> + + <chapter id="handling-irqs"> + <title>Handling IRQs</title> + <para> + Additionally to the MUSB controller hardware basic setup and + registration, the glue layer is also responsible for handling the + IRQs: + </para> + <programlisting linenumbering="numbered"> +static irqreturn_t jz4740_musb_interrupt(int irq, void *__hci) +{ + unsigned long flags; + irqreturn_t retval = IRQ_NONE; + struct musb *musb = __hci; + + spin_lock_irqsave(&musb->lock, flags); + + musb->int_usb = musb_readb(musb->mregs, MUSB_INTRUSB); + musb->int_tx = musb_readw(musb->mregs, MUSB_INTRTX); + musb->int_rx = musb_readw(musb->mregs, MUSB_INTRRX); + + /* + * The controller is gadget only, the state of the host mode IRQ bits is + * undefined. Mask them to make sure that the musb driver core will + * never see them set + */ + musb->int_usb &= MUSB_INTR_SUSPEND | MUSB_INTR_RESUME | + MUSB_INTR_RESET | MUSB_INTR_SOF; + + if (musb->int_usb || musb->int_tx || musb->int_rx) + retval = musb_interrupt(musb); + + spin_unlock_irqrestore(&musb->lock, flags); + + return retval; +} + </programlisting> + <para> + Here the glue layer mostly has to read the relevant hardware + registers and pass their values on to the controller driver which + will handle the actual event that triggered the IRQ. + </para> + <para> + The interrupt handler critical section is protected by the + spin_lock_irqsave() and counterpart spin_unlock_irqrestore() + functions (line 7 and 24 respectively), which prevent the + interrupt handler code to be run by two different threads at the + same time. + </para> + <para> + Then the relevant interrupt registers are read (line 9 to 11): + </para> + <itemizedlist> + <listitem> + <para> + MUSB_INTRUSB: indicates which USB interrupts are currently + active, + </para> + </listitem> + <listitem> + <para> + MUSB_INTRTX: indicates which of the interrupts for TX + endpoints are currently active, + </para> + </listitem> + <listitem> + <para> + MUSB_INTRRX: indicates which of the interrupts for TX + endpoints are currently active. + </para> + </listitem> + </itemizedlist> + <para> + Note that musb_readb() is used to read 8-bit registers at most, + while musb_readw() allows us to read at most 16-bit registers. + There are other functions that can be used depending on the size + of your device registers. See musb_io.h for more information. + </para> + <para> + Instruction on line 18 is another quirk specific to the JZ4740 + USB device controller, which will be discussed later in <link + linkend="device-quirks">Chapter 5</link>. + </para> + <para> + The glue layer still needs to register the IRQ handler though. + Remember the instruction on line 14 of the init function: + </para> + <programlisting linenumbering="numbered"> +static int jz4740_musb_init(struct musb *musb) +{ + musb->isr = jz4740_musb_interrupt; + + return 0; +} + </programlisting> + <para> + This instruction sets a pointer to the glue layer IRQ handler + function, in order for the controller hardware to call the handler + back when an IRQ comes from the controller hardware. The interrupt + handler is now implemented and registered. + </para> + </chapter> + + <chapter id="device-platform-data"> + <title>Device Platform Data</title> + <para> + In order to write an MUSB glue layer, you need to have some data + describing the hardware capabilities of your controller hardware, + which is called the platform data. + </para> + <para> + Platform data is specific to your hardware, though it may cover a + broad range of devices, and is generally found somewhere in the + arch/ directory, depending on your device architecture. + </para> + <para> + For instance, platform data for the JZ4740 SoC is found in + arch/mips/jz4740/platform.c. In the platform.c file each device of + the JZ4740 SoC is described through a set of structures. + </para> + <para> + Here is the part of arch/mips/jz4740/platform.c that covers the + USB Device Controller (UDC): + </para> + <programlisting linenumbering="numbered"> +/* USB Device Controller */ +struct platform_device jz4740_udc_xceiv_device = { + .name = "usb_phy_gen_xceiv", + .id = 0, +}; + +static struct resource jz4740_udc_resources[] = { + [0] = { + .start = JZ4740_UDC_BASE_ADDR, + .end = JZ4740_UDC_BASE_ADDR + 0x10000 - 1, + .flags = IORESOURCE_MEM, + }, + [1] = { + .start = JZ4740_IRQ_UDC, + .end = JZ4740_IRQ_UDC, + .flags = IORESOURCE_IRQ, + .name = "mc", + }, +}; + +struct platform_device jz4740_udc_device = { + .name = "musb-jz4740", + .id = -1, + .dev = { + .dma_mask = &jz4740_udc_device.dev.coherent_dma_mask, + .coherent_dma_mask = DMA_BIT_MASK(32), + }, + .num_resources = ARRAY_SIZE(jz4740_udc_resources), + .resource = jz4740_udc_resources, +}; + </programlisting> + <para> + The jz4740_udc_xceiv_device platform device structure (line 2) + describes the UDC transceiver with a name and id number. + </para> + <para> + At the time of this writing, note that + "usb_phy_gen_xceiv" is the specific name to be used for + all transceivers that are either built-in with reference USB IP or + autonomous and doesn't require any PHY programming. You will need + to set CONFIG_NOP_USB_XCEIV=y in the kernel configuration to make + use of the corresponding transceiver driver. The id field could be + set to -1 (equivalent to PLATFORM_DEVID_NONE), -2 (equivalent to + PLATFORM_DEVID_AUTO) or start with 0 for the first device of this + kind if we want a specific id number. + </para> + <para> + The jz4740_udc_resources resource structure (line 7) defines the + UDC registers base addresses. + </para> + <para> + The first array (line 9 to 11) defines the UDC registers base + memory addresses: start points to the first register memory + address, end points to the last register memory address and the + flags member defines the type of resource we are dealing with. So + IORESOURCE_MEM is used to define the registers memory addresses. + The second array (line 14 to 17) defines the UDC IRQ registers + addresses. Since there is only one IRQ register available for the + JZ4740 UDC, start and end point at the same address. The + IORESOURCE_IRQ flag tells that we are dealing with IRQ resources, + and the name "mc" is in fact hard-coded in the MUSB core + in order for the controller driver to retrieve this IRQ resource + by querying it by its name. + </para> + <para> + Finally, the jz4740_udc_device platform device structure (line 21) + describes the UDC itself. + </para> + <para> + The "musb-jz4740" name (line 22) defines the MUSB + driver that is used for this device; remember this is in fact + the name that we used in the jz4740_driver platform driver + structure in <link linkend="linux-musb-basics">Chapter + 2</link>. The id field (line 23) is set to -1 (equivalent to + PLATFORM_DEVID_NONE) since we do not need an id for the device: + the MUSB controller driver was already set to allocate an + automatic id in <link linkend="linux-musb-basics">Chapter + 2</link>. In the dev field we care for DMA related information + here. The dma_mask field (line 25) defines the width of the DMA + mask that is going to be used, and coherent_dma_mask (line 26) + has the same purpose but for the alloc_coherent DMA mappings: in + both cases we are using a 32 bits mask. Then the resource field + (line 29) is simply a pointer to the resource structure defined + before, while the num_resources field (line 28) keeps track of + the number of arrays defined in the resource structure (in this + case there were two resource arrays defined before). + </para> + <para> + With this quick overview of the UDC platform data at the arch/ + level now done, let's get back to the MUSB glue layer specific + platform data in drivers/usb/musb/jz4740.c: + </para> + <programlisting linenumbering="numbered"> +static struct musb_hdrc_config jz4740_musb_config = { + /* Silicon does not implement USB OTG. */ + .multipoint = 0, + /* Max EPs scanned, driver will decide which EP can be used. */ + .num_eps = 4, + /* RAMbits needed to configure EPs from table */ + .ram_bits = 9, + .fifo_cfg = jz4740_musb_fifo_cfg, + .fifo_cfg_size = ARRAY_SIZE(jz4740_musb_fifo_cfg), +}; + +static struct musb_hdrc_platform_data jz4740_musb_platform_data = { + .mode = MUSB_PERIPHERAL, + .config = &jz4740_musb_config, +}; + </programlisting> + <para> + First the glue layer configures some aspects of the controller + driver operation related to the controller hardware specifics. + This is done through the jz4740_musb_config musb_hdrc_config + structure. + </para> + <para> + Defining the OTG capability of the controller hardware, the + multipoint member (line 3) is set to 0 (equivalent to false) + since the JZ4740 UDC is not OTG compatible. Then num_eps (line + 5) defines the number of USB endpoints of the controller + hardware, including endpoint 0: here we have 3 endpoints + + endpoint 0. Next is ram_bits (line 7) which is the width of the + RAM address bus for the MUSB controller hardware. This + information is needed when the controller driver cannot + automatically configure endpoints by reading the relevant + controller hardware registers. This issue will be discussed when + we get to device quirks in <link linkend="device-quirks">Chapter + 5</link>. Last two fields (line 8 and 9) are also about device + quirks: fifo_cfg points to the USB endpoints configuration table + and fifo_cfg_size keeps track of the size of the number of + entries in that configuration table. More on that later in <link + linkend="device-quirks">Chapter 5</link>. + </para> + <para> + Then this configuration is embedded inside + jz4740_musb_platform_data musb_hdrc_platform_data structure (line + 11): config is a pointer to the configuration structure itself, + and mode tells the controller driver if the controller hardware + may be used as MUSB_HOST only, MUSB_PERIPHERAL only or MUSB_OTG + which is a dual mode. + </para> + <para> + Remember that jz4740_musb_platform_data is then used to convey + platform data information as we have seen in the probe function + in <link linkend="linux-musb-basics">Chapter 2</link> + </para> + </chapter> + + <chapter id="device-quirks"> + <title>Device Quirks</title> + <para> + Completing the platform data specific to your device, you may also + need to write some code in the glue layer to work around some + device specific limitations. These quirks may be due to some + hardware bugs, or simply be the result of an incomplete + implementation of the USB On-the-Go specification. + </para> + <para> + The JZ4740 UDC exhibits such quirks, some of which we will discuss + here for the sake of insight even though these might not be found + in the controller hardware you are working on. + </para> + <para> + Let's get back to the init function first: + </para> + <programlisting linenumbering="numbered"> +static int jz4740_musb_init(struct musb *musb) +{ + musb->xceiv = usb_get_phy(USB_PHY_TYPE_USB2); + if (!musb->xceiv) { + pr_err("HS UDC: no transceiver configured\n"); + return -ENODEV; + } + + /* Silicon does not implement ConfigData register. + * Set dyn_fifo to avoid reading EP config from hardware. + */ + musb->dyn_fifo = true; + + musb->isr = jz4740_musb_interrupt; + + return 0; +} + </programlisting> + <para> + Instruction on line 12 helps the MUSB controller driver to work + around the fact that the controller hardware is missing registers + that are used for USB endpoints configuration. + </para> + <para> + Without these registers, the controller driver is unable to read + the endpoints configuration from the hardware, so we use line 12 + instruction to bypass reading the configuration from silicon, and + rely on a hard-coded table that describes the endpoints + configuration instead: + </para> + <programlisting linenumbering="numbered"> +static struct musb_fifo_cfg jz4740_musb_fifo_cfg[] = { +{ .hw_ep_num = 1, .style = FIFO_TX, .maxpacket = 512, }, +{ .hw_ep_num = 1, .style = FIFO_RX, .maxpacket = 512, }, +{ .hw_ep_num = 2, .style = FIFO_TX, .maxpacket = 64, }, +}; + </programlisting> + <para> + Looking at the configuration table above, we see that each + endpoints is described by three fields: hw_ep_num is the endpoint + number, style is its direction (either FIFO_TX for the controller + driver to send packets in the controller hardware, or FIFO_RX to + receive packets from hardware), and maxpacket defines the maximum + size of each data packet that can be transmitted over that + endpoint. Reading from the table, the controller driver knows that + endpoint 1 can be used to send and receive USB data packets of 512 + bytes at once (this is in fact a bulk in/out endpoint), and + endpoint 2 can be used to send data packets of 64 bytes at once + (this is in fact an interrupt endpoint). + </para> + <para> + Note that there is no information about endpoint 0 here: that one + is implemented by default in every silicon design, with a + predefined configuration according to the USB specification. For + more examples of endpoint configuration tables, see musb_core.c. + </para> + <para> + Let's now get back to the interrupt handler function: + </para> + <programlisting linenumbering="numbered"> +static irqreturn_t jz4740_musb_interrupt(int irq, void *__hci) +{ + unsigned long flags; + irqreturn_t retval = IRQ_NONE; + struct musb *musb = __hci; + + spin_lock_irqsave(&musb->lock, flags); + + musb->int_usb = musb_readb(musb->mregs, MUSB_INTRUSB); + musb->int_tx = musb_readw(musb->mregs, MUSB_INTRTX); + musb->int_rx = musb_readw(musb->mregs, MUSB_INTRRX); + + /* + * The controller is gadget only, the state of the host mode IRQ bits is + * undefined. Mask them to make sure that the musb driver core will + * never see them set + */ + musb->int_usb &= MUSB_INTR_SUSPEND | MUSB_INTR_RESUME | + MUSB_INTR_RESET | MUSB_INTR_SOF; + + if (musb->int_usb || musb->int_tx || musb->int_rx) + retval = musb_interrupt(musb); + + spin_unlock_irqrestore(&musb->lock, flags); + + return retval; +} + </programlisting> + <para> + Instruction on line 18 above is a way for the controller driver to + work around the fact that some interrupt bits used for USB host + mode operation are missing in the MUSB_INTRUSB register, thus left + in an undefined hardware state, since this MUSB controller + hardware is used in peripheral mode only. As a consequence, the + glue layer masks these missing bits out to avoid parasite + interrupts by doing a logical AND operation between the value read + from MUSB_INTRUSB and the bits that are actually implemented in + the register. + </para> + <para> + These are only a couple of the quirks found in the JZ4740 USB + device controller. Some others were directly addressed in the MUSB + core since the fixes were generic enough to provide a better + handling of the issues for others controller hardware eventually. + </para> + </chapter> + + <chapter id="conclusion"> + <title>Conclusion</title> + <para> + Writing a Linux MUSB glue layer should be a more accessible task, + as this documentation tries to show the ins and outs of this + exercise. + </para> + <para> + The JZ4740 USB device controller being fairly simple, I hope its + glue layer serves as a good example for the curious mind. Used + with the current MUSB glue layers, this documentation should + provide enough guidance to get started; should anything gets out + of hand, the linux-usb mailing list archive is another helpful + resource to browse through. + </para> + </chapter> + + <chapter id="acknowledgements"> + <title>Acknowledgements</title> + <para> + Many thanks to Lars-Peter Clausen and Maarten ter Huurne for + answering my questions while I was writing the JZ4740 glue layer + and for helping me out getting the code in good shape. + </para> + <para> + I would also like to thank the Qi-Hardware community at large for + its cheerful guidance and support. + </para> + </chapter> + + <chapter id="resources"> + <title>Resources</title> + <para> + USB Home Page: + <ulink url="http://www.usb.org">http://www.usb.org</ulink> + </para> + <para> + linux-usb Mailing List Archives: + <ulink url="http://marc.info/?l=linux-usb">http://marc.info/?l=linux-usb</ulink> + </para> + <para> + USB On-the-Go Basics: + <ulink url="http://www.maximintegrated.com/app-notes/index.mvp/id/1822">http://www.maximintegrated.com/app-notes/index.mvp/id/1822</ulink> + </para> + <para> + Writing USB Device Drivers: + <ulink url="https://www.kernel.org/doc/htmldocs/writing_usb_driver/index.html">https://www.kernel.org/doc/htmldocs/writing_usb_driver/index.html</ulink> + </para> + <para> + Texas Instruments USB Configuration Wiki Page: + <ulink url="http://processors.wiki.ti.com/index.php/Usbgeneralpage">http://processors.wiki.ti.com/index.php/Usbgeneralpage</ulink> + </para> + <para> + Analog Devices Blackfin MUSB Configuration: + <ulink url="http://docs.blackfin.uclinux.org/doku.php?id=linux-kernel:drivers:musb">http://docs.blackfin.uclinux.org/doku.php?id=linux-kernel:drivers:musb</ulink> + </para> + </chapter> + +</book> diff --git a/Documentation/IRQ-domain.txt b/Documentation/IRQ-domain.txt index 03df71aeb38..8a8b82c9ca5 100644 --- a/Documentation/IRQ-domain.txt +++ b/Documentation/IRQ-domain.txt @@ -41,8 +41,7 @@ An interrupt controller driver creates and registers an irq_domain by calling one of the irq_domain_add_*() functions (each mapping method has a different allocator function, more on that later). The function will return a pointer to the irq_domain on success. The caller must -provide the allocator function with an irq_domain_ops structure with -the .map callback populated as a minimum. +provide the allocator function with an irq_domain_ops structure. In most cases, the irq_domain will begin empty without any mappings between hwirq and IRQ numbers. Mappings are added to the irq_domain diff --git a/Documentation/RCU/00-INDEX b/Documentation/RCU/00-INDEX index fa57139f50b..f773a264ae0 100644 --- a/Documentation/RCU/00-INDEX +++ b/Documentation/RCU/00-INDEX @@ -12,6 +12,8 @@ lockdep-splat.txt - RCU Lockdep splats explained. NMI-RCU.txt - Using RCU to Protect Dynamic NMI Handlers +rcu_dereference.txt + - Proper care and feeding of return values from rcu_dereference() rcubarrier.txt - RCU and Unloadable Modules rculist_nulls.txt diff --git a/Documentation/RCU/checklist.txt b/Documentation/RCU/checklist.txt index 9d10d1db16a..877947130eb 100644 --- a/Documentation/RCU/checklist.txt +++ b/Documentation/RCU/checklist.txt @@ -114,12 +114,16 @@ over a rather long period of time, but improvements are always welcome! http://www.openvms.compaq.com/wizard/wiz_2637.html The rcu_dereference() primitive is also an excellent - documentation aid, letting the person reading the code - know exactly which pointers are protected by RCU. + documentation aid, letting the person reading the + code know exactly which pointers are protected by RCU. Please note that compilers can also reorder code, and they are becoming increasingly aggressive about doing - just that. The rcu_dereference() primitive therefore - also prevents destructive compiler optimizations. + just that. The rcu_dereference() primitive therefore also + prevents destructive compiler optimizations. However, + with a bit of devious creativity, it is possible to + mishandle the return value from rcu_dereference(). + Please see rcu_dereference.txt in this directory for + more information. The rcu_dereference() primitive is used by the various "_rcu()" list-traversal primitives, such diff --git a/Documentation/RCU/rcu_dereference.txt b/Documentation/RCU/rcu_dereference.txt new file mode 100644 index 00000000000..ceb05da5a5a --- /dev/null +++ b/Documentation/RCU/rcu_dereference.txt @@ -0,0 +1,371 @@ +PROPER CARE AND FEEDING OF RETURN VALUES FROM rcu_dereference() + +Most of the time, you can use values from rcu_dereference() or one of +the similar primitives without worries. Dereferencing (prefix "*"), +field selection ("->"), assignment ("="), address-of ("&"), addition and +subtraction of constants, and casts all work quite naturally and safely. + +It is nevertheless possible to get into trouble with other operations. +Follow these rules to keep your RCU code working properly: + +o You must use one of the rcu_dereference() family of primitives + to load an RCU-protected pointer, otherwise CONFIG_PROVE_RCU + will complain. Worse yet, your code can see random memory-corruption + bugs due to games that compilers and DEC Alpha can play. + Without one of the rcu_dereference() primitives, compilers + can reload the value, and won't your code have fun with two + different values for a single pointer! Without rcu_dereference(), + DEC Alpha can load a pointer, dereference that pointer, and + return data preceding initialization that preceded the store of + the pointer. + + In addition, the volatile cast in rcu_dereference() prevents the + compiler from deducing the resulting pointer value. Please see + the section entitled "EXAMPLE WHERE THE COMPILER KNOWS TOO MUCH" + for an example where the compiler can in fact deduce the exact + value of the pointer, and thus cause misordering. + +o Do not use single-element RCU-protected arrays. The compiler + is within its right to assume that the value of an index into + such an array must necessarily evaluate to zero. The compiler + could then substitute the constant zero for the computation, so + that the array index no longer depended on the value returned + by rcu_dereference(). If the array index no longer depends + on rcu_dereference(), then both the compiler and the CPU + are within their rights to order the array access before the + rcu_dereference(), which can cause the array access to return + garbage. + +o Avoid cancellation when using the "+" and "-" infix arithmetic + operators. For example, for a given variable "x", avoid + "(x-x)". There are similar arithmetic pitfalls from other + arithmetic operatiors, such as "(x*0)", "(x/(x+1))" or "(x%1)". + The compiler is within its rights to substitute zero for all of + these expressions, so that subsequent accesses no longer depend + on the rcu_dereference(), again possibly resulting in bugs due + to misordering. + + Of course, if "p" is a pointer from rcu_dereference(), and "a" + and "b" are integers that happen to be equal, the expression + "p+a-b" is safe because its value still necessarily depends on + the rcu_dereference(), thus maintaining proper ordering. + +o Avoid all-zero operands to the bitwise "&" operator, and + similarly avoid all-ones operands to the bitwise "|" operator. + If the compiler is able to deduce the value of such operands, + it is within its rights to substitute the corresponding constant + for the bitwise operation. Once again, this causes subsequent + accesses to no longer depend on the rcu_dereference(), causing + bugs due to misordering. + + Please note that single-bit operands to bitwise "&" can also + be dangerous. At this point, the compiler knows that the + resulting value can only take on one of two possible values. + Therefore, a very small amount of additional information will + allow the compiler to deduce the exact value, which again can + result in misordering. + +o If you are using RCU to protect JITed functions, so that the + "()" function-invocation operator is applied to a value obtained + (directly or indirectly) from rcu_dereference(), you may need to + interact directly with the hardware to flush instruction caches. + This issue arises on some systems when a newly JITed function is + using the same memory that was used by an earlier JITed function. + +o Do not use the results from the boolean "&&" and "||" when + dereferencing. For example, the following (rather improbable) + code is buggy: + + int a[2]; + int index; + int force_zero_index = 1; + + ... + + r1 = rcu_dereference(i1) + r2 = a[r1 && force_zero_index]; /* BUGGY!!! */ + + The reason this is buggy is that "&&" and "||" are often compiled + using branches. While weak-memory machines such as ARM or PowerPC + do order stores after such branches, they can speculate loads, + which can result in misordering bugs. + +o Do not use the results from relational operators ("==", "!=", + ">", ">=", "<", or "<=") when dereferencing. For example, + the following (quite strange) code is buggy: + + int a[2]; + int index; + int flip_index = 0; + + ... + + r1 = rcu_dereference(i1) + r2 = a[r1 != flip_index]; /* BUGGY!!! */ + + As before, the reason this is buggy is that relational operators + are often compiled using branches. And as before, although + weak-memory machines such as ARM or PowerPC do order stores + after such branches, but can speculate loads, which can again + result in misordering bugs. + +o Be very careful about comparing pointers obtained from + rcu_dereference() against non-NULL values. As Linus Torvalds + explained, if the two pointers are equal, the compiler could + substitute the pointer you are comparing against for the pointer + obtained from rcu_dereference(). For example: + + p = rcu_dereference(gp); + if (p == &default_struct) + do_default(p->a); + + Because the compiler now knows that the value of "p" is exactly + the address of the variable "default_struct", it is free to + transform this code into the following: + + p = rcu_dereference(gp); + if (p == &default_struct) + do_default(default_struct.a); + + On ARM and Power hardware, the load from "default_struct.a" + can now be speculated, such that it might happen before the + rcu_dereference(). This could result in bugs due to misordering. + + However, comparisons are OK in the following cases: + + o The comparison was against the NULL pointer. If the + compiler knows that the pointer is NULL, you had better + not be dereferencing it anyway. If the comparison is + non-equal, the compiler is none the wiser. Therefore, + it is safe to compare pointers from rcu_dereference() + against NULL pointers. + + o The pointer is never dereferenced after being compared. + Since there are no subsequent dereferences, the compiler + cannot use anything it learned from the comparison + to reorder the non-existent subsequent dereferences. + This sort of comparison occurs frequently when scanning + RCU-protected circular linked lists. + + o The comparison is against a pointer that references memory + that was initialized "a long time ago." The reason + this is safe is that even if misordering occurs, the + misordering will not affect the accesses that follow + the comparison. So exactly how long ago is "a long + time ago"? Here are some possibilities: + + o Compile time. + + o Boot time. + + o Module-init time for module code. + + o Prior to kthread creation for kthread code. + + o During some prior acquisition of the lock that + we now hold. + + o Before mod_timer() time for a timer handler. + + There are many other possibilities involving the Linux + kernel's wide array of primitives that cause code to + be invoked at a later time. + + o The pointer being compared against also came from + rcu_dereference(). In this case, both pointers depend + on one rcu_dereference() or another, so you get proper + ordering either way. + + That said, this situation can make certain RCU usage + bugs more likely to happen. Which can be a good thing, + at least if they happen during testing. An example + of such an RCU usage bug is shown in the section titled + "EXAMPLE OF AMPLIFIED RCU-USAGE BUG". + + o All of the accesses following the comparison are stores, + so that a control dependency preserves the needed ordering. + That said, it is easy to get control dependencies wrong. + Please see the "CONTROL DEPENDENCIES" section of + Documentation/memory-barriers.txt for more details. + + o The pointers are not equal -and- the compiler does + not have enough information to deduce the value of the + pointer. Note that the volatile cast in rcu_dereference() + will normally prevent the compiler from knowing too much. + +o Disable any value-speculation optimizations that your compiler + might provide, especially if you are making use of feedback-based + optimizations that take data collected from prior runs. Such + value-speculation optimizations reorder operations by design. + + There is one exception to this rule: Value-speculation + optimizations that leverage the branch-prediction hardware are + safe on strongly ordered systems (such as x86), but not on weakly + ordered systems (such as ARM or Power). Choose your compiler + command-line options wisely! + + +EXAMPLE OF AMPLIFIED RCU-USAGE BUG + +Because updaters can run concurrently with RCU readers, RCU readers can +see stale and/or inconsistent values. If RCU readers need fresh or +consistent values, which they sometimes do, they need to take proper +precautions. To see this, consider the following code fragment: + + struct foo { + int a; + int b; + int c; + }; + struct foo *gp1; + struct foo *gp2; + + void updater(void) + { + struct foo *p; + + p = kmalloc(...); + if (p == NULL) + deal_with_it(); + p->a = 42; /* Each field in its own cache line. */ + p->b = 43; + p->c = 44; + rcu_assign_pointer(gp1, p); + p->b = 143; + p->c = 144; + rcu_assign_pointer(gp2, p); + } + + void reader(void) + { + struct foo *p; + struct foo *q; + int r1, r2; + + p = rcu_dereference(gp2); + if (p == NULL) + return; + r1 = p->b; /* Guaranteed to get 143. */ + q = rcu_dereference(gp1); /* Guaranteed non-NULL. */ + if (p == q) { + /* The compiler decides that q->c is same as p->c. */ + r2 = p->c; /* Could get 44 on weakly order system. */ + } + do_something_with(r1, r2); + } + +You might be surprised that the outcome (r1 == 143 && r2 == 44) is possible, +but you should not be. After all, the updater might have been invoked +a second time between the time reader() loaded into "r1" and the time +that it loaded into "r2". The fact that this same result can occur due +to some reordering from the compiler and CPUs is beside the point. + +But suppose that the reader needs a consistent view? + +Then one approach is to use locking, for example, as follows: + + struct foo { + int a; + int b; + int c; + spinlock_t lock; + }; + struct foo *gp1; + struct foo *gp2; + + void updater(void) + { + struct foo *p; + + p = kmalloc(...); + if (p == NULL) + deal_with_it(); + spin_lock(&p->lock); + p->a = 42; /* Each field in its own cache line. */ + p->b = 43; + p->c = 44; + spin_unlock(&p->lock); + rcu_assign_pointer(gp1, p); + spin_lock(&p->lock); + p->b = 143; + p->c = 144; + spin_unlock(&p->lock); + rcu_assign_pointer(gp2, p); + } + + void reader(void) + { + struct foo *p; + struct foo *q; + int r1, r2; + + p = rcu_dereference(gp2); + if (p == NULL) + return; + spin_lock(&p->lock); + r1 = p->b; /* Guaranteed to get 143. */ + q = rcu_dereference(gp1); /* Guaranteed non-NULL. */ + if (p == q) { + /* The compiler decides that q->c is same as p->c. */ + r2 = p->c; /* Locking guarantees r2 == 144. */ + } + spin_unlock(&p->lock); + do_something_with(r1, r2); + } + +As always, use the right tool for the job! + + +EXAMPLE WHERE THE COMPILER KNOWS TOO MUCH + +If a pointer obtained from rcu_dereference() compares not-equal to some +other pointer, the compiler normally has no clue what the value of the +first pointer might be. This lack of knowledge prevents the compiler +from carrying out optimizations that otherwise might destroy the ordering +guarantees that RCU depends on. And the volatile cast in rcu_dereference() +should prevent the compiler from guessing the value. + +But without rcu_dereference(), the compiler knows more than you might +expect. Consider the following code fragment: + + struct foo { + int a; + int b; + }; + static struct foo variable1; + static struct foo variable2; + static struct foo *gp = &variable1; + + void updater(void) + { + initialize_foo(&variable2); + rcu_assign_pointer(gp, &variable2); + /* + * The above is the only store to gp in this translation unit, + * and the address of gp is not exported in any way. + */ + } + + int reader(void) + { + struct foo *p; + + p = gp; + barrier(); + if (p == &variable1) + return p->a; /* Must be variable1.a. */ + else + return p->b; /* Must be variable2.b. */ + } + +Because the compiler can see all stores to "gp", it knows that the only +possible values of "gp" are "variable1" on the one hand and "variable2" +on the other. The comparison in reader() therefore tells the compiler +the exact value of "p" even in the not-equals case. This allows the +compiler to make the return values independent of the load from "gp", +in turn destroying the ordering between this load and the loads of the +return values. This can result in "p->b" returning pre-initialization +garbage values. + +In short, rcu_dereference() is -not- optional when you are going to +dereference the resulting pointer. diff --git a/Documentation/RCU/stallwarn.txt b/Documentation/RCU/stallwarn.txt index 6f3a0057548..68fe3ad2701 100644 --- a/Documentation/RCU/stallwarn.txt +++ b/Documentation/RCU/stallwarn.txt @@ -24,7 +24,7 @@ CONFIG_RCU_CPU_STALL_TIMEOUT timing of the next warning for the current stall. Stall-warning messages may be enabled and disabled completely via - /sys/module/rcutree/parameters/rcu_cpu_stall_suppress. + /sys/module/rcupdate/parameters/rcu_cpu_stall_suppress. CONFIG_RCU_CPU_STALL_VERBOSE diff --git a/Documentation/RCU/whatisRCU.txt b/Documentation/RCU/whatisRCU.txt index 0f0fb7c432c..49b8551a3b6 100644 --- a/Documentation/RCU/whatisRCU.txt +++ b/Documentation/RCU/whatisRCU.txt @@ -326,11 +326,11 @@ used as follows: a. synchronize_rcu() rcu_read_lock() / rcu_read_unlock() call_rcu() rcu_dereference() -b. call_rcu_bh() rcu_read_lock_bh() / rcu_read_unlock_bh() - rcu_dereference_bh() +b. synchronize_rcu_bh() rcu_read_lock_bh() / rcu_read_unlock_bh() + call_rcu_bh() rcu_dereference_bh() c. synchronize_sched() rcu_read_lock_sched() / rcu_read_unlock_sched() - preempt_disable() / preempt_enable() + call_rcu_sched() preempt_disable() / preempt_enable() local_irq_save() / local_irq_restore() hardirq enter / hardirq exit NMI enter / NMI exit @@ -794,10 +794,22 @@ in docbook. Here is the list, by category. RCU list traversal: + list_entry_rcu + list_first_entry_rcu + list_next_rcu list_for_each_entry_rcu + list_for_each_entry_continue_rcu + hlist_first_rcu + hlist_next_rcu + hlist_pprev_rcu hlist_for_each_entry_rcu + hlist_for_each_entry_rcu_bh + hlist_for_each_entry_continue_rcu + hlist_for_each_entry_continue_rcu_bh + hlist_nulls_first_rcu hlist_nulls_for_each_entry_rcu - list_for_each_entry_continue_rcu + hlist_bl_first_rcu + hlist_bl_for_each_entry_rcu RCU pointer/list update: @@ -806,28 +818,38 @@ RCU pointer/list update: list_add_tail_rcu list_del_rcu list_replace_rcu - hlist_del_rcu hlist_add_after_rcu hlist_add_before_rcu hlist_add_head_rcu + hlist_del_rcu + hlist_del_init_rcu hlist_replace_rcu list_splice_init_rcu() + hlist_nulls_del_init_rcu + hlist_nulls_del_rcu + hlist_nulls_add_head_rcu + hlist_bl_add_head_rcu + hlist_bl_del_init_rcu + hlist_bl_del_rcu + hlist_bl_set_first_rcu RCU: Critical sections Grace period Barrier rcu_read_lock synchronize_net rcu_barrier rcu_read_unlock synchronize_rcu rcu_dereference synchronize_rcu_expedited - call_rcu - kfree_rcu - + rcu_read_lock_held call_rcu + rcu_dereference_check kfree_rcu + rcu_dereference_protected bh: Critical sections Grace period Barrier rcu_read_lock_bh call_rcu_bh rcu_barrier_bh rcu_read_unlock_bh synchronize_rcu_bh rcu_dereference_bh synchronize_rcu_bh_expedited - + rcu_dereference_bh_check + rcu_dereference_bh_protected + rcu_read_lock_bh_held sched: Critical sections Grace period Barrier @@ -835,7 +857,12 @@ sched: Critical sections Grace period Barrier rcu_read_unlock_sched call_rcu_sched [preempt_disable] synchronize_sched_expedited [and friends] + rcu_read_lock_sched_notrace + rcu_read_unlock_sched_notrace rcu_dereference_sched + rcu_dereference_sched_check + rcu_dereference_sched_protected + rcu_read_lock_sched_held SRCU: Critical sections Grace period Barrier @@ -843,6 +870,8 @@ SRCU: Critical sections Grace period Barrier srcu_read_lock synchronize_srcu srcu_barrier srcu_read_unlock call_srcu srcu_dereference synchronize_srcu_expedited + srcu_dereference_check + srcu_read_lock_held SRCU: Initialization/cleanup init_srcu_struct @@ -850,9 +879,13 @@ SRCU: Initialization/cleanup All: lockdep-checked RCU-protected pointer access - rcu_dereference_check - rcu_dereference_protected + rcu_access_index rcu_access_pointer + rcu_dereference_index_check + rcu_dereference_raw + rcu_lockdep_assert + rcu_sleep_check + RCU_NONIDLE See the comment headers in the source code (or the docbook generated from them) for more information. diff --git a/Documentation/acpi/enumeration.txt b/Documentation/acpi/enumeration.txt index 2a1519b8717..fd786ea13a1 100644 --- a/Documentation/acpi/enumeration.txt +++ b/Documentation/acpi/enumeration.txt @@ -296,7 +296,7 @@ specifies the path to the controller. In order to use these GPIOs in Linux we need to translate them to the corresponding Linux GPIO descriptors. There is a standard GPIO API for that and is documented in -Documentation/gpio.txt. +Documentation/gpio/. In the above example we can get the corresponding two GPIO descriptors with a code like this: diff --git a/Documentation/arm/00-INDEX b/Documentation/arm/00-INDEX index a94090cc785..3b08bc2b04c 100644 --- a/Documentation/arm/00-INDEX +++ b/Documentation/arm/00-INDEX @@ -46,5 +46,7 @@ swp_emulation - SWP/SWPB emulation handler/logging description tcm.txt - ARM Tightly Coupled Memory +uefi.txt + - [U]EFI configuration and runtime services documentation vlocks.txt - Voting locks, low-level mechanism relying on memory system atomic writes. diff --git a/Documentation/arm/Marvell/README b/Documentation/arm/Marvell/README index 963ec445e15..2cce5401e32 100644 --- a/Documentation/arm/Marvell/README +++ b/Documentation/arm/Marvell/README @@ -234,6 +234,11 @@ Berlin family (Digital Entertainment) Core: Marvell PJ4B (ARMv7), Tauros3 L2CC Homepage: http://www.marvell.com/digital-entertainment/armada-1500/ Product Brief: http://www.marvell.com/digital-entertainment/armada-1500/assets/Marvell-ARMADA-1500-Product-Brief.pdf + 88DE3114, Armada 1500 Pro + Design name: BG2-Q + Core: Quad Core ARM Cortex-A9, PL310 L2CC + Homepage: http://www.marvell.com/digital-entertainment/armada-1500-pro/ + Product Brief: http://www.marvell.com/digital-entertainment/armada-1500-pro/assets/Marvell_ARMADA_1500_PRO-01_product_brief.pdf 88DE???? Design name: BG3 Core: ARM Cortex-A15, CA15 integrated L2CC diff --git a/Documentation/arm/memory.txt b/Documentation/arm/memory.txt index 4bfb9ffbdbc..38dc06d0a79 100644 --- a/Documentation/arm/memory.txt +++ b/Documentation/arm/memory.txt @@ -41,16 +41,9 @@ fffe8000 fffeffff DTCM mapping area for platforms with fffe0000 fffe7fff ITCM mapping area for platforms with ITCM mounted inside the CPU. -fff00000 fffdffff Fixmap mapping region. Addresses provided +ffc00000 ffdfffff Fixmap mapping region. Addresses provided by fix_to_virt() will be located here. -ffc00000 ffefffff DMA memory mapping region. Memory returned - by the dma_alloc_xxx functions will be - dynamically mapped here. - -ff000000 ffbfffff Reserved for future expansion of DMA - mapping region. - fee00000 feffffff Mapping of PCI I/O space. This is a static mapping within the vmalloc space. diff --git a/Documentation/arm/sti/stih407-overview.txt b/Documentation/arm/sti/stih407-overview.txt new file mode 100644 index 00000000000..3343f32f58b --- /dev/null +++ b/Documentation/arm/sti/stih407-overview.txt @@ -0,0 +1,18 @@ + STiH407 Overview + ================ + +Introduction +------------ + + The STiH407 is the new generation of SoC for Multi-HD, AVC set-top boxes + and server/connected client application for satellite, cable, terrestrial + and IP-STB markets. + + Features + - ARM Cortex-A9 1.5 GHz dual core CPU (28nm) + - SATA2, USB 3.0, PCIe, Gbit Ethernet + + Document Author + --------------- + + Maxime Coquelin <maxime.coquelin@st.com>, (c) 2014 ST Microelectronics diff --git a/Documentation/arm/uefi.txt b/Documentation/arm/uefi.txt new file mode 100644 index 00000000000..d60030a1b90 --- /dev/null +++ b/Documentation/arm/uefi.txt @@ -0,0 +1,64 @@ +UEFI, the Unified Extensible Firmware Interface, is a specification +governing the behaviours of compatible firmware interfaces. It is +maintained by the UEFI Forum - http://www.uefi.org/. + +UEFI is an evolution of its predecessor 'EFI', so the terms EFI and +UEFI are used somewhat interchangeably in this document and associated +source code. As a rule, anything new uses 'UEFI', whereas 'EFI' refers +to legacy code or specifications. + +UEFI support in Linux +===================== +Booting on a platform with firmware compliant with the UEFI specification +makes it possible for the kernel to support additional features: +- UEFI Runtime Services +- Retrieving various configuration information through the standardised + interface of UEFI configuration tables. (ACPI, SMBIOS, ...) + +For actually enabling [U]EFI support, enable: +- CONFIG_EFI=y +- CONFIG_EFI_VARS=y or m + +The implementation depends on receiving information about the UEFI environment +in a Flattened Device Tree (FDT) - so is only available with CONFIG_OF. + +UEFI stub +========= +The "stub" is a feature that extends the Image/zImage into a valid UEFI +PE/COFF executable, including a loader application that makes it possible to +load the kernel directly from the UEFI shell, boot menu, or one of the +lightweight bootloaders like Gummiboot or rEFInd. + +The kernel image built with stub support remains a valid kernel image for +booting in non-UEFI environments. + +UEFI kernel support on ARM +========================== +UEFI kernel support on the ARM architectures (arm and arm64) is only available +when boot is performed through the stub. + +When booting in UEFI mode, the stub deletes any memory nodes from a provided DT. +Instead, the kernel reads the UEFI memory map. + +The stub populates the FDT /chosen node with (and the kernel scans for) the +following parameters: +________________________________________________________________________________ +Name | Size | Description +================================================================================ +linux,uefi-system-table | 64-bit | Physical address of the UEFI System Table. +-------------------------------------------------------------------------------- +linux,uefi-mmap-start | 64-bit | Physical address of the UEFI memory map, + | | populated by the UEFI GetMemoryMap() call. +-------------------------------------------------------------------------------- +linux,uefi-mmap-size | 32-bit | Size in bytes of the UEFI memory map + | | pointed to in previous entry. +-------------------------------------------------------------------------------- +linux,uefi-mmap-desc-size | 32-bit | Size in bytes of each entry in the UEFI + | | memory map. +-------------------------------------------------------------------------------- +linux,uefi-mmap-desc-ver | 32-bit | Version of the mmap descriptor format. +-------------------------------------------------------------------------------- +linux,uefi-stub-kern-ver | string | Copy of linux_banner from build. +-------------------------------------------------------------------------------- + +For verbose debug messages, specify 'uefi_debug' on the kernel command line. diff --git a/Documentation/arm64/booting.txt b/Documentation/arm64/booting.txt index beb754e87c6..37fc4f63217 100644 --- a/Documentation/arm64/booting.txt +++ b/Documentation/arm64/booting.txt @@ -85,6 +85,10 @@ The decompressed kernel image contains a 64-byte header as follows: Header notes: - code0/code1 are responsible for branching to stext. +- when booting through EFI, code0/code1 are initially skipped. + res5 is an offset to the PE header and the PE header has the EFI + entry point (efi_stub_entry). When the stub has done its work, it + jumps to code0 to resume the normal boot process. The image must be placed at the specified offset (currently 0x80000) from the start of the system RAM and called there. The start of the diff --git a/Documentation/atomic_ops.txt b/Documentation/atomic_ops.txt index d9ca5be9b47..68542fe13b8 100644 --- a/Documentation/atomic_ops.txt +++ b/Documentation/atomic_ops.txt @@ -285,15 +285,13 @@ If a caller requires memory barrier semantics around an atomic_t operation which does not return a value, a set of interfaces are defined which accomplish this: - void smp_mb__before_atomic_dec(void); - void smp_mb__after_atomic_dec(void); - void smp_mb__before_atomic_inc(void); - void smp_mb__after_atomic_inc(void); + void smp_mb__before_atomic(void); + void smp_mb__after_atomic(void); -For example, smp_mb__before_atomic_dec() can be used like so: +For example, smp_mb__before_atomic() can be used like so: obj->dead = 1; - smp_mb__before_atomic_dec(); + smp_mb__before_atomic(); atomic_dec(&obj->ref_count); It makes sure that all memory operations preceding the atomic_dec() @@ -302,15 +300,10 @@ operation. In the above example, it guarantees that the assignment of "1" to obj->dead will be globally visible to other cpus before the atomic counter decrement. -Without the explicit smp_mb__before_atomic_dec() call, the +Without the explicit smp_mb__before_atomic() call, the implementation could legally allow the atomic counter update visible to other cpus before the "obj->dead = 1;" assignment. -The other three interfaces listed are used to provide explicit -ordering with respect to memory operations after an atomic_dec() call -(smp_mb__after_atomic_dec()) and around atomic_inc() calls -(smp_mb__{before,after}_atomic_inc()). - A missing memory barrier in the cases where they are required by the atomic_t implementation above can have disastrous results. Here is an example, which follows a pattern occurring frequently in the Linux @@ -487,12 +480,12 @@ Finally there is the basic operation: Which returns a boolean indicating if bit "nr" is set in the bitmask pointed to by "addr". -If explicit memory barriers are required around clear_bit() (which -does not return a value, and thus does not need to provide memory -barrier semantics), two interfaces are provided: +If explicit memory barriers are required around {set,clear}_bit() (which do +not return a value, and thus does not need to provide memory barrier +semantics), two interfaces are provided: - void smp_mb__before_clear_bit(void); - void smp_mb__after_clear_bit(void); + void smp_mb__before_atomic(void); + void smp_mb__after_atomic(void); They are used as follows, and are akin to their atomic_t operation brothers: @@ -500,13 +493,13 @@ brothers: /* All memory operations before this call will * be globally visible before the clear_bit(). */ - smp_mb__before_clear_bit(); + smp_mb__before_atomic(); clear_bit( ... ); /* The clear_bit() will be visible before all * subsequent memory operations. */ - smp_mb__after_clear_bit(); + smp_mb__after_atomic(); There are two special bitops with lock barrier semantics (acquire/release, same as spinlocks). These operate in the same way as their non-_lock/unlock diff --git a/Documentation/cgroups/memory.txt b/Documentation/cgroups/memory.txt index 2622115276a..4937e6fff9b 100644 --- a/Documentation/cgroups/memory.txt +++ b/Documentation/cgroups/memory.txt @@ -270,6 +270,11 @@ When oom event notifier is registered, event will be delivered. 2.7 Kernel Memory Extension (CONFIG_MEMCG_KMEM) +WARNING: Current implementation lacks reclaim support. That means allocation + attempts will fail when close to the limit even if there are plenty of + kmem available for reclaim. That makes this option unusable in real + life so DO NOT SELECT IT unless for development purposes. + With the Kernel memory extension, the Memory Controller is able to limit the amount of kernel memory used by the system. Kernel memory is fundamentally different than user memory, since it can't be swapped out, which makes it @@ -535,17 +540,15 @@ Note: 5.3 swappiness -Similar to /proc/sys/vm/swappiness, but affecting a hierarchy of groups only. +Similar to /proc/sys/vm/swappiness, but only affecting reclaim that is +triggered by this cgroup's hard limit. The tunable in the root cgroup +corresponds to the global swappiness setting. + Please note that unlike the global swappiness, memcg knob set to 0 really prevents from any swapping even if there is a swap storage available. This might lead to memcg OOM killer if there are no file pages to reclaim. -Following cgroups' swappiness can't be changed. -- root cgroup (uses /proc/sys/vm/swappiness). -- a cgroup which uses hierarchy and it has other cgroup(s) below it. -- a cgroup which uses hierarchy and not the root of hierarchy. - 5.4 failcnt A memory cgroup provides memory.failcnt and memory.memsw.failcnt files. @@ -754,7 +757,6 @@ You can disable the OOM-killer by writing "1" to memory.oom_control file, as: #echo 1 > memory.oom_control -This operation is only allowed to the top cgroup of a sub-hierarchy. If OOM-killer is disabled, tasks under cgroup will hang/sleep in memory cgroup's OOM-waitqueue when they request accountable memory. diff --git a/Documentation/connector/connector.txt b/Documentation/connector/connector.txt index e5c5f5e6ab7..f6215f95149 100644 --- a/Documentation/connector/connector.txt +++ b/Documentation/connector/connector.txt @@ -24,7 +24,8 @@ netlink based networking for inter-process communication in a significantly easier way: int cn_add_callback(struct cb_id *id, char *name, void (*callback) (struct cn_msg *, struct netlink_skb_parms *)); -void cn_netlink_send(struct cn_msg *msg, u32 __group, int gfp_mask); +void cn_netlink_send_multi(struct cn_msg *msg, u16 len, u32 portid, u32 __group, int gfp_mask); +void cn_netlink_send(struct cn_msg *msg, u32 portid, u32 __group, int gfp_mask); struct cb_id { @@ -71,15 +72,21 @@ void cn_del_callback(struct cb_id *id); struct cb_id *id - unique connector's user identifier. -int cn_netlink_send(struct cn_msg *msg, u32 __groups, int gfp_mask); +int cn_netlink_send_multi(struct cn_msg *msg, u16 len, u32 portid, u32 __groups, int gfp_mask); +int cn_netlink_send(struct cn_msg *msg, u32 portid, u32 __groups, int gfp_mask); Sends message to the specified groups. It can be safely called from softirq context, but may silently fail under strong memory pressure. If there are no listeners for given group -ESRCH can be returned. struct cn_msg * - message header(with attached data). + u16 len - for *_multi multiple cn_msg messages can be sent + u32 port - destination port. + If non-zero the message will be sent to the + given port, which should be set to the + original sender. u32 __group - destination group. - If __group is zero, then appropriate group will + If port and __group is zero, then appropriate group will be searched through all registered connector users, and message will be delivered to the group which was created for user with the same ID as in msg. @@ -111,7 +118,7 @@ acknowledge number MUST be the same + 1. If we receive a message and its sequence number is not equal to one we are expecting, then it is a new message. If we receive a message and its sequence number is the same as one we are expecting, but its -acknowledge is not equal to the acknowledge number in the original +acknowledge is not equal to the sequence number in the original message + 1, then it is a new message. Obviously, the protocol header contains the above id. diff --git a/Documentation/cpu-freq/core.txt b/Documentation/cpu-freq/core.txt index 0060d76b445..70933eadc30 100644 --- a/Documentation/cpu-freq/core.txt +++ b/Documentation/cpu-freq/core.txt @@ -20,6 +20,7 @@ Contents: --------- 1. CPUFreq core and interfaces 2. CPUFreq notifiers +3. CPUFreq Table Generation with Operating Performance Point (OPP) 1. General Information ======================= @@ -92,3 +93,31 @@ values: cpu - number of the affected CPU old - old frequency new - new frequency + +3. CPUFreq Table Generation with Operating Performance Point (OPP) +================================================================== +For details about OPP, see Documentation/power/opp.txt + +dev_pm_opp_init_cpufreq_table - cpufreq framework typically is initialized with + cpufreq_frequency_table_cpuinfo which is provided with the list of + frequencies that are available for operation. This function provides + a ready to use conversion routine to translate the OPP layer's internal + information about the available frequencies into a format readily + providable to cpufreq. + + WARNING: Do not use this function in interrupt context. + + Example: + soc_pm_init() + { + /* Do things */ + r = dev_pm_opp_init_cpufreq_table(dev, &freq_table); + if (!r) + cpufreq_frequency_table_cpuinfo(policy, freq_table); + /* Do other things */ + } + + NOTE: This function is available only if CONFIG_CPU_FREQ is enabled in + addition to CONFIG_PM_OPP. + +dev_pm_opp_free_cpufreq_table - Free up the table allocated by dev_pm_opp_init_cpufreq_table diff --git a/Documentation/cpu-freq/cpu-drivers.txt b/Documentation/cpu-freq/cpu-drivers.txt index 48da5fdcb9f..b045fe54986 100644 --- a/Documentation/cpu-freq/cpu-drivers.txt +++ b/Documentation/cpu-freq/cpu-drivers.txt @@ -228,3 +228,22 @@ is the corresponding frequency table helper for the ->target stage. Just pass the values to this function, and the unsigned int index returns the number of the frequency table entry which contains the frequency the CPU shall be set to. + +The following macros can be used as iterators over cpufreq_frequency_table: + +cpufreq_for_each_entry(pos, table) - iterates over all entries of frequency +table. + +cpufreq-for_each_valid_entry(pos, table) - iterates over all entries, +excluding CPUFREQ_ENTRY_INVALID frequencies. +Use arguments "pos" - a cpufreq_frequency_table * as a loop cursor and +"table" - the cpufreq_frequency_table * you want to iterate over. + +For example: + + struct cpufreq_frequency_table *pos, *driver_freq_table; + + cpufreq_for_each_entry(pos, driver_freq_table) { + /* Do something with pos */ + pos->frequency = ... + } diff --git a/Documentation/cpu-freq/index.txt b/Documentation/cpu-freq/index.txt index 3d0b915035b..dc024ab4054 100644 --- a/Documentation/cpu-freq/index.txt +++ b/Documentation/cpu-freq/index.txt @@ -35,8 +35,8 @@ Mailing List ------------ There is a CPU frequency changing CVS commit and general list where you can report bugs, problems or submit patches. To post a message, -send an email to cpufreq@vger.kernel.org, to subscribe go to -http://vger.kernel.org/vger-lists.html#cpufreq and follow the +send an email to linux-pm@vger.kernel.org, to subscribe go to +http://vger.kernel.org/vger-lists.html#linux-pm and follow the instructions there. Links diff --git a/Documentation/debugging-via-ohci1394.txt b/Documentation/debugging-via-ohci1394.txt index fa0151a712f..5c9a567b3fa 100644 --- a/Documentation/debugging-via-ohci1394.txt +++ b/Documentation/debugging-via-ohci1394.txt @@ -25,9 +25,11 @@ using data transfer rates in the order of 10MB/s or more. With most FireWire controllers, memory access is limited to the low 4 GB of physical address space. This can be a problem on IA64 machines where memory is located mostly above that limit, but it is rarely a problem on -more common hardware such as x86, x86-64 and PowerPC. However, at least -Agere/LSI FW643e and FW643e2 controllers are known to support access to -physical addresses above 4 GB. +more common hardware such as x86, x86-64 and PowerPC. + +At least LSI FW643e and FW643e2 controllers are known to support access to +physical addresses above 4 GB, but this feature is currently not enabled by +Linux. Together with a early initialization of the OHCI-1394 controller for debugging, this facility proved most useful for examining long debugs logs in the printk @@ -101,8 +103,9 @@ Step-by-step instructions for using firescope with early OHCI initialization: compliant, they are based on TI PCILynx chips and require drivers for Win- dows operating systems. - The mentioned kernel log message contains ">4 GB phys DMA" in case of - OHCI-1394 controllers which support accesses above this limit. + The mentioned kernel log message contains the string "physUB" if the + controller implements a writable Physical Upper Bound register. This is + required for physical DMA above 4 GB (but not utilized by Linux yet). 2) Establish a working FireWire cable connection: diff --git a/Documentation/device-mapper/thin-provisioning.txt b/Documentation/device-mapper/thin-provisioning.txt index 05a27e9442b..2f5173500bd 100644 --- a/Documentation/device-mapper/thin-provisioning.txt +++ b/Documentation/device-mapper/thin-provisioning.txt @@ -309,7 +309,10 @@ ii) Status error_if_no_space|queue_if_no_space If the pool runs out of data or metadata space, the pool will either queue or error the IO destined to the data device. The - default is to queue the IO until more space is added. + default is to queue the IO until more space is added or the + 'no_space_timeout' expires. The 'no_space_timeout' dm-thin-pool + module parameter can be used to change this timeout -- it + defaults to 60 seconds but may be disabled using a value of 0. iii) Messages diff --git a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/arm/armada-370-xp-pmsu.txt b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/arm/armada-370-xp-pmsu.txt index 926b4d6aae7..26799ef562d 100644 --- a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/arm/armada-370-xp-pmsu.txt +++ b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/arm/armada-370-xp-pmsu.txt @@ -1,20 +1,21 @@ Power Management Service Unit(PMSU) ----------------------------------- -Available on Marvell SOCs: Armada 370 and Armada XP +Available on Marvell SOCs: Armada 370, Armada 38x and Armada XP Required properties: -- compatible: "marvell,armada-370-xp-pmsu" +- compatible: should be one of: + - "marvell,armada-370-pmsu" for Armada 370 or Armada XP + - "marvell,armada-380-pmsu" for Armada 38x + - "marvell,armada-370-xp-pmsu" was used for Armada 370/XP but is now + deprecated and will be removed -- reg: Should contain PMSU registers location and length. First pair - for the per-CPU SW Reset Control registers, second pair for the - Power Management Service Unit. +- reg: Should contain PMSU registers location and length. Example: -armada-370-xp-pmsu@d0022000 { - compatible = "marvell,armada-370-xp-pmsu"; - reg = <0xd0022100 0x430>, - <0xd0020800 0x20>; +armada-370-xp-pmsu@22000 { + compatible = "marvell,armada-370-pmsu"; + reg = <0x22000 0x1000>; }; diff --git a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/arm/armada-cpu-reset.txt b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/arm/armada-cpu-reset.txt new file mode 100644 index 00000000000..b63a7b6ab99 --- /dev/null +++ b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/arm/armada-cpu-reset.txt @@ -0,0 +1,14 @@ +Marvell Armada CPU reset controller +=================================== + +Required properties: + +- compatible: Should be "marvell,armada-370-cpu-reset". + +- reg: should be register base and length as documented in the + datasheet for the CPU reset registers + +cpurst: cpurst@20800 { + compatible = "marvell,armada-370-cpu-reset"; + reg = <0x20800 0x20>; +}; diff --git a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/arm/axxia.txt b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/arm/axxia.txt new file mode 100644 index 00000000000..7b4ef9c0769 --- /dev/null +++ b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/arm/axxia.txt @@ -0,0 +1,12 @@ +Axxia AXM55xx device tree bindings + +Boards using the AXM55xx SoC need to have the following properties: + +Required root node property: + + - compatible = "lsi,axm5516" + +Boards: + + LSI AXM5516 Validation board (Amarillo) + compatible = "lsi,axm5516-amarillo", "lsi,axm5516" diff --git a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/arm/coherency-fabric.txt b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/arm/coherency-fabric.txt index 17d8cd10755..8dd46617c88 100644 --- a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/arm/coherency-fabric.txt +++ b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/arm/coherency-fabric.txt @@ -1,16 +1,33 @@ Coherency fabric ---------------- -Available on Marvell SOCs: Armada 370 and Armada XP +Available on Marvell SOCs: Armada 370, Armada 375, Armada 38x and Armada XP Required properties: -- compatible: "marvell,coherency-fabric" +- compatible: the possible values are: + + * "marvell,coherency-fabric", to be used for the coherency fabric of + the Armada 370 and Armada XP. + + * "marvell,armada-375-coherency-fabric", for the Armada 375 coherency + fabric. + + * "marvell,armada-380-coherency-fabric", for the Armada 38x coherency + fabric. - reg: Should contain coherency fabric registers location and - length. First pair for the coherency fabric registers, second pair - for the per-CPU fabric registers registers. + length. + + * For "marvell,coherency-fabric", the first pair for the coherency + fabric registers, second pair for the per-CPU fabric registers. -Example: + * For "marvell,armada-375-coherency-fabric", only one pair is needed + for the per-CPU fabric registers. + + * For "marvell,armada-380-coherency-fabric", only one pair is needed + for the per-CPU fabric registers. + +Examples: coherency-fabric@d0020200 { compatible = "marvell,coherency-fabric"; @@ -19,3 +36,8 @@ coherency-fabric@d0020200 { }; +coherency-fabric@21810 { + compatible = "marvell,armada-375-coherency-fabric"; + reg = <0x21810 0x1c>; +}; + diff --git a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/arm/cpus.txt b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/arm/cpus.txt index 333f4aea302..1fe72a0778c 100644 --- a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/arm/cpus.txt +++ b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/arm/cpus.txt @@ -178,13 +178,19 @@ nodes to be present and contain the properties described below. Usage and definition depend on ARM architecture version. # On ARM v8 64-bit this property is required and must be one of: - "spin-table" "psci" + "spin-table" # On ARM 32-bit systems this property is optional and can be one of: + "allwinner,sun6i-a31" + "arm,psci" + "marvell,armada-375-smp" + "marvell,armada-380-smp" + "marvell,armada-xp-smp" "qcom,gcc-msm8660" "qcom,kpss-acc-v1" "qcom,kpss-acc-v2" + "rockchip,rk3066-smp" - cpu-release-addr Usage: required for systems that have an "enable-method" diff --git a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/arm/exynos/smp-sysram.txt b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/arm/exynos/smp-sysram.txt new file mode 100644 index 00000000000..4a0a4f70a0c --- /dev/null +++ b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/arm/exynos/smp-sysram.txt @@ -0,0 +1,38 @@ +Samsung Exynos SYSRAM for SMP bringup: +------------------------------------ + +Samsung SMP-capable Exynos SoCs use part of the SYSRAM for the bringup +of the secondary cores. Once the core gets powered up it executes the +code that is residing at some specific location of the SYSRAM. + +Therefore reserved section sub-nodes have to be added to the mmio-sram +declaration. These nodes are of two types depending upon secure or +non-secure execution environment. + +Required sub-node properties: +- compatible : depending upon boot mode, should be + "samsung,exynos4210-sysram" : for Secure SYSRAM + "samsung,exynos4210-sysram-ns" : for Non-secure SYSRAM + +The rest of the properties should follow the generic mmio-sram discription +found in ../../misc/sysram.txt + +Example: + + sysram@02020000 { + compatible = "mmio-sram"; + reg = <0x02020000 0x54000>; + #address-cells = <1>; + #size-cells = <1>; + ranges = <0 0x02020000 0x54000>; + + smp-sysram@0 { + compatible = "samsung,exynos4210-sysram"; + reg = <0x0 0x1000>; + }; + + smp-sysram@53000 { + compatible = "samsung,exynos4210-sysram-ns"; + reg = <0x53000 0x1000>; + }; + }; diff --git a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/arm/global_timer.txt b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/arm/global_timer.txt index 1e548981eda..bdae3a81879 100644 --- a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/arm/global_timer.txt +++ b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/arm/global_timer.txt @@ -4,8 +4,11 @@ ** Timer node required properties: -- compatible : Should be "arm,cortex-a9-global-timer" - Driver supports versions r2p0 and above. +- compatible : should contain + * "arm,cortex-a5-global-timer" for Cortex-A5 global timers. + * "arm,cortex-a9-global-timer" for Cortex-A9 global + timers or any compatible implementation. Note: driver + supports versions r2p0 and above. - interrupts : One interrupt to each core diff --git a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/arm/marvell,berlin.txt b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/arm/marvell,berlin.txt index 737afa5f814..94013a9a876 100644 --- a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/arm/marvell,berlin.txt +++ b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/arm/marvell,berlin.txt @@ -12,6 +12,7 @@ SoC and board used. Currently known SoC compatibles are: "marvell,berlin2" for Marvell Armada 1500 (BG2, 88DE3100), "marvell,berlin2cd" for Marvell Armada 1500-mini (BG2CD, 88DE3005) "marvell,berlin2ct" for Marvell Armada ? (BG2CT, 88DE????) + "marvell,berlin2q" for Marvell Armada 1500-pro (BG2Q, 88DE3114) "marvell,berlin3" for Marvell Armada ? (BG3, 88DE????) * Example: @@ -22,3 +23,104 @@ SoC and board used. Currently known SoC compatibles are: ... } + +* Marvell Berlin2 chip control binding + +Marvell Berlin SoCs have a chip control register set providing several +individual registers dealing with pinmux, padmux, clock, reset, and secondary +CPU boot address. Unfortunately, the individual registers are spread among the +chip control registers, so there should be a single DT node only providing the +different functions which are described below. + +Required properties: +- compatible: shall be one of + "marvell,berlin2-chip-ctrl" for BG2 + "marvell,berlin2cd-chip-ctrl" for BG2CD + "marvell,berlin2q-chip-ctrl" for BG2Q +- reg: address and length of following register sets for + BG2/BG2CD: chip control register set + BG2Q: chip control register set and cpu pll registers + +* Marvell Berlin2 system control binding + +Marvell Berlin SoCs have a system control register set providing several +individual registers dealing with pinmux, padmux, and reset. + +Required properties: +- compatible: should be one of + "marvell,berlin2-system-ctrl" for BG2 + "marvell,berlin2cd-system-ctrl" for BG2CD + "marvell,berlin2q-system-ctrl" for BG2Q +- reg: address and length of the system control register set + +* Clock provider binding + +As clock related registers are spread among the chip control registers, the +chip control node also provides the clocks. Marvell Berlin2 (BG2, BG2CD, BG2Q) +SoCs share the same IP for PLLs and clocks, with some minor differences in +features and register layout. + +Required properties: +- #clock-cells: shall be set to 1 +- clocks: clock specifiers referencing the core clock input clocks +- clock-names: array of strings describing the input clock specifiers above. + Allowed clock-names for the reference clocks are + "refclk" for the SoCs osciallator input on all SoCs, + and SoC-specific input clocks for + BG2/BG2CD: "video_ext0" for the external video clock input + +Clocks provided by core clocks shall be referenced by a clock specifier +indexing one of the provided clocks. Refer to dt-bindings/clock/berlin<soc>.h +for the corresponding index mapping. + +* Pin controller binding + +Pin control registers are part of both register sets, chip control and system +control. The pins controlled are organized in groups, so no actual pin +information is needed. + +A pin-controller node should contain subnodes representing the pin group +configurations, one per function. Each subnode has the group name and the muxing +function used. + +Be aware the Marvell Berlin datasheets use the keyword 'mode' for what is called +a 'function' in the pin-controller subsystem. + +Required subnode-properties: +- groups: a list of strings describing the group names. +- function: a string describing the function used to mux the groups. + +Example: + +chip: chip-control@ea0000 { + compatible = "marvell,berlin2-chip-ctrl"; + #clock-cells = <1>; + reg = <0xea0000 0x400>; + clocks = <&refclk>, <&externaldev 0>; + clock-names = "refclk", "video_ext0"; + + spi1_pmux: spi1-pmux { + groups = "G0"; + function = "spi1"; + }; +}; + +sysctrl: system-controller@d000 { + compatible = "marvell,berlin2-system-ctrl"; + reg = <0xd000 0x100>; + + uart0_pmux: uart0-pmux { + groups = "GSM4"; + function = "uart0"; + }; + + uart1_pmux: uart1-pmux { + groups = "GSM5"; + function = "uart1"; + }; + + uart2_pmux: uart2-pmux { + groups = "GSM3"; + function = "uart2"; + }; +}; diff --git a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/arm/omap/l3-noc.txt b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/arm/omap/l3-noc.txt index c0105de55cb..974624ea68f 100644 --- a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/arm/omap/l3-noc.txt +++ b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/arm/omap/l3-noc.txt @@ -6,6 +6,8 @@ provided by Arteris. Required properties: - compatible : Should be "ti,omap3-l3-smx" for OMAP3 family Should be "ti,omap4-l3-noc" for OMAP4 family + Should be "ti,dra7-l3-noc" for DRA7 family + Should be "ti,am4372-l3-noc" for AM43 family - reg: Contains L3 register address range for each noc domain. - ti,hwmods: "l3_main_1", ... One hwmod for each noc domain. diff --git a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/arm/omap/omap.txt b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/arm/omap/omap.txt index 36ede19a163..d22b216f5d2 100644 --- a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/arm/omap/omap.txt +++ b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/arm/omap/omap.txt @@ -80,7 +80,10 @@ SoCs: compatible = "ti,omap5432", "ti,omap5" - DRA742 - compatible = "ti,dra7xx", "ti,dra7" + compatible = "ti,dra742", "ti,dra74", "ti,dra7" + +- DRA722 + compatible = "ti,dra722", "ti,dra72", "ti,dra7" - AM4372 compatible = "ti,am4372", "ti,am43" @@ -102,6 +105,12 @@ Boards: - OMAP4 DuoVero with Parlor : Commercial expansion board with daughter board compatible = "gumstix,omap4-duovero-parlor", "gumstix,omap4-duovero", "ti,omap4430", "ti,omap4"; +- OMAP4 VAR-STK-OM44 : Commercial dev kit with VAR-OM44CustomBoard and VAR-SOM-OM44 w/WLAN + compatible = "variscite,var-stk-om44", "variscite,var-som-om44", "ti,omap4460", "ti,omap4"; + +- OMAP4 VAR-DVK-OM44 : Commercial dev kit with VAR-OM44CustomBoard, VAR-SOM-OM44 w/WLAN and LCD touchscreen + compatible = "variscite,var-dvk-om44", "variscite,var-som-om44", "ti,omap4460", "ti,omap4"; + - OMAP3 EVM : Software Development Board for OMAP35x, AM/DM37x compatible = "ti,omap3-evm", "ti,omap3" @@ -120,5 +129,8 @@ Boards: - AM437x GP EVM compatible = "ti,am437x-gp-evm", "ti,am4372", "ti,am43" -- DRA7 EVM: Software Developement Board for DRA7XX - compatible = "ti,dra7-evm", "ti,dra7" +- DRA742 EVM: Software Development Board for DRA742 + compatible = "ti,dra7-evm", "ti,dra742", "ti,dra74", "ti,dra7" + +- DRA722 EVM: Software Development Board for DRA722 + compatible = "ti,dra72-evm", "ti,dra722", "ti,dra72", "ti,dra7" diff --git a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/arm/pmu.txt b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/arm/pmu.txt index fe5cef8976c..75ef91d08f3 100644 --- a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/arm/pmu.txt +++ b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/arm/pmu.txt @@ -8,6 +8,7 @@ Required properties: - compatible : should be one of "arm,armv8-pmuv3" + "arm,cortex-a17-pmu" "arm,cortex-a15-pmu" "arm,cortex-a12-pmu" "arm,cortex-a9-pmu" diff --git a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/arm/psci.txt b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/arm/psci.txt index 433afe9cb59..b4a58f39223 100644 --- a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/arm/psci.txt +++ b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/arm/psci.txt @@ -21,7 +21,15 @@ to #0. Main node required properties: - - compatible : Must be "arm,psci" + - compatible : should contain at least one of: + + * "arm,psci" : for implementations complying to PSCI versions prior to + 0.2. For these cases function IDs must be provided. + + * "arm,psci-0.2" : for implementations complying to PSCI 0.2. Function + IDs are not required and should be ignored by an OS with PSCI 0.2 + support, but are permitted to be present for compatibility with + existing software when "arm,psci" is later in the compatible list. - method : The method of calling the PSCI firmware. Permitted values are: @@ -45,6 +53,8 @@ Main node optional properties: Example: +Case 1: PSCI v0.1 only. + psci { compatible = "arm,psci"; method = "smc"; @@ -53,3 +63,28 @@ Example: cpu_on = <0x95c10002>; migrate = <0x95c10003>; }; + + +Case 2: PSCI v0.2 only + + psci { + compatible = "arm,psci-0.2"; + method = "smc"; + }; + +Case 3: PSCI v0.2 and PSCI v0.1. + + A DTB may provide IDs for use by kernels without PSCI 0.2 support, + enabling firmware and hypervisors to support existing and new kernels. + These IDs will be ignored by kernels with PSCI 0.2 support, which will + use the standard PSCI 0.2 IDs exclusively. + + psci { + compatible = "arm,psci-0.2", "arm,psci"; + method = "hvc"; + + cpu_on = < arbitrary value >; + cpu_off = < arbitrary value >; + + ... + }; diff --git a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/arm/rockchip.txt b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/arm/rockchip.txt new file mode 100644 index 00000000000..857f12636eb --- /dev/null +++ b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/arm/rockchip.txt @@ -0,0 +1,10 @@ +Rockchip platforms device tree bindings +--------------------------------------- + +- bq Curie 2 tablet: + Required root node properties: + - compatible = "mundoreader,bq-curie2", "rockchip,rk3066a"; + +- Radxa Rock board: + Required root node properties: + - compatible = "radxa,rock", "rockchip,rk3188"; diff --git a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/arm/samsung/pmu.txt b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/arm/samsung/pmu.txt index f1f155255f2..2a4ab046a8a 100644 --- a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/arm/samsung/pmu.txt +++ b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/arm/samsung/pmu.txt @@ -2,6 +2,10 @@ SAMSUNG Exynos SoC series PMU Registers Properties: - compatible : should contain two values. First value must be one from following list: + - "samsung,exynos3250-pmu" - for Exynos3250 SoC, + - "samsung,exynos4210-pmu" - for Exynos4210 SoC, + - "samsung,exynos4212-pmu" - for Exynos4212 SoC, + - "samsung,exynos4412-pmu" - for Exynos4412 SoC, - "samsung,exynos5250-pmu" - for Exynos5250 SoC, - "samsung,exynos5420-pmu" - for Exynos5420 SoC. second value must be always "syscon". diff --git a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/arm/samsung/sysreg.txt b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/arm/samsung/sysreg.txt index 0ab3251a6ec..4fced6e9d5e 100644 --- a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/arm/samsung/sysreg.txt +++ b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/arm/samsung/sysreg.txt @@ -1,8 +1,10 @@ SAMSUNG S5P/Exynos SoC series System Registers (SYSREG) Properties: - - compatible : should contain "samsung,<chip name>-sysreg", "syscon"; - For Exynos4 SoC series it should be "samsung,exynos4-sysreg", "syscon"; + - compatible : should contain two values. First value must be one from following list: + - "samsung,exynos4-sysreg" - for Exynos4 based SoCs, + - "samsung,exynos5-sysreg" - for Exynos5 based SoCs. + second value must be always "syscon". - reg : offset and length of the register set. Example: @@ -10,3 +12,8 @@ Example: compatible = "samsung,exynos4-sysreg", "syscon"; reg = <0x10010000 0x400>; }; + + syscon@10050000 { + compatible = "samsung,exynos5-sysreg", "syscon"; + reg = <0x10050000 0x5000>; + }; diff --git a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/arm/sti.txt b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/arm/sti.txt new file mode 100644 index 00000000000..92f16c78bb6 --- /dev/null +++ b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/arm/sti.txt @@ -0,0 +1,15 @@ +ST STi Platforms Device Tree Bindings +--------------------------------------- + +Boards with the ST STiH415 SoC shall have the following properties: +Required root node property: +compatible = "st,stih415"; + +Boards with the ST STiH416 SoC shall have the following properties: +Required root node property: +compatible = "st,stih416"; + +Boards with the ST STiH407 SoC shall have the following properties: +Required root node property: +compatible = "st,stih407"; + diff --git a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/arm/vexpress-sysreg.txt b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/arm/vexpress-sysreg.txt index 5580e9c4bd8..00318d083c9 100644 --- a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/arm/vexpress-sysreg.txt +++ b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/arm/vexpress-sysreg.txt @@ -8,6 +8,8 @@ interrupt generation, MMC and NOR Flash control etc. Required node properties: - compatible value : = "arm,vexpress,sysreg"; - reg : physical base address and the size of the registers window + +Deprecated properties, replaced by GPIO subnodes (see below): - gpio-controller : specifies that the node is a GPIO controller - #gpio-cells : size of the GPIO specifier, should be 2: - first cell is the pseudo-GPIO line number: @@ -16,35 +18,86 @@ Required node properties: 2 - NOR FLASH WPn - second cell can take standard GPIO flags (currently ignored). +Control registers providing pseudo-GPIO lines must be represented +by subnodes, each of them requiring the following properties: +- compatible value : one of + "arm,vexpress-sysreg,sys_led" + "arm,vexpress-sysreg,sys_mci" + "arm,vexpress-sysreg,sys_flash" +- gpio-controller : makes the node a GPIO controller +- #gpio-cells : size of the GPIO specifier, must be 2: + - first cell is the function number: + - for sys_led : 0..7 = LED 0..7 + - for sys_mci : 0 = MMC CARDIN, 1 = MMC WPROT + - for sys_flash : 0 = NOR FLASH WPn + - second cell can take standard GPIO flags (currently ignored). + Example: v2m_sysreg: sysreg@10000000 { compatible = "arm,vexpress-sysreg"; reg = <0x10000000 0x1000>; - gpio-controller; - #gpio-cells = <2>; + + v2m_led_gpios: sys_led@08 { + compatible = "arm,vexpress-sysreg,sys_led"; + gpio-controller; + #gpio-cells = <2>; + }; + + v2m_mmc_gpios: sys_mci@48 { + compatible = "arm,vexpress-sysreg,sys_mci"; + gpio-controller; + #gpio-cells = <2>; + }; + + v2m_flash_gpios: sys_flash@4c { + compatible = "arm,vexpress-sysreg,sys_flash"; + gpio-controller; + #gpio-cells = <2>; + }; }; This block also can also act a bridge to the platform's configuration bus via "system control" interface, addressing devices with site number, position in the board stack, config controller, function and device -numbers - see motherboard's TRM for more details. - -The node describing a config device must refer to the sysreg node via -"arm,vexpress,config-bridge" phandle (can be also defined in the node's -parent) and relies on the board topology properties - see main vexpress -node documentation for more details. It must also define the following -property: -- arm,vexpress-sysreg,func : must contain two cells: - - first cell defines function number (eg. 1 for clock generator, - 2 for voltage regulators etc.) - - device number (eg. osc 0, osc 1 etc.) +numbers - see motherboard's TRM for more details. All configuration +controller accessible via this interface must reference the sysreg +node via "arm,vexpress,config-bridge" phandle and define appropriate +topology properties - see main vexpress node documentation for more +details. Each child of such node describes one function and must +define the following properties: +- compatible value : must be one of (corresponding to the TRM): + "arm,vexpress-amp" + "arm,vexpress-dvimode" + "arm,vexpress-energy" + "arm,vexpress-muxfpga" + "arm,vexpress-osc" + "arm,vexpress-power" + "arm,vexpress-reboot" + "arm,vexpress-reset" + "arm,vexpress-scc" + "arm,vexpress-shutdown" + "arm,vexpress-temp" + "arm,vexpress-volt" +- arm,vexpress-sysreg,func : must contain a set of two cells long groups: + - first cell of each group defines the function number + (eg. 1 for clock generator, 2 for voltage regulators etc.) + - second cell of each group defines device number (eg. osc 0, + osc 1 etc.) + - some functions (eg. energy meter, with its 64 bit long counter) + are using more than one function/device number pair Example: mcc { + compatible = "arm,vexpress,config-bus"; arm,vexpress,config-bridge = <&v2m_sysreg>; osc@0 { compatible = "arm,vexpress-osc"; arm,vexpress-sysreg,func = <1 0>; }; + + energy@0 { + compatible = "arm,vexpress-energy"; + arm,vexpress-sysreg,func = <13 0>, <13 1>; + }; }; diff --git a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/arm/vexpress.txt b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/arm/vexpress.txt index ae49161e478..39844cd0bcc 100644 --- a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/arm/vexpress.txt +++ b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/arm/vexpress.txt @@ -80,12 +80,17 @@ but also control clock generators, voltage regulators, gather environmental data like temperature, power consumption etc. Even the video output switch (FPGA) is controlled that way. -Nodes describing devices controlled by this infrastructure should -point at the bridge device node: +The controllers are not mapped into normal memory address space +and must be accessed through bridges - other devices capable +of generating transactions on the configuration bus. + +The nodes describing configuration controllers must define +the following properties: +- compatible value: + compatible = "arm,vexpress,config-bus"; - bridge phandle: arm,vexpress,config-bridge = <phandle>; -This property can be also defined in a parent node (eg. for a DCC) -and is effective for all children. +and children describing available functions. Platform topology @@ -197,7 +202,7 @@ Example of a VE tile description (simplified) }; dcc { - compatible = "simple-bus"; + compatible = "arm,vexpress,config-bus"; arm,vexpress,config-bridge = <&v2m_sysreg>; osc@0 { diff --git a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/bus/brcm,gisb-arb.txt b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/bus/brcm,gisb-arb.txt new file mode 100644 index 00000000000..e2d501d20c9 --- /dev/null +++ b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/bus/brcm,gisb-arb.txt @@ -0,0 +1,30 @@ +Broadcom GISB bus Arbiter controller + +Required properties: + +- compatible: should be "brcm,gisb-arb" +- reg: specifies the base physical address and size of the registers +- interrupt-parent: specifies the phandle to the parent interrupt controller + this arbiter gets interrupt line from +- interrupts: specifies the two interrupts (timeout and TEA) to be used from + the parent interrupt controller + +Optional properties: + +- brcm,gisb-arb-master-mask: 32-bits wide bitmask used to specify which GISB + masters are valid at the system level +- brcm,gisb-arb-master-names: string list of the litteral name of the GISB + masters. Should match the number of bits set in brcm,gisb-master-mask and + the order in which they appear + +Example: + +gisb-arb@f0400000 { + compatible = "brcm,gisb-arb"; + reg = <0xf0400000 0x800>; + interrupts = <0>, <2>; + interrupt-parent = <&sun_l2_intc>; + + brcm,gisb-arb-master-mask = <0x7>; + brcm,gisb-arb-master-names = "bsp_0", "scpu_0", "cpu_0"; +}; diff --git a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/bus/mvebu-mbus.txt b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/bus/mvebu-mbus.txt index 7586fb68c07..5fa44f52a0b 100644 --- a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/bus/mvebu-mbus.txt +++ b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/bus/mvebu-mbus.txt @@ -197,7 +197,7 @@ to be set by the operating system and that are guaranteed to be free of overlaps with one another or with the system memory ranges. Each entry in the property refers to exactly one window. If the operating system -choses to use a different set of mbus windows, it must ensure that any address +chooses to use a different set of mbus windows, it must ensure that any address translations performed from downstream devices are adapted accordingly. The operating system may insert additional mbus windows that do not conflict diff --git a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/clock/altr_socfpga.txt b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/clock/altr_socfpga.txt index 5dfd145d3cc..f72e80e0dad 100644 --- a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/clock/altr_socfpga.txt +++ b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/clock/altr_socfpga.txt @@ -21,8 +21,8 @@ Optional properties: - fixed-divider : If clocks have a fixed divider value, use this property. - clk-gate : For "socfpga-gate-clk", clk-gate contains the gating register and the bit index. -- div-reg : For "socfpga-gate-clk", div-reg contains the divider register, bit shift, - and width. +- div-reg : For "socfpga-gate-clk" and "socfpga-periph-clock", div-reg contains + the divider register, bit shift, and width. - clk-phase : For the sdmmc_clk, contains the value of the clock phase that controls the SDMMC CIU clock. The first value is the clk_sample(smpsel), and the second value is the cclk_in_drv(drvsel). The clk-phase is used to enable the correct diff --git a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/clock/at91-clock.txt b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/clock/at91-clock.txt index 6794cdc96d8..b3d544ca522 100644 --- a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/clock/at91-clock.txt +++ b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/clock/at91-clock.txt @@ -6,6 +6,16 @@ This binding uses the common clock binding[1]. Required properties: - compatible : shall be one of the following: + "atmel,at91sam9x5-sckc": + at91 SCKC (Slow Clock Controller) + This node contains the slow clock definitions. + + "atmel,at91sam9x5-clk-slow-osc": + at91 slow oscillator + + "atmel,at91sam9x5-clk-slow-rc-osc": + at91 internal slow RC oscillator + "atmel,at91rm9200-pmc" or "atmel,at91sam9g45-pmc" or "atmel,at91sam9n12-pmc" or @@ -15,8 +25,18 @@ Required properties: All at91 specific clocks (clocks defined below) must be child node of the PMC node. + "atmel,at91sam9x5-clk-slow" (under sckc node) + or + "atmel,at91sam9260-clk-slow" (under pmc node): + at91 slow clk + + "atmel,at91rm9200-clk-main-osc" + "atmel,at91sam9x5-clk-main-rc-osc" + at91 main clk sources + + "atmel,at91sam9x5-clk-main" "atmel,at91rm9200-clk-main": - at91 main oscillator + at91 main clock "atmel,at91rm9200-clk-master" or "atmel,at91sam9x5-clk-master": @@ -54,6 +74,63 @@ Required properties: "atmel,at91sam9x5-clk-utmi": at91 utmi clock +Required properties for SCKC node: +- reg : defines the IO memory reserved for the SCKC. +- #size-cells : shall be 0 (reg is used to encode clk id). +- #address-cells : shall be 1 (reg is used to encode clk id). + + +For example: + sckc: sckc@fffffe50 { + compatible = "atmel,sama5d3-pmc"; + reg = <0xfffffe50 0x4> + #size-cells = <0>; + #address-cells = <1>; + + /* put at91 slow clocks here */ + }; + + +Required properties for internal slow RC oscillator: +- #clock-cells : from common clock binding; shall be set to 0. +- clock-frequency : define the internal RC oscillator frequency. + +Optional properties: +- clock-accuracy : define the internal RC oscillator accuracy. + +For example: + slow_rc_osc: slow_rc_osc { + compatible = "atmel,at91sam9x5-clk-slow-rc-osc"; + clock-frequency = <32768>; + clock-accuracy = <50000000>; + }; + +Required properties for slow oscillator: +- #clock-cells : from common clock binding; shall be set to 0. +- clocks : shall encode the main osc source clk sources (see atmel datasheet). + +Optional properties: +- atmel,osc-bypass : boolean property. Set this when a clock signal is directly + provided on XIN. + +For example: + slow_osc: slow_osc { + compatible = "atmel,at91rm9200-clk-slow-osc"; + #clock-cells = <0>; + clocks = <&slow_xtal>; + }; + +Required properties for slow clock: +- #clock-cells : from common clock binding; shall be set to 0. +- clocks : shall encode the slow clk sources (see atmel datasheet). + +For example: + clk32k: slck { + compatible = "atmel,at91sam9x5-clk-slow"; + #clock-cells = <0>; + clocks = <&slow_rc_osc &slow_osc>; + }; + Required properties for PMC node: - reg : defines the IO memory reserved for the PMC. - #size-cells : shall be 0 (reg is used to encode clk id). @@ -85,24 +162,57 @@ For example: /* put at91 clocks here */ }; +Required properties for main clock internal RC oscillator: +- interrupt-parent : must reference the PMC node. +- interrupts : shall be set to "<0>". +- clock-frequency : define the internal RC oscillator frequency. + +Optional properties: +- clock-accuracy : define the internal RC oscillator accuracy. + +For example: + main_rc_osc: main_rc_osc { + compatible = "atmel,at91sam9x5-clk-main-rc-osc"; + interrupt-parent = <&pmc>; + interrupts = <0>; + clock-frequency = <12000000>; + clock-accuracy = <50000000>; + }; + +Required properties for main clock oscillator: +- interrupt-parent : must reference the PMC node. +- interrupts : shall be set to "<0>". +- #clock-cells : from common clock binding; shall be set to 0. +- clocks : shall encode the main osc source clk sources (see atmel datasheet). + +Optional properties: +- atmel,osc-bypass : boolean property. Specified if a clock signal is provided + on XIN. + + clock signal is directly provided on XIN pin. + +For example: + main_osc: main_osc { + compatible = "atmel,at91rm9200-clk-main-osc"; + interrupt-parent = <&pmc>; + interrupts = <0>; + #clock-cells = <0>; + clocks = <&main_xtal>; + }; + Required properties for main clock: - interrupt-parent : must reference the PMC node. - interrupts : shall be set to "<0>". - #clock-cells : from common clock binding; shall be set to 0. -- clocks (optional if clock-frequency is provided) : shall be the slow clock - phandle. This clock is used to calculate the main clock rate if - "clock-frequency" is not provided. -- clock-frequency : the main oscillator frequency.Prefer the use of - "clock-frequency" over automatic clock rate calculation. +- clocks : shall encode the main clk sources (see atmel datasheet). For example: main: mainck { - compatible = "atmel,at91rm9200-clk-main"; + compatible = "atmel,at91sam9x5-clk-main"; interrupt-parent = <&pmc>; interrupts = <0>; #clock-cells = <0>; - clocks = <&ck32k>; - clock-frequency = <18432000>; + clocks = <&main_rc_osc &main_osc>; }; Required properties for master clock: diff --git a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/clock/exynos3250-clock.txt b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/clock/exynos3250-clock.txt new file mode 100644 index 00000000000..aadc9c59e2d --- /dev/null +++ b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/clock/exynos3250-clock.txt @@ -0,0 +1,41 @@ +* Samsung Exynos3250 Clock Controller + +The Exynos3250 clock controller generates and supplies clock to various +controllers within the Exynos3250 SoC. + +Required Properties: + +- compatible: should be one of the following. + - "samsung,exynos3250-cmu" - controller compatible with Exynos3250 SoC. + +- reg: physical base address of the controller and length of memory mapped + region. + +- #clock-cells: should be 1. + +Each clock is assigned an identifier and client nodes can use this identifier +to specify the clock which they consume. + +All available clocks are defined as preprocessor macros in +dt-bindings/clock/exynos3250.h header and can be used in device +tree sources. + +Example 1: An example of a clock controller node is listed below. + + cmu: clock-controller@10030000 { + compatible = "samsung,exynos3250-cmu"; + reg = <0x10030000 0x20000>; + #clock-cells = <1>; + }; + +Example 2: UART controller node that consumes the clock generated by the clock + controller. Refer to the standard clock bindings for information + about 'clocks' and 'clock-names' property. + + serial@13800000 { + compatible = "samsung,exynos4210-uart"; + reg = <0x13800000 0x100>; + interrupts = <0 109 0>; + clocks = <&cmu CLK_UART0>, <&cmu CLK_SCLK_UART0>; + clock-names = "uart", "clk_uart_baud0"; + }; diff --git a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/clock/exynos5260-clock.txt b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/clock/exynos5260-clock.txt new file mode 100644 index 00000000000..5496b2fac48 --- /dev/null +++ b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/clock/exynos5260-clock.txt @@ -0,0 +1,190 @@ +* Samsung Exynos5260 Clock Controller + +Exynos5260 has 13 clock controllers which are instantiated +independently from the device-tree. These clock controllers +generate and supply clocks to various hardware blocks within +the SoC. + +Each clock is assigned an identifier and client nodes can use +this identifier to specify the clock which they consume. All +available clocks are defined as preprocessor macros in +dt-bindings/clock/exynos5260-clk.h header and can be used in +device tree sources. + +External clocks: + +There are several clocks that are generated outside the SoC. It +is expected that they are defined using standard clock bindings +with following clock-output-names: + + - "fin_pll" - PLL input clock from XXTI + - "xrtcxti" - input clock from XRTCXTI + - "ioclk_pcm_extclk" - pcm external operation clock + - "ioclk_spdif_extclk" - spdif external operation clock + - "ioclk_i2s_cdclk" - i2s0 codec clock + +Phy clocks: + +There are several clocks which are generated by specific PHYs. +These clocks are fed into the clock controller and then routed to +the hardware blocks. These clocks are defined as fixed clocks in the +driver with following names: + + - "phyclk_dptx_phy_ch3_txd_clk" - dp phy clock for channel 3 + - "phyclk_dptx_phy_ch2_txd_clk" - dp phy clock for channel 2 + - "phyclk_dptx_phy_ch1_txd_clk" - dp phy clock for channel 1 + - "phyclk_dptx_phy_ch0_txd_clk" - dp phy clock for channel 0 + - "phyclk_hdmi_phy_tmds_clko" - hdmi phy tmds clock + - "phyclk_hdmi_phy_pixel_clko" - hdmi phy pixel clock + - "phyclk_hdmi_link_o_tmds_clkhi" - hdmi phy for hdmi link + - "phyclk_dptx_phy_o_ref_clk_24m" - dp phy reference clock + - "phyclk_dptx_phy_clk_div2" + - "phyclk_mipi_dphy_4l_m_rxclkesc0" + - "phyclk_usbhost20_phy_phyclock" - usb 2.0 phy clock + - "phyclk_usbhost20_phy_freeclk" + - "phyclk_usbhost20_phy_clk48mohci" + - "phyclk_usbdrd30_udrd30_pipe_pclk" + - "phyclk_usbdrd30_udrd30_phyclock" - usb 3.0 phy clock + +Required Properties for Clock Controller: + + - compatible: should be one of the following. + 1) "samsung,exynos5260-clock-top" + 2) "samsung,exynos5260-clock-peri" + 3) "samsung,exynos5260-clock-egl" + 4) "samsung,exynos5260-clock-kfc" + 5) "samsung,exynos5260-clock-g2d" + 6) "samsung,exynos5260-clock-mif" + 7) "samsung,exynos5260-clock-mfc" + 8) "samsung,exynos5260-clock-g3d" + 9) "samsung,exynos5260-clock-fsys" + 10) "samsung,exynos5260-clock-aud" + 11) "samsung,exynos5260-clock-isp" + 12) "samsung,exynos5260-clock-gscl" + 13) "samsung,exynos5260-clock-disp" + + - reg: physical base address of the controller and the length of + memory mapped region. + + - #clock-cells: should be 1. + + - clocks: list of clock identifiers which are fed as the input to + the given clock controller. Please refer the next section to find + the input clocks for a given controller. + + - clock-names: list of names of clocks which are fed as the input + to the given clock controller. + +Input clocks for top clock controller: + - fin_pll + - dout_mem_pll + - dout_bus_pll + - dout_media_pll + +Input clocks for peri clock controller: + - fin_pll + - ioclk_pcm_extclk + - ioclk_i2s_cdclk + - ioclk_spdif_extclk + - phyclk_hdmi_phy_ref_cko + - dout_aclk_peri_66 + - dout_sclk_peri_uart0 + - dout_sclk_peri_uart1 + - dout_sclk_peri_uart2 + - dout_sclk_peri_spi0_b + - dout_sclk_peri_spi1_b + - dout_sclk_peri_spi2_b + - dout_aclk_peri_aud + - dout_sclk_peri_spi0_b + +Input clocks for egl clock controller: + - fin_pll + - dout_bus_pll + +Input clocks for kfc clock controller: + - fin_pll + - dout_media_pll + +Input clocks for g2d clock controller: + - fin_pll + - dout_aclk_g2d_333 + +Input clocks for mif clock controller: + - fin_pll + +Input clocks for mfc clock controller: + - fin_pll + - dout_aclk_mfc_333 + +Input clocks for g3d clock controller: + - fin_pll + +Input clocks for fsys clock controller: + - fin_pll + - phyclk_usbhost20_phy_phyclock + - phyclk_usbhost20_phy_freeclk + - phyclk_usbhost20_phy_clk48mohci + - phyclk_usbdrd30_udrd30_pipe_pclk + - phyclk_usbdrd30_udrd30_phyclock + - dout_aclk_fsys_200 + +Input clocks for aud clock controller: + - fin_pll + - fout_aud_pll + - ioclk_i2s_cdclk + - ioclk_pcm_extclk + +Input clocks for isp clock controller: + - fin_pll + - dout_aclk_isp1_266 + - dout_aclk_isp1_400 + - mout_aclk_isp1_266 + +Input clocks for gscl clock controller: + - fin_pll + - dout_aclk_gscl_400 + - dout_aclk_gscl_333 + +Input clocks for disp clock controller: + - fin_pll + - phyclk_dptx_phy_ch3_txd_clk + - phyclk_dptx_phy_ch2_txd_clk + - phyclk_dptx_phy_ch1_txd_clk + - phyclk_dptx_phy_ch0_txd_clk + - phyclk_hdmi_phy_tmds_clko + - phyclk_hdmi_phy_ref_clko + - phyclk_hdmi_phy_pixel_clko + - phyclk_hdmi_link_o_tmds_clkhi + - phyclk_mipi_dphy_4l_m_txbyte_clkhs + - phyclk_dptx_phy_o_ref_clk_24m + - phyclk_dptx_phy_clk_div2 + - phyclk_mipi_dphy_4l_m_rxclkesc0 + - phyclk_hdmi_phy_ref_cko + - ioclk_spdif_extclk + - dout_aclk_peri_aud + - dout_aclk_disp_222 + - dout_sclk_disp_pixel + - dout_aclk_disp_333 + +Example 1: An example of a clock controller node is listed below. + + clock_mfc: clock-controller@11090000 { + compatible = "samsung,exynos5260-clock-mfc"; + clock = <&fin_pll>, <&clock_top TOP_DOUT_ACLK_MFC_333>; + clock-names = "fin_pll", "dout_aclk_mfc_333"; + reg = <0x11090000 0x10000>; + #clock-cells = <1>; + }; + +Example 2: UART controller node that consumes the clock generated by the + peri clock controller. Refer to the standard clock bindings for + information about 'clocks' and 'clock-names' property. + + serial@12C00000 { + compatible = "samsung,exynos4210-uart"; + reg = <0x12C00000 0x100>; + interrupts = <0 146 0>; + clocks = <&clock_peri PERI_PCLK_UART0>, <&clock_peri PERI_SCLK_UART0>; + clock-names = "uart", "clk_uart_baud0"; + }; + diff --git a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/clock/exynos5410-clock.txt b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/clock/exynos5410-clock.txt new file mode 100644 index 00000000000..aeab635b07b --- /dev/null +++ b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/clock/exynos5410-clock.txt @@ -0,0 +1,45 @@ +* Samsung Exynos5410 Clock Controller + +The Exynos5410 clock controller generates and supplies clock to various +controllers within the Exynos5410 SoC. + +Required Properties: + +- compatible: should be "samsung,exynos5410-clock" + +- reg: physical base address of the controller and length of memory mapped + region. + +- #clock-cells: should be 1. + +All available clocks are defined as preprocessor macros in +dt-bindings/clock/exynos5410.h header and can be used in device +tree sources. + +External clock: + +There is clock that is generated outside the SoC. It +is expected that it is defined using standard clock bindings +with following clock-output-name: + + - "fin_pll" - PLL input clock from XXTI + +Example 1: An example of a clock controller node is listed below. + + clock: clock-controller@0x10010000 { + compatible = "samsung,exynos5410-clock"; + reg = <0x10010000 0x30000>; + #clock-cells = <1>; + }; + +Example 2: UART controller node that consumes the clock generated by the clock + controller. Refer to the standard clock bindings for information + about 'clocks' and 'clock-names' property. + + serial@12C20000 { + compatible = "samsung,exynos4210-uart"; + reg = <0x12C00000 0x100>; + interrupts = <0 51 0>; + clocks = <&clock CLK_UART0>, <&clock CLK_SCLK_UART0>; + clock-names = "uart", "clk_uart_baud0"; + }; diff --git a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/clock/exynos5420-clock.txt b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/clock/exynos5420-clock.txt index ca88c97a856..d54f42cf044 100644 --- a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/clock/exynos5420-clock.txt +++ b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/clock/exynos5420-clock.txt @@ -1,12 +1,13 @@ * Samsung Exynos5420 Clock Controller The Exynos5420 clock controller generates and supplies clock to various -controllers within the Exynos5420 SoC. +controllers within the Exynos5420 SoC and for the Exynos5800 SoC. Required Properties: - compatible: should be one of the following. - "samsung,exynos5420-clock" - controller compatible with Exynos5420 SoC. + - "samsung,exynos5800-clock" - controller compatible with Exynos5800 SoC. - reg: physical base address of the controller and length of memory mapped region. diff --git a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/clock/imx25-clock.txt b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/clock/imx25-clock.txt index db4f2f05c4d..ba6b312ff8a 100644 --- a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/clock/imx25-clock.txt +++ b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/clock/imx25-clock.txt @@ -139,6 +139,9 @@ clocks and IDs. uart5_ipg 124 reserved 125 wdt_ipg 126 + cko_div 127 + cko_sel 128 + cko 129 Examples: diff --git a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/clock/imx27-clock.txt b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/clock/imx27-clock.txt index 7a207039373..6bc9fd2c663 100644 --- a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/clock/imx27-clock.txt +++ b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/clock/imx27-clock.txt @@ -98,7 +98,12 @@ clocks and IDs. fpm 83 mpll_osc_sel 84 mpll_sel 85 - spll_gate 86 + spll_gate 86 + mshc_div 87 + rtic_ipg_gate 88 + mshc_ipg_gate 89 + rtic_ahb_gate 90 + mshc_baud_gate 91 Examples: diff --git a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/clock/imx6q-clock.txt b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/clock/imx6q-clock.txt index 6aab72bf67e..90ec91fe5ce 100644 --- a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/clock/imx6q-clock.txt +++ b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/clock/imx6q-clock.txt @@ -220,6 +220,7 @@ clocks and IDs. lvds2_sel 205 lvds1_gate 206 lvds2_gate 207 + esai_ahb 208 Examples: diff --git a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/clock/imx6sx-clock.txt b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/clock/imx6sx-clock.txt new file mode 100644 index 00000000000..22362b9b7ba --- /dev/null +++ b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/clock/imx6sx-clock.txt @@ -0,0 +1,13 @@ +* Clock bindings for Freescale i.MX6 SoloX + +Required properties: +- compatible: Should be "fsl,imx6sx-ccm" +- reg: Address and length of the register set +- #clock-cells: Should be <1> +- clocks: list of clock specifiers, must contain an entry for each required + entry in clock-names +- clock-names: should include entries "ckil", "osc", "ipp_di0" and "ipp_di1" + +The clock consumer should specify the desired clock by having the clock +ID in its "clocks" phandle cell. See include/dt-bindings/clock/imx6sx-clock.h +for the full list of i.MX6 SoloX clock IDs. diff --git a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/clock/renesas,cpg-mstp-clocks.txt b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/clock/renesas,cpg-mstp-clocks.txt index 02a25d99ca6..6c3c0847e4f 100644 --- a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/clock/renesas,cpg-mstp-clocks.txt +++ b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/clock/renesas,cpg-mstp-clocks.txt @@ -10,6 +10,7 @@ index in the group, from 0 to 31. Required Properties: - compatible: Must be one of the following + - "renesas,r7s72100-mstp-clocks" for R7S72100 (RZ) MSTP gate clocks - "renesas,r8a7790-mstp-clocks" for R8A7790 (R-Car H2) MSTP gate clocks - "renesas,r8a7791-mstp-clocks" for R8A7791 (R-Car M2) MSTP gate clocks - "renesas,cpg-mstp-clock" for generic MSTP gate clocks diff --git a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/clock/samsung,s3c2410-clock.txt b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/clock/samsung,s3c2410-clock.txt new file mode 100644 index 00000000000..822505e715a --- /dev/null +++ b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/clock/samsung,s3c2410-clock.txt @@ -0,0 +1,50 @@ +* Samsung S3C2410 Clock Controller + +The S3C2410 clock controller generates and supplies clock to various controllers +within the SoC. The clock binding described here is applicable to the s3c2410, +s3c2440 and s3c2442 SoCs in the s3c24x family. + +Required Properties: + +- compatible: should be one of the following. + - "samsung,s3c2410-clock" - controller compatible with S3C2410 SoC. + - "samsung,s3c2440-clock" - controller compatible with S3C2440 SoC. + - "samsung,s3c2442-clock" - controller compatible with S3C2442 SoC. +- reg: physical base address of the controller and length of memory mapped + region. +- #clock-cells: should be 1. + +Each clock is assigned an identifier and client nodes can use this identifier +to specify the clock which they consume. Some of the clocks are available only +on a particular SoC. + +All available clocks are defined as preprocessor macros in +dt-bindings/clock/s3c2410.h header and can be used in device +tree sources. + +External clocks: + +The xti clock used as input for the plls is generated outside the SoC. It is +expected that is are defined using standard clock bindings with a +clock-output-names value of "xti". + +Example: Clock controller node: + + clocks: clock-controller@4c000000 { + compatible = "samsung,s3c2410-clock"; + reg = <0x4c000000 0x20>; + #clock-cells = <1>; + }; + +Example: UART controller node that consumes the clock generated by the clock + controller (refer to the standard clock bindings for information about + "clocks" and "clock-names" properties): + + serial@50004000 { + compatible = "samsung,s3c2440-uart"; + reg = <0x50004000 0x4000>; + interrupts = <1 23 3 4>, <1 23 4 4>; + clock-names = "uart", "clk_uart_baud2"; + clocks = <&clocks PCLK_UART0>, <&clocks PCLK_UART0>; + status = "disabled"; + }; diff --git a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/clock/samsung,s3c2412-clock.txt b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/clock/samsung,s3c2412-clock.txt new file mode 100644 index 00000000000..2b430960ba4 --- /dev/null +++ b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/clock/samsung,s3c2412-clock.txt @@ -0,0 +1,50 @@ +* Samsung S3C2412 Clock Controller + +The S3C2412 clock controller generates and supplies clock to various controllers +within the SoC. The clock binding described here is applicable to the s3c2412 +and s3c2413 SoCs in the s3c24x family. + +Required Properties: + +- compatible: should be "samsung,s3c2412-clock" +- reg: physical base address of the controller and length of memory mapped + region. +- #clock-cells: should be 1. + +Each clock is assigned an identifier and client nodes can use this identifier +to specify the clock which they consume. Some of the clocks are available only +on a particular SoC. + +All available clocks are defined as preprocessor macros in +dt-bindings/clock/s3c2412.h header and can be used in device +tree sources. + +External clocks: + +There are several clocks that are generated outside the SoC. It is expected +that they are defined using standard clock bindings with following +clock-output-names: + - "xti" - crystal input - required, + - "ext" - external clock source - optional, + +Example: Clock controller node: + + clocks: clock-controller@4c000000 { + compatible = "samsung,s3c2412-clock"; + reg = <0x4c000000 0x20>; + #clock-cells = <1>; + }; + +Example: UART controller node that consumes the clock generated by the clock + controller (refer to the standard clock bindings for information about + "clocks" and "clock-names" properties): + + serial@50004000 { + compatible = "samsung,s3c2412-uart"; + reg = <0x50004000 0x4000>; + interrupts = <1 23 3 4>, <1 23 4 4>; + clock-names = "uart", "clk_uart_baud2", "clk_uart_baud3"; + clocks = <&clocks PCLK_UART0>, <&clocks PCLK_UART0>, + <&clocks SCLK_UART>; + status = "disabled"; + }; diff --git a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/clock/samsung,s3c2443-clock.txt b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/clock/samsung,s3c2443-clock.txt new file mode 100644 index 00000000000..e67bb05478a --- /dev/null +++ b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/clock/samsung,s3c2443-clock.txt @@ -0,0 +1,56 @@ +* Samsung S3C2443 Clock Controller + +The S3C2443 clock controller generates and supplies clock to various controllers +within the SoC. The clock binding described here is applicable to all SoCs in +the s3c24x family starting with the s3c2443. + +Required Properties: + +- compatible: should be one of the following. + - "samsung,s3c2416-clock" - controller compatible with S3C2416 SoC. + - "samsung,s3c2443-clock" - controller compatible with S3C2443 SoC. + - "samsung,s3c2450-clock" - controller compatible with S3C2450 SoC. +- reg: physical base address of the controller and length of memory mapped + region. +- #clock-cells: should be 1. + +Each clock is assigned an identifier and client nodes can use this identifier +to specify the clock which they consume. Some of the clocks are available only +on a particular SoC. + +All available clocks are defined as preprocessor macros in +dt-bindings/clock/s3c2443.h header and can be used in device +tree sources. + +External clocks: + +There are several clocks that are generated outside the SoC. It is expected +that they are defined using standard clock bindings with following +clock-output-names: + - "xti" - crystal input - required, + - "ext" - external clock source - optional, + - "ext_i2s" - external I2S clock - optional, + - "ext_uart" - external uart clock - optional, + +Example: Clock controller node: + + clocks: clock-controller@4c000000 { + compatible = "samsung,s3c2416-clock"; + reg = <0x4c000000 0x40>; + #clock-cells = <1>; + }; + +Example: UART controller node that consumes the clock generated by the clock + controller (refer to the standard clock bindings for information about + "clocks" and "clock-names" properties): + + serial@50004000 { + compatible = "samsung,s3c2440-uart"; + reg = <0x50004000 0x4000>; + interrupts = <1 23 3 4>, <1 23 4 4>; + clock-names = "uart", "clk_uart_baud2", + "clk_uart_baud3"; + clocks = <&clocks PCLK_UART0>, <&clocks PCLK_UART0>, + <&clocks SCLK_UART>; + status = "disabled"; + }; diff --git a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/clock/ti-keystone-pllctrl.txt b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/clock/ti-keystone-pllctrl.txt new file mode 100644 index 00000000000..3e6a81e9980 --- /dev/null +++ b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/clock/ti-keystone-pllctrl.txt @@ -0,0 +1,20 @@ +* Device tree bindings for Texas Instruments keystone pll controller + +The main pll controller used to drive theC66x CorePacs, the switch fabric, +and a majority of the peripheral clocks (all but the ARM CorePacs, DDR3 and +the NETCP modules) requires a PLL Controller to manage the various clock +divisions, gating, and synchronization. + +Required properties: + +- compatible: "ti,keystone-pllctrl", "syscon" + +- reg: contains offset/length value for pll controller + registers space. + +Example: + +pllctrl: pll-controller@0x02310000 { + compatible = "ti,keystone-pllctrl", "syscon"; + reg = <0x02310000 0x200>; +}; diff --git a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/dma/dma.txt b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/dma/dma.txt index 8f504e6bae1..82104271e75 100644 --- a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/dma/dma.txt +++ b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/dma/dma.txt @@ -14,7 +14,7 @@ Required property: Optional properties: - dma-channels: Number of DMA channels supported by the controller. -- dma-requests: Number of DMA requests signals supported by the +- dma-requests: Number of DMA request signals supported by the controller. Example: @@ -44,7 +44,7 @@ Required property: #dma-cells property in the node referenced by phandle containing DMA controller specific information. This typically contains a DMA request line number or a - channel number, but can contain any data that is used + channel number, but can contain any data that is required for configuring a channel. - dma-names: Contains one identifier string for each DMA specifier in the dmas property. The specific strings that can be used diff --git a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/dma/fsl-imx-sdma.txt b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/dma/fsl-imx-sdma.txt index ee9be996152..e577196a12c 100644 --- a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/dma/fsl-imx-sdma.txt +++ b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/dma/fsl-imx-sdma.txt @@ -8,7 +8,7 @@ Required properties: "fsl,imx51-sdma" "fsl,imx53-sdma" "fsl,imx6q-sdma" - The -to variants should be preferred since they allow to determnine the + The -to variants should be preferred since they allow to determine the correct ROM script addresses needed for the driver to work without additional firmware. - reg : Should contain SDMA registers location and length diff --git a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/dma/ti-edma.txt b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/dma/ti-edma.txt index 68ff2137bae..5ba525a1003 100644 --- a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/dma/ti-edma.txt +++ b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/dma/ti-edma.txt @@ -2,11 +2,8 @@ TI EDMA Required properties: - compatible : "ti,edma3" -- ti,edma-regions: Number of regions -- ti,edma-slots: Number of slots - #dma-cells: Should be set to <1> Clients should use a single channel number per DMA request. -- dma-channels: Specify total DMA channels per CC - reg: Memory map for accessing module - interrupt-parent: Interrupt controller the interrupt is routed through - interrupts: Exactly 3 interrupts need to be specified in the order: @@ -17,6 +14,13 @@ Optional properties: - ti,hwmods: Name of the hwmods associated to the EDMA - ti,edma-xbar-event-map: Crossbar event to channel map +Deprecated properties: +Listed here in case one wants to boot an old kernel with new DTB. These +properties might need to be added to the new DTS files. +- ti,edma-regions: Number of regions +- ti,edma-slots: Number of slots +- dma-channels: Specify total DMA channels per CC + Example: edma: edma@49000000 { @@ -26,9 +30,6 @@ edma: edma@49000000 { compatible = "ti,edma3"; ti,hwmods = "tpcc", "tptc0", "tptc1", "tptc2"; #dma-cells = <1>; - dma-channels = <64>; - ti,edma-regions = <4>; - ti,edma-slots = <256>; ti,edma-xbar-event-map = /bits/ 16 <1 12 2 13>; }; diff --git a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/gpio/gpio-mcp23s08.txt b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/gpio/gpio-mcp23s08.txt index 3ddc7ccfe5f..c306a2d0f2b 100644 --- a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/gpio/gpio-mcp23s08.txt +++ b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/gpio/gpio-mcp23s08.txt @@ -54,7 +54,7 @@ Optional device specific properties: IO 8-15 are bank 2. These chips have two different interrupt outputs: One for bank 1 and another for bank 2. If irq-mirror is set, both interrupts are generated regardless of the bank that an input change - occured on. If it is not set, the interrupt are only generated for the + occurred on. If it is not set, the interrupt are only generated for the bank they belong to. On devices with only one interrupt output this property is useless. diff --git a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/gpio/renesas,gpio-rcar.txt b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/gpio/renesas,gpio-rcar.txt index f61cef74a21..941a26aa432 100644 --- a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/gpio/renesas,gpio-rcar.txt +++ b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/gpio/renesas,gpio-rcar.txt @@ -21,6 +21,12 @@ Required Properties: GPIO_ACTIVE_HIGH and GPIO_ACTIVE_LOW flags are supported. - gpio-ranges: Range of pins managed by the GPIO controller. +Optional properties: + + - clocks: Must contain a reference to the functional clock. The property is + mandatory if the hardware implements a controllable functional clock for + the GPIO instance. + Please refer to gpio.txt in this directory for details of gpio-ranges property and the common GPIO bindings used by client devices. diff --git a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/hsi/client-devices.txt b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/hsi/client-devices.txt new file mode 100644 index 00000000000..104c9a3e57a --- /dev/null +++ b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/hsi/client-devices.txt @@ -0,0 +1,44 @@ +Each HSI port is supposed to have one child node, which +symbols the remote device connected to the HSI port. The +following properties are standardized for HSI clients: + +Required HSI configuration properties: + +- hsi-channel-ids: A list of channel ids + +- hsi-rx-mode: Receiver Bit transmission mode ("stream" or "frame") +- hsi-tx-mode: Transmitter Bit transmission mode ("stream" or "frame") +- hsi-mode: May be used instead hsi-rx-mode and hsi-tx-mode if + the transmission mode is the same for receiver and + transmitter +- hsi-speed-kbps: Max bit transmission speed in kbit/s +- hsi-flow: RX flow type ("synchronized" or "pipeline") +- hsi-arb-mode: Arbitration mode for TX frame ("round-robin", "priority") + +Optional HSI configuration properties: + +- hsi-channel-names: A list with one name per channel specified in the + hsi-channel-ids property + + +Device Tree node example for an HSI client: + +hsi-controller { + hsi-port { + modem: hsi-client { + compatible = "nokia,n900-modem"; + + hsi-channel-ids = <0>, <1>, <2>, <3>; + hsi-channel-names = "mcsaab-control", + "speech-control", + "speech-data", + "mcsaab-data"; + hsi-speed-kbps = <55000>; + hsi-mode = "frame"; + hsi-flow = "synchronized"; + hsi-arb-mode = "round-robin"; + + /* more client specific properties */ + }; + }; +}; diff --git a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/hsi/nokia-modem.txt b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/hsi/nokia-modem.txt new file mode 100644 index 00000000000..8a979780452 --- /dev/null +++ b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/hsi/nokia-modem.txt @@ -0,0 +1,57 @@ +Nokia modem client bindings + +The Nokia modem HSI client follows the common HSI client binding +and inherits all required properties. The following additional +properties are needed by the Nokia modem HSI client: + +Required properties: +- compatible: Should be one of + "nokia,n900-modem" +- hsi-channel-names: Should contain the following strings + "mcsaab-control" + "speech-control" + "speech-data" + "mcsaab-data" +- gpios: Should provide a GPIO handler for each GPIO listed in + gpio-names +- gpio-names: Should contain the following strings + "cmt_apeslpx" + "cmt_rst_rq" + "cmt_en" + "cmt_rst" + "cmt_bsi" +- interrupts: Should be IRQ handle for modem's reset indication + +Example: + +&ssi_port { + modem: hsi-client { + compatible = "nokia,n900-modem"; + + pinctrl-names = "default"; + pinctrl-0 = <&modem_pins>; + + hsi-channel-ids = <0>, <1>, <2>, <3>; + hsi-channel-names = "mcsaab-control", + "speech-control", + "speech-data", + "mcsaab-data"; + hsi-speed-kbps = <55000>; + hsi-mode = "frame"; + hsi-flow = "synchronized"; + hsi-arb-mode = "round-robin"; + + interrupts-extended = <&gpio3 8 IRQ_TYPE_EDGE_FALLING>; /* 72 */ + + gpios = <&gpio3 6 GPIO_ACTIVE_HIGH>, /* 70 */ + <&gpio3 9 GPIO_ACTIVE_HIGH>, /* 73 */ + <&gpio3 10 GPIO_ACTIVE_HIGH>, /* 74 */ + <&gpio3 11 GPIO_ACTIVE_HIGH>, /* 75 */ + <&gpio5 29 GPIO_ACTIVE_HIGH>; /* 157 */ + gpio-names = "cmt_apeslpx", + "cmt_rst_rq", + "cmt_en", + "cmt_rst", + "cmt_bsi"; + }; +}; diff --git a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/hsi/omap-ssi.txt b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/hsi/omap-ssi.txt new file mode 100644 index 00000000000..f26625e4269 --- /dev/null +++ b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/hsi/omap-ssi.txt @@ -0,0 +1,97 @@ +OMAP SSI controller bindings + +OMAP Synchronous Serial Interface (SSI) controller implements a legacy +variant of MIPI's High Speed Synchronous Serial Interface (HSI). + +Required properties: +- compatible: Should include "ti,omap3-ssi". +- reg-names: Contains the values "sys" and "gdd" (in this order). +- reg: Contains a matching register specifier for each entry + in reg-names. +- interrupt-names: Contains the value "gdd_mpu". +- interrupts: Contains matching interrupt information for each entry + in interrupt-names. +- ranges: Represents the bus address mapping between the main + controller node and the child nodes below. +- clock-names: Must include the following entries: + "ssi_ssr_fck": The OMAP clock of that name + "ssi_sst_fck": The OMAP clock of that name + "ssi_ick": The OMAP clock of that name +- clocks: Contains a matching clock specifier for each entry in + clock-names. +- #address-cells: Should be set to <1> +- #size-cells: Should be set to <1> + +Each port is represented as a sub-node of the ti,omap3-ssi device. + +Required Port sub-node properties: +- compatible: Should be set to the following value + ti,omap3-ssi-port (applicable to OMAP34xx devices) +- reg-names: Contains the values "tx" and "rx" (in this order). +- reg: Contains a matching register specifier for each entry + in reg-names. +- interrupt-parent Should be a phandle for the interrupt controller +- interrupts: Should contain interrupt specifiers for mpu interrupts + 0 and 1 (in this order). +- ti,ssi-cawake-gpio: Defines which GPIO pin is used to signify CAWAKE + events for the port. This is an optional board-specific + property. If it's missing the port will not be + enabled. + +Example for Nokia N900: + +ssi-controller@48058000 { + compatible = "ti,omap3-ssi"; + + /* needed until hwmod is updated to use the compatible string */ + ti,hwmods = "ssi"; + + reg = <0x48058000 0x1000>, + <0x48059000 0x1000>; + reg-names = "sys", + "gdd"; + + interrupts = <55>; + interrupt-names = "gdd_mpu"; + + clocks = <&ssi_ssr_fck>, + <&ssi_sst_fck>, + <&ssi_ick>; + clock-names = "ssi_ssr_fck", + "ssi_sst_fck", + "ssi_ick"; + + #address-cells = <1>; + #size-cells = <1>; + ranges; + + ssi-port@4805a000 { + compatible = "ti,omap3-ssi-port"; + + reg = <0x4805a000 0x800>, + <0x4805a800 0x800>; + reg-names = "tx", + "rx"; + + interrupt-parent = <&intc>; + interrupts = <67>, + <68>; + + ti,ssi-cawake-gpio = <&gpio5 23 GPIO_ACTIVE_HIGH>; /* 151 */ + } + + ssi-port@4805a000 { + compatible = "ti,omap3-ssi-port"; + + reg = <0x4805b000 0x800>, + <0x4805b800 0x800>; + reg-names = "tx", + "rx"; + + interrupt-parent = <&intc>; + interrupts = <69>, + <70>; + + status = "disabled"; /* second port is not used on N900 */ + } +} diff --git a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/iio/proximity/as3935.txt b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/iio/proximity/as3935.txt new file mode 100644 index 00000000000..ae23dd8da73 --- /dev/null +++ b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/iio/proximity/as3935.txt @@ -0,0 +1,28 @@ +Austrian Microsystems AS3935 Franklin lightning sensor device driver + +Required properties: + - compatible: must be "ams,as3935" + - reg: SPI chip select number for the device + - spi-cpha: SPI Mode 1. Refer to spi/spi-bus.txt for generic SPI + slave node bindings. + - interrupt-parent : should be the phandle for the interrupt controller + - interrupts : the sole interrupt generated by the device + + Refer to interrupt-controller/interrupts.txt for generic + interrupt client node bindings. + +Optional properties: + - ams,tuning-capacitor-pf: Calibration tuning capacitor stepping + value 0 - 120pF. This will require using the calibration data from + the manufacturer. + +Example: + +as3935@0 { + compatible = "ams,as3935"; + reg = <0>; + spi-cpha; + interrupt-parent = <&gpio1>; + interrupts = <16 1>; + ams,tuning-capacitor-pf = <80>; +}; diff --git a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/interrupt-controller/brcm,l2-intc.txt b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/interrupt-controller/brcm,l2-intc.txt new file mode 100644 index 00000000000..448273a30a1 --- /dev/null +++ b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/interrupt-controller/brcm,l2-intc.txt @@ -0,0 +1,29 @@ +Broadcom Generic Level 2 Interrupt Controller + +Required properties: + +- compatible: should be "brcm,l2-intc" +- reg: specifies the base physical address and size of the registers +- interrupt-controller: identifies the node as an interrupt controller +- #interrupt-cells: specifies the number of cells needed to encode an + interrupt source. Should be 1. +- interrupt-parent: specifies the phandle to the parent interrupt controller + this controller is cacaded from +- interrupts: specifies the interrupt line in the interrupt-parent irq space + to be used for cascading + +Optional properties: + +- brcm,irq-can-wake: If present, this means the L2 controller can be used as a + wakeup source for system suspend/resume. + +Example: + +hif_intr2_intc: interrupt-controller@f0441000 { + compatible = "brcm,l2-intc"; + reg = <0xf0441000 0x30>; + interrupt-controller; + #interrupt-cells = <1>; + interrupt-parent = <&intc>; + interrupts = <0x0 0x20 0x0>; +}; diff --git a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/arm/armada-370-xp-mpic.txt b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/interrupt-controller/marvell,armada-370-xp-mpic.txt index 5fc03134a99..5fc03134a99 100644 --- a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/arm/armada-370-xp-mpic.txt +++ b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/interrupt-controller/marvell,armada-370-xp-mpic.txt diff --git a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/iommu/samsung,sysmmu.txt b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/iommu/samsung,sysmmu.txt new file mode 100644 index 00000000000..6fa4c737af2 --- /dev/null +++ b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/iommu/samsung,sysmmu.txt @@ -0,0 +1,70 @@ +Samsung Exynos IOMMU H/W, System MMU (System Memory Management Unit) + +Samsung's Exynos architecture contains System MMUs that enables scattered +physical memory chunks visible as a contiguous region to DMA-capable peripheral +devices like MFC, FIMC, FIMD, GScaler, FIMC-IS and so forth. + +System MMU is an IOMMU and supports identical translation table format to +ARMv7 translation tables with minimum set of page properties including access +permissions, shareability and security protection. In addition, System MMU has +another capabilities like L2 TLB or block-fetch buffers to minimize translation +latency. + +System MMUs are in many to one relation with peripheral devices, i.e. single +peripheral device might have multiple System MMUs (usually one for each bus +master), but one System MMU can handle transactions from only one peripheral +device. The relation between a System MMU and the peripheral device needs to be +defined in device node of the peripheral device. + +MFC in all Exynos SoCs and FIMD, M2M Scalers and G2D in Exynos5420 has 2 System +MMUs. +* MFC has one System MMU on its left and right bus. +* FIMD in Exynos5420 has one System MMU for window 0 and 4, the other system MMU + for window 1, 2 and 3. +* M2M Scalers and G2D in Exynos5420 has one System MMU on the read channel and + the other System MMU on the write channel. +The drivers must consider how to handle those System MMUs. One of the idea is +to implement child devices or sub-devices which are the client devices of the +System MMU. + +Note: +The current DT binding for the Exynos System MMU is incomplete. +The following properties can be removed or changed, if found incompatible with +the "Generic IOMMU Binding" support for attaching devices to the IOMMU. + +Required properties: +- compatible: Should be "samsung,exynos-sysmmu" +- reg: A tuple of base address and size of System MMU registers. +- interrupt-parent: The phandle of the interrupt controller of System MMU +- interrupts: An interrupt specifier for interrupt signal of System MMU, + according to the format defined by a particular interrupt + controller. +- clock-names: Should be "sysmmu" if the System MMU is needed to gate its clock. + Optional "master" if the clock to the System MMU is gated by + another gate clock other than "sysmmu". + Exynos4 SoCs, there needs no "master" clock. + Exynos5 SoCs, some System MMUs must have "master" clocks. +- clocks: Required if the System MMU is needed to gate its clock. +- samsung,power-domain: Required if the System MMU is needed to gate its power. + Please refer to the following document: + Documentation/devicetree/bindings/arm/exynos/power_domain.txt + +Examples: + gsc_0: gsc@13e00000 { + compatible = "samsung,exynos5-gsc"; + reg = <0x13e00000 0x1000>; + interrupts = <0 85 0>; + samsung,power-domain = <&pd_gsc>; + clocks = <&clock CLK_GSCL0>; + clock-names = "gscl"; + }; + + sysmmu_gsc0: sysmmu@13E80000 { + compatible = "samsung,exynos-sysmmu"; + reg = <0x13E80000 0x1000>; + interrupt-parent = <&combiner>; + interrupts = <2 0>; + clock-names = "sysmmu", "master"; + clocks = <&clock CLK_SMMU_GSCL0>, <&clock CLK_GSCL0>; + samsung,power-domain = <&pd_gsc>; + }; diff --git a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/media/renesas,vsp1.txt b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/media/renesas,vsp1.txt new file mode 100644 index 00000000000..87fe08abf36 --- /dev/null +++ b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/media/renesas,vsp1.txt @@ -0,0 +1,43 @@ +* Renesas VSP1 Video Processing Engine + +The VSP1 is a video processing engine that supports up-/down-scaling, alpha +blending, color space conversion and various other image processing features. +It can be found in the Renesas R-Car second generation SoCs. + +Required properties: + + - compatible: Must contain "renesas,vsp1" + + - reg: Base address and length of the registers block for the VSP1. + - interrupts: VSP1 interrupt specifier. + - clocks: A phandle + clock-specifier pair for the VSP1 functional clock. + + - renesas,#rpf: Number of Read Pixel Formatter (RPF) modules in the VSP1. + - renesas,#uds: Number of Up Down Scaler (UDS) modules in the VSP1. + - renesas,#wpf: Number of Write Pixel Formatter (WPF) modules in the VSP1. + + +Optional properties: + + - renesas,has-lif: Boolean, indicates that the LCD Interface (LIF) module is + available. + - renesas,has-lut: Boolean, indicates that the Look Up Table (LUT) module is + available. + - renesas,has-sru: Boolean, indicates that the Super Resolution Unit (SRU) + module is available. + + +Example: R8A7790 (R-Car H2) VSP1-S node + + vsp1@fe928000 { + compatible = "renesas,vsp1"; + reg = <0 0xfe928000 0 0x8000>; + interrupts = <0 267 IRQ_TYPE_LEVEL_HIGH>; + clocks = <&mstp1_clks R8A7790_CLK_VSP1_S>; + + renesas,has-lut; + renesas,has-sru; + renesas,#rpf = <5>; + renesas,#uds = <3>; + renesas,#wpf = <4>; + }; diff --git a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/memory-controllers/mvebu-devbus.txt b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/memory-controllers/mvebu-devbus.txt index 653c90c34a7..1ee3bc09f31 100644 --- a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/memory-controllers/mvebu-devbus.txt +++ b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/memory-controllers/mvebu-devbus.txt @@ -6,10 +6,11 @@ The actual devices are instantiated from the child nodes of a Device Bus node. Required properties: - - compatible: Currently only Armada 370/XP SoC are supported, - with this compatible string: + - compatible: Armada 370/XP SoC are supported using the + "marvell,mvebu-devbus" compatible string. - marvell,mvebu-devbus + Orion5x SoC are supported using the + "marvell,orion-devbus" compatible string. - reg: A resource specifier for the register space. This is the base address of a chip select within @@ -22,7 +23,14 @@ Required properties: integer values for each chip-select line in use: 0 <physical address of mapping> <size> -Mandatory timing properties for child nodes: +Optional properties: + + - devbus,keep-config This property can optionally be used to keep + using the timing parameters set by the + bootloader. It makes all the timing properties + described below unused. + +Timing properties for child nodes: Read parameters: @@ -30,21 +38,26 @@ Read parameters: drive the AD bus after the completion of a device read. This prevents contentions on the Device Bus after a read cycle from a slow device. + Mandatory, except if devbus,keep-config is used. - - devbus,bus-width: Defines the bus width (e.g. <16>) + - devbus,bus-width: Defines the bus width, in bits (e.g. <16>). + Mandatory, except if devbus,keep-config is used. - devbus,badr-skew-ps: Defines the time delay from from A[2:0] toggle, to read data sample. This parameter is useful for synchronous pipelined devices, where the address precedes the read data by one or two cycles. + Mandatory, except if devbus,keep-config is used. - devbus,acc-first-ps: Defines the time delay from the negation of ALE[0] to the cycle that the first read data is sampled by the controller. + Mandatory, except if devbus,keep-config is used. - devbus,acc-next-ps: Defines the time delay between the cycle that samples data N and the cycle that samples data N+1 (in burst accesses). + Mandatory, except if devbus,keep-config is used. - devbus,rd-setup-ps: Defines the time delay between DEV_CSn assertion to DEV_OEn assertion. If set to 0 (default), @@ -52,6 +65,8 @@ Read parameters: This parameter has no affect on <acc-first-ps> parameter (no affect on first data sample). Set <rd-setup-ps> to a value smaller than <acc-first-ps>. + Mandatory for "marvell,mvebu-devbus" compatible string, + except if devbus,keep-config is used. - devbus,rd-hold-ps: Defines the time between the last data sample to the de-assertion of DEV_CSn. If set to 0 (default), @@ -62,16 +77,20 @@ Read parameters: last data sampled. Also this parameter has no affect on <turn-off-ps> parameter. Set <rd-hold-ps> to a value smaller than <turn-off-ps>. + Mandatory for "marvell,mvebu-devbus" compatible string, + except if devbus,keep-config is used. Write parameters: - devbus,ale-wr-ps: Defines the time delay from the ALE[0] negation cycle to the DEV_WEn assertion. + Mandatory. - devbus,wr-low-ps: Defines the time during which DEV_WEn is active. A[2:0] and Data are kept valid as long as DEV_WEn is active. This parameter defines the setup time of address and data to DEV_WEn rise. + Mandatory. - devbus,wr-high-ps: Defines the time during which DEV_WEn is kept inactive (high) between data beats of a burst write. @@ -79,10 +98,13 @@ Write parameters: <wr-high-ps> - <tick> ps. This parameter defines the hold time of address and data after DEV_WEn rise. + Mandatory. - devbus,sync-enable: Synchronous device enable. 1: True 0: False + Mandatory for "marvell,mvebu-devbus" compatible string, + except if devbus,keep-config is used. An example for an Armada XP GP board, with a 16 MiB NOR device as child is showed below. Note that the Device Bus driver is in charge of allocating diff --git a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/mfd/bcm590xx.txt b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/mfd/bcm590xx.txt index 1fe30e2b10d..be51a15e05f 100644 --- a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/mfd/bcm590xx.txt +++ b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/mfd/bcm590xx.txt @@ -19,7 +19,9 @@ Optional child nodes: The valid regulator node names for BCM59056 are: rfldo, camldo1, camldo2, simldo1, simldo2, sdldo, sdxldo, mmcldo1, mmcldo2, audldo, micldo, usbldo, vibldo, - csr, iosr1, iosr2, msr, sdsr1, sdsr2, vsr + csr, iosr1, iosr2, msr, sdsr1, sdsr2, vsr, + gpldo1, gpldo2, gpldo3, gpldo4, gpldo5, gpldo6, + vbus Example: pmu: bcm59056@8 { diff --git a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/mfd/mc13xxx.txt b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/mfd/mc13xxx.txt index 1413f39912d..8aba48821a8 100644 --- a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/mfd/mc13xxx.txt +++ b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/mfd/mc13xxx.txt @@ -10,6 +10,9 @@ Optional properties: - fsl,mc13xxx-uses-touch : Indicate the touchscreen controller is being used Sub-nodes: +- codec: Contain the Audio Codec node. + - adc-port: Contain PMIC SSI port number used for ADC. + - dac-port: Contain PMIC SSI port number used for DAC. - leds : Contain the led nodes and initial register values in property "led-control". Number of register depends of used IC, for MC13783 is 6, for MC13892 is 4, for MC34708 is 1. See datasheet for bits definitions of diff --git a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/mfd/s2mps11.txt b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/mfd/s2mps11.txt index 802e839b082..d81ba30c0d8 100644 --- a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/mfd/s2mps11.txt +++ b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/mfd/s2mps11.txt @@ -56,6 +56,20 @@ for a particular group of BUCKs. So provide same regulator-ramp-delay<value>. Grouping of BUCKs sharing ramp rate setting is as follow : BUCK[1, 6], BUCK[3, 4], and BUCK[7, 8, 10] +On S2MPS14 the LDO10, LDO11 and LDO12 can be configured to external control +over GPIO. To turn this feature on this property must be added to the regulator +sub-node: + - samsung,ext-control-gpios: GPIO specifier for one GPIO + controlling this regulator (enable/disable); +Example: + LDO12 { + regulator-name = "V_EMMC_2.8V"; + regulator-min-microvolt = <2800000>; + regulator-max-microvolt = <2800000>; + samsung,ext-control-gpios = <&gpk0 2 0>; + }; + + The regulator constraints inside the regulator nodes use the standard regulator bindings which are documented elsewhere. diff --git a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/misc/arm-charlcd.txt b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/misc/arm-charlcd.txt new file mode 100644 index 00000000000..e28e2aac47f --- /dev/null +++ b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/misc/arm-charlcd.txt @@ -0,0 +1,18 @@ +ARM Versatile Character LCD +----------------------------------------------------- +This binding defines the character LCD interface found on ARM Versatile AB +and PB reference platforms. + +Required properties: +- compatible : "arm,versatile-clcd" +- reg : Location and size of character LCD registers + +Optional properties: +- interrupts - single interrupt for character LCD. The character LCD can + operate in polled mode without an interrupt. + +Example: + lcd@10008000 { + compatible = "arm,versatile-lcd"; + reg = <0x10008000 0x1000>; + }; diff --git a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/mmc/k3-dw-mshc.txt b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/mmc/k3-dw-mshc.txt index b8653ea9795..e5bc49f764d 100644 --- a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/mmc/k3-dw-mshc.txt +++ b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/mmc/k3-dw-mshc.txt @@ -12,7 +12,7 @@ extensions to the Synopsys Designware Mobile Storage Host Controller. Required Properties: * compatible: should be one of the following. - - "hisilicon,hi4511-dw-mshc": for controllers with hi4511 specific extentions. + - "hisilicon,hi4511-dw-mshc": for controllers with hi4511 specific extensions. Example: diff --git a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/mmc/mmci.txt b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/mmc/mmci.txt index 2b584cae352..03796cf2d3e 100644 --- a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/mmc/mmci.txt +++ b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/mmc/mmci.txt @@ -4,12 +4,58 @@ The ARM PrimeCell MMCI PL180 and PL181 provides an interface for reading and writing to MultiMedia and SD cards alike. This file documents differences between the core properties described -by mmc.txt and the properties used by the mmci driver. +by mmc.txt and the properties used by the mmci driver. Using "st" as +the prefix for a property, indicates support by the ST Micro variant. Required properties: - compatible : contains "arm,pl18x", "arm,primecell". -- arm,primecell-periphid : contains the PrimeCell Peripheral ID. +- vmmc-supply : phandle to the regulator device tree node, mentioned + as the VCC/VDD supply in the eMMC/SD specs. Optional properties: -- mmc-cap-mmc-highspeed : indicates whether MMC is high speed capable -- mmc-cap-sd-highspeed : indicates whether SD is high speed capable +- arm,primecell-periphid : contains the PrimeCell Peripheral ID, it overrides + the ID provided by the HW +- vqmmc-supply : phandle to the regulator device tree node, mentioned + as the VCCQ/VDD_IO supply in the eMMC/SD specs. +- st,sig-dir-dat0 : bus signal direction pin used for DAT[0]. +- st,sig-dir-dat2 : bus signal direction pin used for DAT[2]. +- st,sig-dir-dat31 : bus signal direction pin used for DAT[3] and DAT[1]. +- st,sig-dir-dat74 : bus signal direction pin used for DAT[4] to DAT[7]. +- st,sig-dir-cmd : cmd signal direction pin used for CMD. +- st,sig-pin-fbclk : feedback clock signal pin used. + +Deprecated properties: +- mmc-cap-mmc-highspeed : indicates whether MMC is high speed capable. +- mmc-cap-sd-highspeed : indicates whether SD is high speed capable. + +Example: + +sdi0_per1@80126000 { + compatible = "arm,pl18x", "arm,primecell"; + reg = <0x80126000 0x1000>; + interrupts = <0 60 IRQ_TYPE_LEVEL_HIGH>; + + dmas = <&dma 29 0 0x2>, /* Logical - DevToMem */ + <&dma 29 0 0x0>; /* Logical - MemToDev */ + dma-names = "rx", "tx"; + + clocks = <&prcc_kclk 1 5>, <&prcc_pclk 1 5>; + clock-names = "sdi", "apb_pclk"; + + max-frequency = <100000000>; + bus-width = <4>; + cap-sd-highspeed; + cap-mmc-highspeed; + cd-gpios = <&gpio2 31 0x4>; // 95 + st,sig-dir-dat0; + st,sig-dir-dat2; + st,sig-dir-cmd; + st,sig-pin-fbclk; + + vmmc-supply = <&ab8500_ldo_aux3_reg>; + vqmmc-supply = <&vmmci>; + + pinctrl-names = "default", "sleep"; + pinctrl-0 = <&sdi0_default_mode>; + pinctrl-1 = <&sdi0_sleep_mode>; +}; diff --git a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/mmc/samsung-sdhci.txt b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/mmc/samsung-sdhci.txt index 328e990d254..42e0a9afa10 100644 --- a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/mmc/samsung-sdhci.txt +++ b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/mmc/samsung-sdhci.txt @@ -3,7 +3,7 @@ Samsung's SDHCI controller is used as a connectivity interface with external MMC, SD and eMMC storage mediums. This file documents differences between the core mmc properties described by mmc.txt and the properties used by the -Samsung implmentation of the SDHCI controller. +Samsung implementation of the SDHCI controller. Required SoC Specific Properties: - compatible: should be one of the following diff --git a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/mtd/gpmc-nand.txt b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/mtd/gpmc-nand.txt index 5e1f31b5ff7..eb05255b678 100644 --- a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/mtd/gpmc-nand.txt +++ b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/mtd/gpmc-nand.txt @@ -43,7 +43,7 @@ Optional properties: ELM hardware engines should specify this device node in .dtsi Using ELM for ECC error correction frees some CPU cycles. -For inline partiton table parsing (optional): +For inline partition table parsing (optional): - #address-cells: should be set to 1 - #size-cells: should be set to 1 diff --git a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/mtd/gpmc-nor.txt b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/mtd/gpmc-nor.txt index 420b3ab1889..4828c17bb78 100644 --- a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/mtd/gpmc-nor.txt +++ b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/mtd/gpmc-nor.txt @@ -30,7 +30,7 @@ Optional properties: - gpmc,XXX Additional GPMC timings and settings parameters. See Documentation/devicetree/bindings/bus/ti-gpmc.txt -Optional properties for partiton table parsing: +Optional properties for partition table parsing: - #address-cells: should be set to 1 - #size-cells: should be set to 1 diff --git a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/mtd/gpmc-onenand.txt b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/mtd/gpmc-onenand.txt index b7529424ac8..5d8fa527c49 100644 --- a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/mtd/gpmc-onenand.txt +++ b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/mtd/gpmc-onenand.txt @@ -17,7 +17,7 @@ Optional properties: - dma-channel: DMA Channel index -For inline partiton table parsing (optional): +For inline partition table parsing (optional): - #address-cells: should be set to 1 - #size-cells: should be set to 1 diff --git a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/net/mdio-gpio.txt b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/net/mdio-gpio.txt index c79bab02536..8dbcf8295c6 100644 --- a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/net/mdio-gpio.txt +++ b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/net/mdio-gpio.txt @@ -14,7 +14,7 @@ node. Example: aliases { - mdio-gpio0 = <&mdio0>; + mdio-gpio0 = &mdio0; }; mdio0: mdio { diff --git a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/pci/host-generic-pci.txt b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/pci/host-generic-pci.txt new file mode 100644 index 00000000000..f0b0436807b --- /dev/null +++ b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/pci/host-generic-pci.txt @@ -0,0 +1,100 @@ +* Generic PCI host controller + +Firmware-initialised PCI host controllers and PCI emulations, such as the +virtio-pci implementations found in kvmtool and other para-virtualised +systems, do not require driver support for complexities such as regulator +and clock management. In fact, the controller may not even require the +configuration of a control interface by the operating system, instead +presenting a set of fixed windows describing a subset of IO, Memory and +Configuration Spaces. + +Such a controller can be described purely in terms of the standardized device +tree bindings communicated in pci.txt: + + +Properties of the host controller node: + +- compatible : Must be "pci-host-cam-generic" or "pci-host-ecam-generic" + depending on the layout of configuration space (CAM vs + ECAM respectively). + +- device_type : Must be "pci". + +- ranges : As described in IEEE Std 1275-1994, but must provide + at least a definition of non-prefetchable memory. One + or both of prefetchable Memory and IO Space may also + be provided. + +- bus-range : Optional property (also described in IEEE Std 1275-1994) + to indicate the range of bus numbers for this controller. + If absent, defaults to <0 255> (i.e. all buses). + +- #address-cells : Must be 3. + +- #size-cells : Must be 2. + +- reg : The Configuration Space base address and size, as accessed + from the parent bus. + + +Properties of the /chosen node: + +- linux,pci-probe-only + : Optional property which takes a single-cell argument. + If '0', then Linux will assign devices in its usual manner, + otherwise it will not try to assign devices and instead use + them as they are configured already. + +Configuration Space is assumed to be memory-mapped (as opposed to being +accessed via an ioport) and laid out with a direct correspondence to the +geography of a PCI bus address by concatenating the various components to +form an offset. + +For CAM, this 24-bit offset is: + + cfg_offset(bus, device, function, register) = + bus << 16 | device << 11 | function << 8 | register + +Whilst ECAM extends this by 4 bits to accomodate 4k of function space: + + cfg_offset(bus, device, function, register) = + bus << 20 | device << 15 | function << 12 | register + +Interrupt mapping is exactly as described in `Open Firmware Recommended +Practice: Interrupt Mapping' and requires the following properties: + +- #interrupt-cells : Must be 1 + +- interrupt-map : <see aforementioned specification> + +- interrupt-map-mask : <see aforementioned specification> + + +Example: + +pci { + compatible = "pci-host-cam-generic" + device_type = "pci"; + #address-cells = <3>; + #size-cells = <2>; + bus-range = <0x0 0x1>; + + // CPU_PHYSICAL(2) SIZE(2) + reg = <0x0 0x40000000 0x0 0x1000000>; + + // BUS_ADDRESS(3) CPU_PHYSICAL(2) SIZE(2) + ranges = <0x01000000 0x0 0x01000000 0x0 0x01000000 0x0 0x00010000>, + <0x02000000 0x0 0x41000000 0x0 0x41000000 0x0 0x3f000000>; + + + #interrupt-cells = <0x1>; + + // PCI_DEVICE(3) INT#(1) CONTROLLER(PHANDLE) CONTROLLER_DATA(3) + interrupt-map = < 0x0 0x0 0x0 0x1 &gic 0x0 0x4 0x1 + 0x800 0x0 0x0 0x1 &gic 0x0 0x5 0x1 + 0x1000 0x0 0x0 0x1 &gic 0x0 0x6 0x1 + 0x1800 0x0 0x0 0x1 &gic 0x0 0x7 0x1>; + + // PCI_DEVICE(3) INT#(1) + interrupt-map-mask = <0xf800 0x0 0x0 0x7>; +} diff --git a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/pci/pci-rcar-gen2.txt b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/pci/pci-rcar-gen2.txt new file mode 100644 index 00000000000..d8ef5bf50f1 --- /dev/null +++ b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/pci/pci-rcar-gen2.txt @@ -0,0 +1,66 @@ +Renesas AHB to PCI bridge +------------------------- + +This is the bridge used internally to connect the USB controllers to the +AHB. There is one bridge instance per USB port connected to the internal +OHCI and EHCI controllers. + +Required properties: +- compatible: "renesas,pci-r8a7790" for the R8A7790 SoC; + "renesas,pci-r8a7791" for the R8A7791 SoC. +- reg: A list of physical regions to access the device: the first is + the operational registers for the OHCI/EHCI controllers and the + second is for the bridge configuration and control registers. +- interrupts: interrupt for the device. +- clocks: The reference to the device clock. +- bus-range: The PCI bus number range; as this is a single bus, the range + should be specified as the same value twice. +- #address-cells: must be 3. +- #size-cells: must be 2. +- #interrupt-cells: must be 1. +- interrupt-map: standard property used to define the mapping of the PCI + interrupts to the GIC interrupts. +- interrupt-map-mask: standard property that helps to define the interrupt + mapping. + +Example SoC configuration: + + pci0: pci@ee090000 { + compatible = "renesas,pci-r8a7790"; + clocks = <&mstp7_clks R8A7790_CLK_EHCI>; + reg = <0x0 0xee090000 0x0 0xc00>, + <0x0 0xee080000 0x0 0x1100>; + interrupts = <0 108 IRQ_TYPE_LEVEL_HIGH>; + status = "disabled"; + + bus-range = <0 0>; + #address-cells = <3>; + #size-cells = <2>; + #interrupt-cells = <1>; + interrupt-map-mask = <0xff00 0 0 0x7>; + interrupt-map = <0x0000 0 0 1 &gic 0 108 IRQ_TYPE_LEVEL_HIGH + 0x0800 0 0 1 &gic 0 108 IRQ_TYPE_LEVEL_HIGH + 0x1000 0 0 2 &gic 0 108 IRQ_TYPE_LEVEL_HIGH>; + + pci@0,1 { + reg = <0x800 0 0 0 0>; + device_type = "pci"; + phys = <&usbphy 0 0>; + phy-names = "usb"; + }; + + pci@0,2 { + reg = <0x1000 0 0 0 0>; + device_type = "pci"; + phys = <&usbphy 0 0>; + phy-names = "usb"; + }; + }; + +Example board setup: + +&pci0 { + status = "okay"; + pinctrl-0 = <&usb0_pins>; + pinctrl-names = "default"; +}; diff --git a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/pci/rcar-pci.txt b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/pci/rcar-pci.txt new file mode 100644 index 00000000000..29d3b989d3b --- /dev/null +++ b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/pci/rcar-pci.txt @@ -0,0 +1,47 @@ +* Renesas RCar PCIe interface + +Required properties: +- compatible: should contain one of the following + "renesas,pcie-r8a7779", "renesas,pcie-r8a7790", "renesas,pcie-r8a7791" +- reg: base address and length of the pcie controller registers. +- #address-cells: set to <3> +- #size-cells: set to <2> +- bus-range: PCI bus numbers covered +- device_type: set to "pci" +- ranges: ranges for the PCI memory and I/O regions. +- dma-ranges: ranges for the inbound memory regions. +- interrupts: two interrupt sources for MSI interrupts, followed by interrupt + source for hardware related interrupts (e.g. link speed change). +- #interrupt-cells: set to <1> +- interrupt-map-mask and interrupt-map: standard PCI properties + to define the mapping of the PCIe interface to interrupt + numbers. +- clocks: from common clock binding: clock specifiers for the PCIe controller + and PCIe bus clocks. +- clock-names: from common clock binding: should be "pcie" and "pcie_bus". + +Example: + +SoC specific DT Entry: + + pcie: pcie@fe000000 { + compatible = "renesas,pcie-r8a7791"; + reg = <0 0xfe000000 0 0x80000>; + #address-cells = <3>; + #size-cells = <2>; + bus-range = <0x00 0xff>; + device_type = "pci"; + ranges = <0x01000000 0 0x00000000 0 0xfe100000 0 0x00100000 + 0x02000000 0 0xfe200000 0 0xfe200000 0 0x00200000 + 0x02000000 0 0x30000000 0 0x30000000 0 0x08000000 + 0x42000000 0 0x38000000 0 0x38000000 0 0x08000000>; + dma-ranges = <0x42000000 0 0x40000000 0 0x40000000 0 0x40000000 + 0x42000000 2 0x00000000 2 0x00000000 0 0x40000000>; + interrupts = <0 116 4>, <0 117 4>, <0 118 4>; + #interrupt-cells = <1>; + interrupt-map-mask = <0 0 0 0>; + interrupt-map = <0 0 0 0 &gic 0 116 4>; + clocks = <&mstp3_clks R8A7791_CLK_PCIE>, <&pcie_bus_clk>; + clock-names = "pcie", "pcie_bus"; + status = "disabled"; + }; diff --git a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/phy/samsung-phy.txt b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/phy/samsung-phy.txt index b422e38946d..2049261d8c3 100644 --- a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/phy/samsung-phy.txt +++ b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/phy/samsung-phy.txt @@ -114,3 +114,50 @@ Example: compatible = "samsung,exynos-sataphy-i2c"; reg = <0x38>; }; + +Samsung Exynos5 SoC series USB DRD PHY controller +-------------------------------------------------- + +Required properties: +- compatible : Should be set to one of the following supported values: + - "samsung,exynos5250-usbdrd-phy" - for exynos5250 SoC, + - "samsung,exynos5420-usbdrd-phy" - for exynos5420 SoC. +- reg : Register offset and length of USB DRD PHY register set; +- clocks: Clock IDs array as required by the controller +- clock-names: names of clocks correseponding to IDs in the clock property; + Required clocks: + - phy: main PHY clock (same as USB DRD controller i.e. DWC3 IP clock), + used for register access. + - ref: PHY's reference clock (usually crystal clock), used for + PHY operations, associated by phy name. It is used to + determine bit values for clock settings register. + For Exynos5420 this is given as 'sclk_usbphy30' in CMU. +- samsung,pmu-syscon: phandle for PMU system controller interface, used to + control pmu registers for power isolation. +- #phy-cells : from the generic PHY bindings, must be 1; + +For "samsung,exynos5250-usbdrd-phy" and "samsung,exynos5420-usbdrd-phy" +compatible PHYs, the second cell in the PHY specifier identifies the +PHY id, which is interpreted as follows: + 0 - UTMI+ type phy, + 1 - PIPE3 type phy, + +Example: + usbdrd_phy: usbphy@12100000 { + compatible = "samsung,exynos5250-usbdrd-phy"; + reg = <0x12100000 0x100>; + clocks = <&clock 286>, <&clock 1>; + clock-names = "phy", "ref"; + samsung,pmu-syscon = <&pmu_system_controller>; + #phy-cells = <1>; + }; + +- aliases: For SoCs like Exynos5420 having multiple USB 3.0 DRD PHY controllers, + 'usbdrd_phy' nodes should have numbered alias in the aliases node, + in the form of usbdrdphyN, N = 0, 1... (depending on number of + controllers). +Example: + aliases { + usbdrdphy0 = &usb3_phy0; + usbdrdphy1 = &usb3_phy1; + }; diff --git a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/phy/sun4i-usb-phy.txt b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/phy/sun4i-usb-phy.txt index a82361b6201..16528b9eb56 100644 --- a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/phy/sun4i-usb-phy.txt +++ b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/phy/sun4i-usb-phy.txt @@ -2,15 +2,26 @@ Allwinner sun4i USB PHY ----------------------- Required properties: -- compatible : should be one of "allwinner,sun4i-a10-usb-phy", - "allwinner,sun5i-a13-usb-phy" or "allwinner,sun7i-a20-usb-phy" +- compatible : should be one of + * allwinner,sun4i-a10-usb-phy + * allwinner,sun5i-a13-usb-phy + * allwinner,sun6i-a31-usb-phy + * allwinner,sun7i-a20-usb-phy - reg : a list of offset + length pairs -- reg-names : "phy_ctrl", "pmu1" and for sun4i or sun7i "pmu2" +- reg-names : + * "phy_ctrl" + * "pmu1" + * "pmu2" for sun4i, sun6i or sun7i - #phy-cells : from the generic phy bindings, must be 1 -- clocks : phandle + clock specifier for the phy clock -- clock-names : "usb_phy" +- clocks : phandle + clock specifier for the phy clocks +- clock-names : + * "usb_phy" for sun4i, sun5i or sun7i + * "usb0_phy", "usb1_phy" and "usb2_phy" for sun6i - resets : a list of phandle + reset specifier pairs -- reset-names : "usb0_reset", "usb1_reset" and for sun4i or sun7i "usb2_reset" +- reset-names : + * "usb0_reset" + * "usb1_reset" + * "usb2_reset" for sun4i, sun6i or sun7i Example: usbphy: phy@0x01c13400 { diff --git a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/phy/ti-phy.txt b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/phy/ti-phy.txt index 788fb0fa376..9ce458f3294 100644 --- a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/phy/ti-phy.txt +++ b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/phy/ti-phy.txt @@ -32,6 +32,11 @@ Required properties: - reg : Address and length of the register set for the device. - #phy-cells: determine the number of cells that should be given in the phandle while referencing this phy. + - clocks: a list of phandles and clock-specifier pairs, one for each entry in + clock-names. + - clock-names: should include: + * "wkupclk" - wakeup clock. + * "refclk" - reference clock (optional). Optional properties: - ctrl-module : phandle of the control module used by PHY driver to power on @@ -44,6 +49,8 @@ usb2phy@4a0ad080 { reg = <0x4a0ad080 0x58>; ctrl-module = <&omap_control_usb>; #phy-cells = <0>; + clocks = <&usb_phy_cm_clk32k>, <&usb_otg_ss_refclk960m>; + clock-names = "wkupclk", "refclk"; }; TI PIPE3 PHY diff --git a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/pinctrl/allwinner,sunxi-pinctrl.txt b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/pinctrl/allwinner,sunxi-pinctrl.txt index dff0e5f995e..d8d065608ec 100644 --- a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/pinctrl/allwinner,sunxi-pinctrl.txt +++ b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/pinctrl/allwinner,sunxi-pinctrl.txt @@ -6,8 +6,13 @@ the first two functions being GPIO in and out. The configuration on the pins includes drive strength and pull-up. Required properties: -- compatible: "allwinner,<soc>-pinctrl". Supported SoCs for now are: - sun5i-a13. +- compatible: Should be one of the followings (depending on you SoC): + "allwinner,sun4i-a10-pinctrl" + "allwinner,sun5i-a10s-pinctrl" + "allwinner,sun5i-a13-pinctrl" + "allwinner,sun6i-a31-pinctrl" + "allwinner,sun6i-a31-r-pinctrl" + "allwinner,sun7i-a20-pinctrl" - reg: Should contain the register physical address and length for the pin controller. diff --git a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/pinctrl/brcm,bcm11351-pinctrl.txt b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/pinctrl/brcm,bcm11351-pinctrl.txt index 67a5db95f18..4eaae32821a 100644 --- a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/pinctrl/brcm,bcm11351-pinctrl.txt +++ b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/pinctrl/brcm,bcm11351-pinctrl.txt @@ -73,9 +73,9 @@ Optional Properties (for standard pins): Otherwise: 0: fast slew rate 1: normal slew rate -- input-enable: No arguements. Enable input (does not affect +- input-enable: No arguments. Enable input (does not affect output.) -- input-disable: No arguements. Disable input (does not affect +- input-disable: No arguments. Disable input (does not affect output.) - drive-strength: Integer. Drive strength in mA. Valid values are 2, 4, 6, 8, 10, 12, 14, 16 mA. @@ -99,9 +99,9 @@ Optional Properties (for I2C pins): Otherwise: 0: fast slew rate 1: normal slew rate -- input-enable: No arguements. Enable input (does not affect +- input-enable: No arguments. Enable input (does not affect output.) -- input-disable: No arguements. Disable input (does not affect +- input-disable: No arguments. Disable input (does not affect output.) Optional Properties (for HDMI pins): @@ -111,9 +111,9 @@ Optional Properties (for HDMI pins): - slew-rate: Integer. Controls slew rate. 0: Standard(100kbps)& Fast(400kbps) mode 1: Highspeed (3.4Mbps) mode -- input-enable: No arguements. Enable input (does not affect +- input-enable: No arguments. Enable input (does not affect output.) -- input-disable: No arguements. Disable input (does not affect +- input-disable: No arguments. Disable input (does not affect output.) Example: diff --git a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/pinctrl/fsl,imx6sx-pinctrl.txt b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/pinctrl/fsl,imx6sx-pinctrl.txt new file mode 100644 index 00000000000..b1b595220f1 --- /dev/null +++ b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/pinctrl/fsl,imx6sx-pinctrl.txt @@ -0,0 +1,36 @@ +* Freescale i.MX6 SoloX IOMUX Controller + +Please refer to fsl,imx-pinctrl.txt in this directory for common binding part +and usage. + +Required properties: +- compatible: "fsl,imx6sx-iomuxc" +- fsl,pins: each entry consists of 6 integers and represents the mux and config + setting for one pin. The first 5 integers <mux_reg conf_reg input_reg mux_val + input_val> are specified using a PIN_FUNC_ID macro, which can be found in + imx6sx-pinfunc.h under device tree source folder. The last integer CONFIG is + the pad setting value like pull-up on this pin. Please refer to i.MX6 SoloX + Reference Manual for detailed CONFIG settings. + +CONFIG bits definition: +PAD_CTL_HYS (1 << 16) +PAD_CTL_PUS_100K_DOWN (0 << 14) +PAD_CTL_PUS_47K_UP (1 << 14) +PAD_CTL_PUS_100K_UP (2 << 14) +PAD_CTL_PUS_22K_UP (3 << 14) +PAD_CTL_PUE (1 << 13) +PAD_CTL_PKE (1 << 12) +PAD_CTL_ODE (1 << 11) +PAD_CTL_SPEED_LOW (0 << 6) +PAD_CTL_SPEED_MED (1 << 6) +PAD_CTL_SPEED_HIGH (3 << 6) +PAD_CTL_DSE_DISABLE (0 << 3) +PAD_CTL_DSE_260ohm (1 << 3) +PAD_CTL_DSE_130ohm (2 << 3) +PAD_CTL_DSE_87ohm (3 << 3) +PAD_CTL_DSE_65ohm (4 << 3) +PAD_CTL_DSE_52ohm (5 << 3) +PAD_CTL_DSE_43ohm (6 << 3) +PAD_CTL_DSE_37ohm (7 << 3) +PAD_CTL_SRE_FAST (1 << 0) +PAD_CTL_SRE_SLOW (0 << 0) diff --git a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/pinctrl/marvell,orion-pinctrl.txt b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/pinctrl/marvell,orion-pinctrl.txt new file mode 100644 index 00000000000..27570a3a174 --- /dev/null +++ b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/pinctrl/marvell,orion-pinctrl.txt @@ -0,0 +1,91 @@ +* Marvell Orion SoC pinctrl driver for mpp + +Please refer to marvell,mvebu-pinctrl.txt in this directory for common binding +part and usage. + +Required properties: +- compatible: "marvell,88f5181l-pinctrl", "marvell,88f5182-pinctrl", + "marvell,88f5281-pinctrl" + +- reg: two register areas, the first one describing the first two + contiguous MPP registers, and the second one describing the single + final MPP register, separated from the previous one. + +Available mpp pins/groups and functions: +Note: brackets (x) are not part of the mpp name for marvell,function and given +only for more detailed description in this document. + +* Marvell Orion 88f5181l + +name pins functions +================================================================================ +mpp0 0 pcie(rstout), pci(req2), gpio +mpp1 1 gpio, pci(gnt2) +mpp2 2 gpio, pci(req3), pci-1(pme) +mpp3 3 gpio, pci(gnt3) +mpp4 4 gpio, pci(req4) +mpp5 5 gpio, pci(gnt4) +mpp6 6 gpio, pci(req5), pci-1(clk) +mpp7 7 gpio, pci(gnt5), pci-1(clk) +mpp8 8 gpio, ge(col) +mpp9 9 gpio, ge(rxerr) +mpp10 10 gpio, ge(crs) +mpp11 11 gpio, ge(txerr) +mpp12 12 gpio, ge(txd4) +mpp13 13 gpio, ge(txd5) +mpp14 14 gpio, ge(txd6) +mpp15 15 gpio, ge(txd7) +mpp16 16 ge(rxd4) +mpp17 17 ge(rxd5) +mpp18 18 ge(rxd6) +mpp19 19 ge(rxd7) + +* Marvell Orion 88f5182 + +name pins functions +================================================================================ +mpp0 0 pcie(rstout), pci(req2), gpio +mpp1 1 gpio, pci(gnt2) +mpp2 2 gpio, pci(req3), pci-1(pme) +mpp3 3 gpio, pci(gnt3) +mpp4 4 gpio, pci(req4), bootnand(re), sata0(prsnt) +mpp5 5 gpio, pci(gnt4), bootnand(we), sata1(prsnt) +mpp6 6 gpio, pci(req5), nand(re0), sata0(act) +mpp7 7 gpio, pci(gnt5), nand(we0), sata1(act) +mpp8 8 gpio, ge(col) +mpp9 9 gpio, ge(rxerr) +mpp10 10 gpio, ge(crs) +mpp11 11 gpio, ge(txerr) +mpp12 12 gpio, ge(txd4), nand(re1), sata0(ledprsnt) +mpp13 13 gpio, ge(txd5), nand(we1), sata1(ledprsnt) +mpp14 14 gpio, ge(txd6), nand(re2), sata0(ledact) +mpp15 15 gpio, ge(txd7), nand(we2), sata1(ledact) +mpp16 16 uart1(rxd), ge(rxd4), gpio +mpp17 17 uart1(txd), ge(rxd5), gpio +mpp18 18 uart1(cts), ge(rxd6), gpio +mpp19 19 uart1(rts), ge(rxd7), gpio + +* Marvell Orion 88f5281 + +name pins functions +================================================================================ +mpp0 0 pcie(rstout), pci(req2), gpio +mpp1 1 gpio, pci(gnt2) +mpp2 2 gpio, pci(req3), pci(pme) +mpp3 3 gpio, pci(gnt3) +mpp4 4 gpio, pci(req4), bootnand(re) +mpp5 5 gpio, pci(gnt4), bootnand(we) +mpp6 6 gpio, pci(req5), nand(re0) +mpp7 7 gpio, pci(gnt5), nand(we0) +mpp8 8 gpio, ge(col) +mpp9 9 gpio, ge(rxerr) +mpp10 10 gpio, ge(crs) +mpp11 11 gpio, ge(txerr) +mpp12 12 gpio, ge(txd4), nand(re1) +mpp13 13 gpio, ge(txd5), nand(we1) +mpp14 14 gpio, ge(txd6), nand(re2) +mpp15 15 gpio, ge(txd7), nand(we2) +mpp16 16 uart1(rxd), ge(rxd4) +mpp17 17 uart1(txd), ge(rxd5) +mpp18 18 uart1(cts), ge(rxd6) +mpp19 19 uart1(rts), ge(rxd7) diff --git a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/pinctrl/pinctrl-bindings.txt b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/pinctrl/pinctrl-bindings.txt index 4414163e76d..fa40a177164 100644 --- a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/pinctrl/pinctrl-bindings.txt +++ b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/pinctrl/pinctrl-bindings.txt @@ -156,6 +156,7 @@ input-disable - disable input on pin (no effect on output) input-schmitt-enable - enable schmitt-trigger mode input-schmitt-disable - disable schmitt-trigger mode input-debounce - debounce mode with debound time X +power-source - select between different power supplies low-power-enable - enable low power mode low-power-disable - disable low power mode output-low - set the pin to output mode with low level diff --git a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/pinctrl/qcom,apq8064-pinctrl.txt b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/pinctrl/qcom,apq8064-pinctrl.txt new file mode 100644 index 00000000000..7181f925aca --- /dev/null +++ b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/pinctrl/qcom,apq8064-pinctrl.txt @@ -0,0 +1,88 @@ +Qualcomm APQ8064 TLMM block + +Required properties: +- compatible: "qcom,apq8064-pinctrl" +- reg: Should be the base address and length of the TLMM block. +- interrupts: Should be the parent IRQ of the TLMM block. +- interrupt-controller: Marks the device node as an interrupt controller. +- #interrupt-cells: Should be two. +- gpio-controller: Marks the device node as a GPIO controller. +- #gpio-cells : Should be two. + The first cell is the gpio pin number and the + second cell is used for optional parameters. + +Please refer to ../gpio/gpio.txt and ../interrupt-controller/interrupts.txt for +a general description of GPIO and interrupt bindings. + +Please refer to pinctrl-bindings.txt in this directory for details of the +common pinctrl bindings used by client devices, including the meaning of the +phrase "pin configuration node". + +Qualcomm's pin configuration nodes act as a container for an abitrary number of +subnodes. Each of these subnodes represents some desired configuration for a +pin, a group, or a list of pins or groups. This configuration can include the +mux function to select on those pin(s)/group(s), and various pin configuration +parameters, such as pull-up, drive strength, etc. + +The name of each subnode is not important; all subnodes should be enumerated +and processed purely based on their content. + +Each subnode only affects those parameters that are explicitly listed. In +other words, a subnode that lists a mux function but no pin configuration +parameters implies no information about any pin configuration parameters. +Similarly, a pin subnode that describes a pullup parameter implies no +information about e.g. the mux function. + + +The following generic properties as defined in pinctrl-bindings.txt are valid +to specify in a pin configuration subnode: + + pins, function, bias-disable, bias-pull-down, bias-pull,up, drive-strength, + output-low, output-high. + +Non-empty subnodes must specify the 'pins' property. + +Valid values for pins are: + gpio0-gpio89 + +Valid values for function are: + cam_mclk, codec_mic_i2s, codec_spkr_i2s, gsbi1, gsbi2, gsbi3, gsbi4, + gsbi4_cam_i2c, gsbi5, gsbi5_spi_cs1, gsbi5_spi_cs2, gsbi5_spi_cs3, gsbi6, + gsbi6_spi_cs1, gsbi6_spi_cs2, gsbi6_spi_cs3, gsbi7, gsbi7_spi_cs1, + gsbi7_spi_cs2, gsbi7_spi_cs3, gsbi_cam_i2c, hdmi, mi2s, riva_bt, riva_fm, + riva_wlan, sdc2, sdc4, slimbus, spkr_i2s, tsif1, tsif2, usb2_hsic, + +Example: + + msmgpio: pinctrl@800000 { + compatible = "qcom,apq8064-pinctrl"; + reg = <0x800000 0x4000>; + + gpio-controller; + #gpio-cells = <2>; + interrupt-controller; + #interrupt-cells = <2>; + interrupts = <0 32 0x4>; + + pinctrl-names = "default"; + pinctrl-0 = <&gsbi5_uart_default>; + + gsbi5_uart_default: gsbi5_uart_default { + mux { + pins = "gpio51", "gpio52"; + function = "gsbi5"; + }; + + tx { + pins = "gpio51"; + drive-strength = <4>; + bias-disable; + }; + + rx { + pins = "gpio52"; + drive-strength = <2>; + bias-pull-up; + }; + }; + }; diff --git a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/pinctrl/qcom,ipq8064-pinctrl.txt b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/pinctrl/qcom,ipq8064-pinctrl.txt new file mode 100644 index 00000000000..e0d35a40981 --- /dev/null +++ b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/pinctrl/qcom,ipq8064-pinctrl.txt @@ -0,0 +1,95 @@ +Qualcomm IPQ8064 TLMM block + +Required properties: +- compatible: "qcom,ipq8064-pinctrl" +- reg: Should be the base address and length of the TLMM block. +- interrupts: Should be the parent IRQ of the TLMM block. +- interrupt-controller: Marks the device node as an interrupt controller. +- #interrupt-cells: Should be two. +- gpio-controller: Marks the device node as a GPIO controller. +- #gpio-cells : Should be two. + The first cell is the gpio pin number and the + second cell is used for optional parameters. + +Please refer to ../gpio/gpio.txt and ../interrupt-controller/interrupts.txt for +a general description of GPIO and interrupt bindings. + +Please refer to pinctrl-bindings.txt in this directory for details of the +common pinctrl bindings used by client devices, including the meaning of the +phrase "pin configuration node". + +Qualcomm's pin configuration nodes act as a container for an abitrary number of +subnodes. Each of these subnodes represents some desired configuration for a +pin, a group, or a list of pins or groups. This configuration can include the +mux function to select on those pin(s)/group(s), and various pin configuration +parameters, such as pull-up, drive strength, etc. + +The name of each subnode is not important; all subnodes should be enumerated +and processed purely based on their content. + +Each subnode only affects those parameters that are explicitly listed. In +other words, a subnode that lists a mux function but no pin configuration +parameters implies no information about any pin configuration parameters. +Similarly, a pin subnode that describes a pullup parameter implies no +information about e.g. the mux function. + + +The following generic properties as defined in pinctrl-bindings.txt are valid +to specify in a pin configuration subnode: + + pins, function, bias-disable, bias-pull-down, bias-pull,up, drive-strength, + output-low, output-high. + +Non-empty subnodes must specify the 'pins' property. + +Valid values for qcom,pins are: + gpio0-gpio68 + Supports mux, bias, and drive-strength + + sdc3_clk, sdc3_cmd, sdc3_data + Supports bias and drive-strength + + +Valid values for function are: + mdio, mi2s, pdm, ssbi, spmi, audio_pcm, gsbi1, gsbi2, gsbi4, gsbi5, + gsbi5_spi_cs1, gsbi5_spi_cs2, gsbi5_spi_cs3, gsbi6, gsbi7, nss_spi, sdc1, + spdif, nand, tsif1, tsif2, usb_fs_n, usb_fs, usb2_hsic, rgmii2, sata, + pcie1_rst, pcie1_prsnt, pcie1_pwren_n, pcie1_pwren, pcie1_pwrflt, + pcie1_clk_req, pcie2_rst, pcie2_prsnt, pcie2_pwren_n, pcie2_pwren, + pcie2_pwrflt, pcie2_clk_req, pcie3_rst, pcie3_prsnt, pcie3_pwren_n, + pcie3_pwren, pcie3_pwrflt, pcie3_clk_req, ps_hold + +Example: + + pinmux: pinctrl@800000 { + compatible = "qcom,ipq8064-pinctrl"; + reg = <0x800000 0x4000>; + + gpio-controller; + #gpio-cells = <2>; + interrupt-controller; + #interrupt-cells = <2>; + interrupts = <0 32 0x4>; + + pinctrl-names = "default"; + pinctrl-0 = <&gsbi5_uart_default>; + + gsbi5_uart_default: gsbi5_uart_default { + mux { + pins = "gpio18", "gpio19"; + function = "gsbi5"; + }; + + tx { + pins = "gpio18"; + drive-strength = <4>; + bias-disable; + }; + + rx { + pins = "gpio19"; + drive-strength = <2>; + bias-pull-up; + }; + }; + }; diff --git a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/pinctrl/qcom,msm8974-pinctrl.txt b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/pinctrl/qcom,msm8974-pinctrl.txt index 9fb89e3f61e..73262b575df 100644 --- a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/pinctrl/qcom,msm8974-pinctrl.txt +++ b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/pinctrl/qcom,msm8974-pinctrl.txt @@ -50,7 +50,27 @@ Valid values for pins are: Supports bias and drive-strength Valid values for function are: - blsp_i2c2, blsp_i2c6, blsp_i2c11, blsp_spi1, blsp_uart2, blsp_uart8, slimbus + cci_i2c0, cci_i2c1, uim1, uim2, uim_batt_alarm, + blsp_uim1, blsp_uart1, blsp_i2c1, blsp_spi1, + blsp_uim2, blsp_uart2, blsp_i2c2, blsp_spi2, + blsp_uim3, blsp_uart3, blsp_i2c3, blsp_spi3, + blsp_uim4, blsp_uart4, blsp_i2c4, blsp_spi4, + blsp_uim5, blsp_uart5, blsp_i2c5, blsp_spi5, + blsp_uim6, blsp_uart6, blsp_i2c6, blsp_spi6, + blsp_uim7, blsp_uart7, blsp_i2c7, blsp_spi7, + blsp_uim8, blsp_uart8, blsp_i2c8, blsp_spi8, + blsp_uim9, blsp_uart9, blsp_i2c9, blsp_spi9, + blsp_uim10, blsp_uart10, blsp_i2c10, blsp_spi10, + blsp_uim11, blsp_uart11, blsp_i2c11, blsp_spi11, + blsp_uim12, blsp_uart12, blsp_i2c12, blsp_spi12, + blsp_spi1_cs1, blsp_spi2_cs2, blsp_spi_cs3, blsp_spi2_cs1, blsp_spi2_cs2 + blsp_spi2_cs3, blsp_spi10_cs1, blsp_spi10_cs2, blsp_spi10_cs3, + sdc3, sdc4, gcc_gp_clk1, gcc_gp_clk2, gcc_gp_clk3, cci_timer0, cci_timer1, + cci_timer2, cci_timer3, cci_async_in0, cci_async_in1, cci_async_in2, + cam_mckl0, cam_mclk1, cam_mclk2, cam_mclk3, mdp_vsync, hdmi_cec, hdmi_ddc, + hdmi_hpd, edp_hpd, gp_pdm0, gp_pdm1, gp_pdm2, gp_pdm3, gp0_clk, gp1_clk, + gp_mn, tsif1, tsif2, hsic, grfc, audio_ref_clk, qua_mi2s, pri_mi2s, spkr_mi2s, + ter_mi2s, sec_mi2s, bt, fm, wlan, slimbus (Note that this is not yet the complete list of functions) diff --git a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/pinctrl/rockchip,pinctrl.txt b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/pinctrl/rockchip,pinctrl.txt index f378d342aae..cefef741a40 100644 --- a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/pinctrl/rockchip,pinctrl.txt +++ b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/pinctrl/rockchip,pinctrl.txt @@ -21,13 +21,23 @@ defined as gpio sub-nodes of the pinmux controller. Required properties for iomux controller: - compatible: one of "rockchip,rk2928-pinctrl", "rockchip,rk3066a-pinctrl" "rockchip,rk3066b-pinctrl", "rockchip,rk3188-pinctrl" + - rockchip,grf: phandle referencing a syscon providing the + "general register files" + +Optional properties for iomux controller: + - rockchip,pmu: phandle referencing a syscon providing the pmu registers + as some SoCs carry parts of the iomux controller registers there. + Required for at least rk3188 and rk3288. + +Deprecated properties for iomux controller: - reg: first element is the general register space of the iomux controller - second element is the separate pull register space of the rk3188 + It should be large enough to contain also separate pull registers. + second element is the separate pull register space of the rk3188. + Use rockchip,grf and rockchip,pmu described above instead. Required properties for gpio sub nodes: - compatible: "rockchip,gpio-bank", "rockchip,rk3188-gpio-bank0" - reg: register of the gpio bank (different than the iomux registerset) - second element: separate pull register for rk3188 bank0 - interrupts: base interrupt of the gpio bank in the interrupt controller - clocks: clock that drives this bank - gpio-controller: identifies the node as a gpio controller and pin bank. @@ -39,6 +49,10 @@ Required properties for gpio sub nodes: cells should use the standard two-cell scheme described in bindings/interrupt-controller/interrupts.txt +Deprecated properties for gpio sub nodes: + - reg: second element: separate pull register for rk3188 bank0, use + rockchip,pmu described above instead + Required properties for pin configuration node: - rockchip,pins: 3 integers array, represents a group of pins mux and config setting. The format is rockchip,pins = <PIN_BANK PIN_BANK_IDX MUX &phandle>. @@ -54,7 +68,8 @@ Examples: pinctrl@20008000 { compatible = "rockchip,rk3066a-pinctrl"; - reg = <0x20008000 0x150>; + rockchip,grf = <&grf>; + #address-cells = <1>; #size-cells = <1>; ranges; @@ -103,16 +118,15 @@ Example for rk3188: pinctrl@20008000 { compatible = "rockchip,rk3188-pinctrl"; - reg = <0x20008000 0xa0>, - <0x20008164 0x1a0>; + rockchip,grf = <&grf>; + rockchip,pmu = <&pmu>; #address-cells = <1>; #size-cells = <1>; ranges; gpio0: gpio0@0x2000a000 { compatible = "rockchip,rk3188-gpio-bank0"; - reg = <0x2000a000 0x100>, - <0x20004064 0x8>; + reg = <0x2000a000 0x100>; interrupts = <GIC_SPI 54 IRQ_TYPE_LEVEL_HIGH>; clocks = <&clk_gates8 9>; diff --git a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/power/reset/keystone-reset.txt b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/power/reset/keystone-reset.txt new file mode 100644 index 00000000000..c82f12e2d85 --- /dev/null +++ b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/power/reset/keystone-reset.txt @@ -0,0 +1,67 @@ +* Device tree bindings for Texas Instruments keystone reset + +This node is intended to allow SoC reset in case of software reset +of selected watchdogs. + +The Keystone SoCs can contain up to 4 watchdog timers to reset +SoC. Each watchdog timer event input is connected to the Reset Mux +block. The Reset Mux block can be configured to cause reset or not. + +Additionally soft or hard reset can be configured. + +Required properties: + +- compatible: ti,keystone-reset + +- ti,syscon-pll: phandle/offset pair. The phandle to syscon used to + access pll controller registers and the offset to use + reset control registers. + +- ti,syscon-dev: phandle/offset pair. The phandle to syscon used to + access device state control registers and the offset + in order to use mux block registers for all watchdogs. + +Optional properties: + +- ti,soft-reset: Boolean option indicating soft reset. + By default hard reset is used. + +- ti,wdt-list: WDT list that can cause SoC reset. It's not related + to WDT driver, it's just needed to enable a SoC related + reset that's triggered by one of WDTs. The list is + in format: <0>, <2>; It can be in random order and + begins from 0 to 3, as keystone can contain up to 4 SoC + reset watchdogs and can be in random order. + +Example 1: +Setup keystone reset so that in case software reset or +WDT0 is triggered it issues hard reset for SoC. + +pllctrl: pll-controller@02310000 { + compatible = "ti,keystone-pllctrl", "syscon"; + reg = <0x02310000 0x200>; +}; + +devctrl: device-state-control@02620000 { + compatible = "ti,keystone-devctrl", "syscon"; + reg = <0x02620000 0x1000>; +}; + +rstctrl: reset-controller { + compatible = "ti,keystone-reset"; + ti,syscon-pll = <&pllctrl 0xe4>; + ti,syscon-dev = <&devctrl 0x328>; + ti,wdt-list = <0>; +}; + +Example 2: +Setup keystone reset so that in case of software reset or +WDT0 or WDT2 is triggered it issues soft reset for SoC. + +rstctrl: reset-controller { + compatible = "ti,keystone-reset"; + ti,syscon-pll = <&pllctrl 0xe4>; + ti,syscon-dev = <&devctrl 0x328>; + ti,wdt-list = <0>, <2>; + ti,soft-reset; +}; diff --git a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/power_supply/axxia-reset.txt b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/power_supply/axxia-reset.txt new file mode 100644 index 00000000000..47e720d249d --- /dev/null +++ b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/power_supply/axxia-reset.txt @@ -0,0 +1,20 @@ +Axxia Restart Driver + +This driver can do reset of the Axxia SoC. It uses the registers in the syscon +block to initiate a chip reset. + +Required Properties: + -compatible: "lsi,axm55xx-reset" + -syscon: phandle to the syscon node. + +Example: + + syscon: syscon@2010030000 { + compatible = "lsi,axxia-syscon", "syscon"; + reg = <0x20 0x10030000 0 0x2000>; + }; + + reset: reset@2010031000 { + compatible = "lsi,axm55xx-reset"; + syscon = <&syscon>; + }; diff --git a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/powerpc/4xx/reboot.txt b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/powerpc/4xx/reboot.txt index d7217260589..5bc63551319 100644 --- a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/powerpc/4xx/reboot.txt +++ b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/powerpc/4xx/reboot.txt @@ -1,7 +1,7 @@ Reboot property to control system reboot on PPC4xx systems: By setting "reset_type" to one of the following values, the default -software reset mechanism may be overidden. Here the possible values of +software reset mechanism may be overridden. Here the possible values of "reset_type": 1 - PPC4xx core reset diff --git a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/powerpc/fsl/dcsr.txt b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/powerpc/fsl/dcsr.txt index 9d54eb5a295..18a88100af9 100644 --- a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/powerpc/fsl/dcsr.txt +++ b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/powerpc/fsl/dcsr.txt @@ -82,7 +82,7 @@ PROPERTIES Which event source asserted the interrupt is captured in an EPU Interrupt Status Register (EPISR0,EPISR1). - Interrupt numbers are lised in order (perfmon, event0, event1). + Interrupt numbers are listed in order (perfmon, event0, event1). - interrupt-parent Usage: required diff --git a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/regulator/ltc3589.txt b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/regulator/ltc3589.txt new file mode 100644 index 00000000000..80105303614 --- /dev/null +++ b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/regulator/ltc3589.txt @@ -0,0 +1,99 @@ +Linear Technology LTC3589, LTC3589-1, and LTC3589-2 8-output regulators + +Required properties: +- compatible: "lltc,ltc3589", "lltc,ltc3589-1" or "lltc,ltc3589-2" +- reg: I2C slave address + +Required child node: +- regulators: Contains eight regulator child nodes sw1, sw2, sw3, bb-out, + ldo1, ldo2, ldo3, and ldo4, specifying the initialization data as + documented in Documentation/devicetree/bindings/regulator/regulator.txt. + +Each regulator is defined using the standard binding for regulators. The +nodes for sw1, sw2, sw3, bb-out, ldo1, and ldo2 additionally need to specify +the resistor values of their external feedback voltage dividers: + +Required properties (not on ldo3, ldo4): +- lltc,fb-voltage-divider: An array of two integers containing the resistor + values R1 and R2 of the feedback voltage divider in ohms. + +Regulators sw1, sw2, sw3, and ldo2 can regulate the feedback reference from +0.3625 V to 0.75 V in 12.5 mV steps. The output voltage thus ranges between +0.3625 * (1 + R1/R2) V and 0.75 * (1 + R1/R2) V. Regulators bb-out and ldo1 +have a fixed 0.8 V reference and thus output 0.8 * (1 + R1/R2) V. The ldo3 +regulator is fixed to 1.8 V on LTC3589 and to 2.8 V on LTC3589-1,2. The ldo4 +regulator can output between 1.8 V and 3.3 V on LTC3589 and between 1.2 V +and 3.2 V on LTC3589-1,2 in four steps. The ldo1 standby regulator can not +be disabled and thus should have the regulator-always-on property set. + +Example: + + ltc3589: pmic@34 { + compatible = "lltc,ltc3589-1"; + reg = <0x34>; + + regulators { + sw1_reg: sw1 { + regulator-min-microvolt = <591930>; + regulator-max-microvolt = <1224671>; + lltc,fb-voltage-divider = <100000 158000>; + regulator-ramp-delay = <7000>; + regulator-boot-on; + regulator-always-on; + }; + + sw2_reg: sw2 { + regulator-min-microvolt = <704123>; + regulator-max-microvolt = <1456803>; + lltc,fb-voltage-divider = <180000 191000>; + regulator-ramp-delay = <7000>; + regulator-boot-on; + regulator-always-on; + }; + + sw3_reg: sw3 { + regulator-min-microvolt = <1341250>; + regulator-max-microvolt = <2775000>; + lltc,fb-voltage-divider = <270000 100000>; + regulator-ramp-delay = <7000>; + regulator-boot-on; + regulator-always-on; + }; + + bb_out_reg: bb-out { + regulator-min-microvolt = <3387341>; + regulator-max-microvolt = <3387341>; + lltc,fb-voltage-divider = <511000 158000>; + regulator-boot-on; + regulator-always-on; + }; + + ldo1_reg: ldo1 { + regulator-min-microvolt = <1306329>; + regulator-max-microvolt = <1306329>; + lltc,fb-voltage-divider = <100000 158000>; + regulator-boot-on; + regulator-always-on; + }; + + ldo2_reg: ldo2 { + regulator-min-microvolt = <704123>; + regulator-max-microvolt = <1456806>; + lltc,fb-voltage-divider = <180000 191000>; + regulator-ramp-delay = <7000>; + regulator-boot-on; + regulator-always-on; + }; + + ldo3_reg: ldo3 { + regulator-min-microvolt = <2800000>; + regulator-max-microvolt = <2800000>; + regulator-boot-on; + }; + + ldo4_reg: ldo4 { + regulator-min-microvolt = <1200000>; + regulator-max-microvolt = <3200000>; + }; + }; + }; diff --git a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/regulator/regulator.txt b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/regulator/regulator.txt index e2c7f1e7251..86074334e34 100644 --- a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/regulator/regulator.txt +++ b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/regulator/regulator.txt @@ -12,7 +12,7 @@ Optional properties: - regulator-allow-bypass: allow the regulator to go into bypass mode - <name>-supply: phandle to the parent supply/regulator node - regulator-ramp-delay: ramp delay for regulator(in uV/uS) - For hardwares which support disabling ramp rate, it should be explicitly + For hardware which supports disabling ramp rate, it should be explicitly intialised to zero (regulator-ramp-delay = <0>) for disabling ramp delay. - regulator-enable-ramp-delay: The time taken, in microseconds, for the supply rail to reach the target voltage, plus/minus whatever tolerance the board diff --git a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/regulator/tps65090.txt b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/regulator/tps65090.txt index 313a60ba61d..340980239ea 100644 --- a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/regulator/tps65090.txt +++ b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/regulator/tps65090.txt @@ -21,6 +21,10 @@ Optional properties: number should be provided. If it is externally controlled and no GPIO entry then driver will just configure this rails as external control and will not provide any enable/disable APIs. +- ti,overcurrent-wait: This is applicable to FET registers, which have a + poorly defined "overcurrent wait" field. If this property is present it + should be between 0 - 3. If this property isn't present we won't touch the + "overcurrent wait" field and we'll leave it to the BIOS/EC to deal with. Each regulator is defined using the standard binding for regulators. diff --git a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/reset/allwinner,sunxi-clock-reset.txt b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/reset/allwinner,sunxi-clock-reset.txt new file mode 100644 index 00000000000..c8f77571488 --- /dev/null +++ b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/reset/allwinner,sunxi-clock-reset.txt @@ -0,0 +1,21 @@ +Allwinner sunxi Peripheral Reset Controller +=========================================== + +Please also refer to reset.txt in this directory for common reset +controller binding usage. + +Required properties: +- compatible: Should be one of the following: + "allwinner,sun6i-a31-ahb1-reset" + "allwinner,sun6i-a31-clock-reset" +- reg: should be register base and length as documented in the + datasheet +- #reset-cells: 1, see below + +example: + +ahb1_rst: reset@01c202c0 { + #reset-cells = <1>; + compatible = "allwinner,sun6i-a31-ahb1-reset"; + reg = <0x01c202c0 0xc>; +}; diff --git a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/arm/altera/socfpga-reset.txt b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/reset/socfpga-reset.txt index ecdb57d69db..32c1c8bfd5d 100644 --- a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/arm/altera/socfpga-reset.txt +++ b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/reset/socfpga-reset.txt @@ -3,9 +3,11 @@ Altera SOCFPGA Reset Manager Required properties: - compatible : "altr,rst-mgr" - reg : Should contain 1 register ranges(address and length) +- #reset-cells: 1 Example: rstmgr@ffd05000 { + #reset-cells = <1>; compatible = "altr,rst-mgr"; reg = <0xffd05000 0x1000>; }; diff --git a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/serial/atmel-usart.txt b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/serial/atmel-usart.txt index 17c1042b2df..a6391e70a8f 100644 --- a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/serial/atmel-usart.txt +++ b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/serial/atmel-usart.txt @@ -13,8 +13,9 @@ Required properties: Optional properties: - atmel,use-dma-rx: use of PDC or DMA for receiving data - atmel,use-dma-tx: use of PDC or DMA for transmitting data -- rts-gpios: specify a GPIO for RTS line. It will use specified PIO instead of the peripheral - function pin for the USART RTS feature. If unsure, don't specify this property. +- {rts,cts,dtr,dsr,rng,dcd}-gpios: specify a GPIO for RTS/CTS/DTR/DSR/RI/DCD line respectively. + It will use specified PIO instead of the peripheral function pin for the USART feature. + If unsure, don't specify this property. - add dma bindings for dma transfer: - dmas: DMA specifier, consisting of a phandle to DMA controller node, memory peripheral interface and USART DMA channel ID, FIFO configuration. @@ -35,7 +36,12 @@ Example: clock-names = "usart"; atmel,use-dma-rx; atmel,use-dma-tx; - rts-gpios = <&pioD 15 0>; + rts-gpios = <&pioD 15 GPIO_ACTIVE_LOW>; + cts-gpios = <&pioD 16 GPIO_ACTIVE_LOW>; + dtr-gpios = <&pioD 17 GPIO_ACTIVE_LOW>; + dsr-gpios = <&pioD 18 GPIO_ACTIVE_LOW>; + dcd-gpios = <&pioD 20 GPIO_ACTIVE_LOW>; + rng-gpios = <&pioD 19 GPIO_ACTIVE_LOW>; }; - use DMA: diff --git a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/serial/nxp,sc16is7xx.txt b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/serial/nxp,sc16is7xx.txt new file mode 100644 index 00000000000..246c795668d --- /dev/null +++ b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/serial/nxp,sc16is7xx.txt @@ -0,0 +1,33 @@ +* NXP SC16IS7xx advanced Universal Asynchronous Receiver-Transmitter (UART) + +Required properties: +- compatible: Should be one of the following: + - "nxp,sc16is740" for NXP SC16IS740, + - "nxp,sc16is741" for NXP SC16IS741, + - "nxp,sc16is750" for NXP SC16IS750, + - "nxp,sc16is752" for NXP SC16IS752, + - "nxp,sc16is760" for NXP SC16IS760, + - "nxp,sc16is762" for NXP SC16IS762. +- reg: I2C address of the SC16IS7xx device. +- interrupt-parent: The phandle for the interrupt controller that + services interrupts for this IC. +- interrupts: Should contain the UART interrupt +- clocks: Reference to the IC source clock. + +Optional properties: +- gpio-controller: Marks the device node as a GPIO controller. +- #gpio-cells: Should be two. The first cell is the GPIO number and + the second cell is used to specify the GPIO polarity: + 0 = active high, + 1 = active low. + +Example: + sc16is750: sc16is750@51 { + compatible = "nxp,sc16is750"; + reg = <0x51>; + clocks = <&clk20m>; + interrupt-parent = <&gpio3>; + interrupts = <7 IRQ_TYPE_EDGE_FALLING>; + gpio-controller; + #gpio-cells = <2>; + }; diff --git a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/serial/of-serial.txt b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/serial/of-serial.txt index 1928a3e83cd..77054772a8f 100644 --- a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/serial/of-serial.txt +++ b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/serial/of-serial.txt @@ -37,6 +37,7 @@ Optional properties: - auto-flow-control: one way to enable automatic flow control support. The driver is allowed to detect support for the capability even without this property. +- has-hw-flow-control: the hardware has flow control capability. Example: diff --git a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/serial/renesas,sci-serial.txt b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/serial/renesas,sci-serial.txt index 53e6c175db6..64fd7dec1bb 100644 --- a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/serial/renesas,sci-serial.txt +++ b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/serial/renesas,sci-serial.txt @@ -4,6 +4,7 @@ Required properties: - compatible: Must contain one of the following: + - "renesas,scif-r8a7779" for R8A7779 (R-Car H1) SCIF compatible UART. - "renesas,scif-r8a7790" for R8A7790 (R-Car H2) SCIF compatible UART. - "renesas,scifa-r8a7790" for R8A7790 (R-Car H2) SCIFA compatible UART. - "renesas,scifb-r8a7790" for R8A7790 (R-Car H2) SCIFB compatible UART. diff --git a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/soc/qcom/qcom,gsbi.txt b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/soc/qcom/qcom,gsbi.txt new file mode 100644 index 00000000000..4ce24d425bf --- /dev/null +++ b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/soc/qcom/qcom,gsbi.txt @@ -0,0 +1,78 @@ +QCOM GSBI (General Serial Bus Interface) Driver + +The GSBI controller is modeled as a node with zero or more child nodes, each +representing a serial sub-node device that is mux'd as part of the GSBI +configuration settings. The mode setting will govern the input/output mode of +the 4 GSBI IOs. + +Required properties: +- compatible: must contain "qcom,gsbi-v1.0.0" for APQ8064/IPQ8064 +- reg: Address range for GSBI registers +- clocks: required clock +- clock-names: must contain "iface" entry +- qcom,mode : indicates MUX value for configuration of the serial interface. + Please reference dt-bindings/soc/qcom,gsbi.h for valid mux values. + +Optional properties: +- qcom,crci : indicates CRCI MUX value for QUP CRCI ports. Please reference + dt-bindings/soc/qcom,gsbi.h for valid CRCI mux values. + +Required properties if child node exists: +- #address-cells: Must be 1 +- #size-cells: Must be 1 +- ranges: Must be present + +Properties for children: + +A GSBI controller node can contain 0 or more child nodes representing serial +devices. These serial devices can be a QCOM UART, I2C controller, spi +controller, or some combination of aforementioned devices. + +See the following for child node definitions: +Documentation/devicetree/bindings/i2c/qcom,i2c-qup.txt +Documentation/devicetree/bindings/spi/qcom,spi-qup.txt +Documentation/devicetree/bindings/serial/qcom,msm-uartdm.txt + +Example for APQ8064: + +#include <dt-bindings/soc/qcom,gsbi.h> + + gsbi4@16300000 { + compatible = "qcom,gsbi-v1.0.0"; + reg = <0x16300000 0x100>; + clocks = <&gcc GSBI4_H_CLK>; + clock-names = "iface"; + #address-cells = <1>; + #size-cells = <1>; + ranges; + qcom,mode = <GSBI_PROT_I2C_UART>; + qcom,crci = <GSBI_CRCI_QUP>; + + /* child nodes go under here */ + + i2c_qup4: i2c@16380000 { + compatible = "qcom,i2c-qup-v1.1.1"; + reg = <0x16380000 0x1000>; + interrupts = <0 153 0>; + + clocks = <&gcc GSBI4_QUP_CLK>, <&gcc GSBI4_H_CLK>; + clock-names = "core", "iface"; + + clock-frequency = <200000>; + + #address-cells = <1>; + #size-cells = <0>; + + }; + + uart4: serial@16340000 { + compatible = "qcom,msm-uartdm-v1.3", "qcom,msm-uartdm"; + reg = <0x16340000 0x1000>, + <0x16300000 0x1000>; + interrupts = <0 152 0x0>; + clocks = <&gcc GSBI4_UART_CLK>, <&gcc GSBI4_H_CLK>; + clock-names = "core", "iface"; + status = "ok"; + }; + }; + diff --git a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/sound/ak4104.txt b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/sound/ak4104.txt index b902ee39cf8..deca5e18f30 100644 --- a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/sound/ak4104.txt +++ b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/sound/ak4104.txt @@ -8,6 +8,8 @@ Required properties: - reg : The chip select number on the SPI bus + - vdd-supply : A regulator node, providing 2.7V - 3.6V + Optional properties: - reset-gpio : a GPIO spec for the reset pin. If specified, it will be @@ -19,4 +21,5 @@ spdif: ak4104@0 { compatible = "asahi-kasei,ak4104"; reg = <0>; spi-max-frequency = <5000000>; + vdd-supply = <&vdd_3v3_reg>; }; diff --git a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/sound/alc5623.txt b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/sound/alc5623.txt new file mode 100644 index 00000000000..26c86c98d67 --- /dev/null +++ b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/sound/alc5623.txt @@ -0,0 +1,25 @@ +ALC5621/ALC5622/ALC5623 audio Codec + +Required properties: + + - compatible: "realtek,alc5623" + - reg: the I2C address of the device. + +Optional properties: + + - add-ctrl: Default register value for Reg-40h, Additional Control + Register. If absent or has the value of 0, the + register is untouched. + + - jack-det-ctrl: Default register value for Reg-5Ah, Jack Detect + Control Register. If absent or has value 0, the + register is untouched. + +Example: + + alc5621: alc5621@1a { + compatible = "alc5621"; + reg = <0x1a>; + add-ctrl = <0x3700>; + jack-det-ctrl = <0x4810>; + }; diff --git a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/sound/cs42l56.txt b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/sound/cs42l56.txt new file mode 100644 index 00000000000..4feb0eb27ea --- /dev/null +++ b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/sound/cs42l56.txt @@ -0,0 +1,63 @@ +CS42L52 audio CODEC + +Required properties: + + - compatible : "cirrus,cs42l56" + + - reg : the I2C address of the device for I2C + + - VA-supply, VCP-supply, VLDO-supply : power supplies for the device, + as covered in Documentation/devicetree/bindings/regulator/regulator.txt. + +Optional properties: + + - cirrus,gpio-nreset : GPIO controller's phandle and the number + of the GPIO used to reset the codec. + + - cirrus,chgfreq-divisor : Values used to set the Charge Pump Frequency. + Allowable values of 0x00 through 0x0F. These are raw values written to the + register, not the actual frequency. The frequency is determined by the following. + Frequency = MCLK / 4 * (N+2) + N = chgfreq_val + MCLK = Where MCLK is the frequency of the mclk signal after the MCLKDIV2 circuit. + + - cirrus,ain1a-ref-cfg, ain1b-ref-cfg : boolean, If present, AIN1A or AIN1B are configured + as a pseudo-differential input referenced to AIN1REF/AIN3A. + + - cirrus,ain2a-ref-cfg, ain2b-ref-cfg : boolean, If present, AIN2A or AIN2B are configured + as a pseudo-differential input referenced to AIN2REF/AIN3B. + + - cirrus,micbias-lvl: Set the output voltage level on the MICBIAS Pin. + 0 = 0.5 x VA + 1 = 0.6 x VA + 2 = 0.7 x VA + 3 = 0.8 x VA + 4 = 0.83 x VA + 5 = 0.91 x VA + + - cirrus,adaptive-pwr-cfg : Configures how the power to the Headphone and Lineout + Amplifiers adapt to the output signal levels. + 0 = Adapt to Volume Mode. Voltage level determined by the sum of the relevant volume settings. + 1 = Fixed - Headphone and Line Amp supply = + or - VCP/2. + 2 = Fixed - Headphone and Line Amp supply = + or - VCP. + 3 = Adapted to Signal; Voltage level is dynamically determined by the output signal. + + - cirrus,hpf-left-freq, hpf-right-freq : Sets the corner frequency (-3dB point) for the internal High-Pass + Filter. + 0 = 1.8Hz + 1 = 119Hz + 2 = 236Hz + 3 = 464Hz + + +Example: + +codec: codec@4b { + compatible = "cirrus,cs42l56"; + reg = <0x4b>; + gpio-reset = <&gpio 10 0>; + cirrus,chgfreq-divisor = <0x05>; + cirrus.ain1_ref_cfg; + cirrus,micbias-lvl = <5>; + VA-supply = <®_audio>; +}; diff --git a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/sound/fsl-sai.txt b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/sound/fsl-sai.txt index 98611a6761c..0f4e2382819 100644 --- a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/sound/fsl-sai.txt +++ b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/sound/fsl-sai.txt @@ -7,10 +7,11 @@ codec/DSP interfaces. Required properties: -- compatible: Compatible list, contains "fsl,vf610-sai". +- compatible: Compatible list, contains "fsl,vf610-sai" or "fsl,imx6sx-sai". - reg: Offset and length of the register set for the device. - clocks: Must contain an entry for each entry in clock-names. -- clock-names : Must include the "sai" entry. +- clock-names : Must include the "bus" for register access and "mclk1" "mclk2" + "mclk3" for bit clock and frame clock providing. - dmas : Generic dma devicetree binding as described in Documentation/devicetree/bindings/dma/dma.txt. - dma-names : Two dmas have to be defined, "tx" and "rx". @@ -30,8 +31,10 @@ sai2: sai@40031000 { reg = <0x40031000 0x1000>; pinctrl-names = "default"; pinctrl-0 = <&pinctrl_sai2_1>; - clocks = <&clks VF610_CLK_SAI2>; - clock-names = "sai"; + clocks = <&clks VF610_CLK_PLATFORM_BUS>, + <&clks VF610_CLK_SAI2>, + <&clks 0>, <&clks 0>; + clock-names = "bus", "mclk1", "mclk2", "mclk3"; dma-names = "tx", "rx"; dmas = <&edma0 0 VF610_EDMA_MUXID0_SAI2_TX>, <&edma0 0 VF610_EDMA_MUXID0_SAI2_RX>; diff --git a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/sound/max98090.txt b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/sound/max98090.txt index e4c8b36dcf8..a5e63fa47dc 100644 --- a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/sound/max98090.txt +++ b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/sound/max98090.txt @@ -10,6 +10,12 @@ Required properties: - interrupts : The CODEC's interrupt output. +Optional properties: + +- clocks: The phandle of the master clock to the CODEC + +- clock-names: Should be "mclk" + Pins on the device (for linking into audio routes): * MIC1 diff --git a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/sound/max98095.txt b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/sound/max98095.txt new file mode 100644 index 00000000000..318a4c82f17 --- /dev/null +++ b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/sound/max98095.txt @@ -0,0 +1,22 @@ +MAX98095 audio CODEC + +This device supports I2C only. + +Required properties: + +- compatible : "maxim,max98095". + +- reg : The I2C address of the device. + +Optional properties: + +- clocks: The phandle of the master clock to the CODEC + +- clock-names: Should be "mclk" + +Example: + +max98095: codec@11 { + compatible = "maxim,max98095"; + reg = <0x11>; +}; diff --git a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/sound/nokia,rx51.txt b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/sound/nokia,rx51.txt new file mode 100644 index 00000000000..72f93d99627 --- /dev/null +++ b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/sound/nokia,rx51.txt @@ -0,0 +1,27 @@ +* Nokia N900 audio setup + +Required properties: +- compatible: Should contain "nokia,n900-audio" +- nokia,cpu-dai: phandle for the McBSP node +- nokia,audio-codec: phandles for the main TLV320AIC3X node and the + auxiliary TLV320AIC3X node (in this order) +- nokia,headphone-amplifier: phandle for the TPA6130A2 node +- tvout-selection-gpios: GPIO for tvout selection +- jack-detection-gpios: GPIO for jack detection +- eci-switch-gpios: GPIO for ECI (Enhancement Control Interface) switch +- speaker-amplifier-gpios: GPIO for speaker amplifier + +Example: + +sound { + compatible = "nokia,n900-audio"; + + nokia,cpu-dai = <&mcbsp2>; + nokia,audio-codec = <&tlv320aic3x>, <&tlv320aic3x_aux>; + nokia,headphone-amplifier = <&tpa6130a2>; + + tvout-selection-gpios = <&gpio2 8 GPIO_ACTIVE_HIGH>; /* 40 */ + jack-detection-gpios = <&gpio6 17 GPIO_ACTIVE_HIGH>; /* 177 */ + eci-switch-gpios = <&gpio6 22 GPIO_ACTIVE_HIGH>; /* 182 */ + speaker-amplifier-gpios = <&twl_gpio 7 GPIO_ACTIVE_HIGH>; +}; diff --git a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/sound/nvidia,tegra30-hda.txt b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/sound/nvidia,tegra30-hda.txt new file mode 100644 index 00000000000..b4730c2822b --- /dev/null +++ b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/sound/nvidia,tegra30-hda.txt @@ -0,0 +1,28 @@ +NVIDIA Tegra30 HDA controller + +Required properties: +- compatible : "nvidia,tegra30-hda" +- reg : Should contain the HDA registers location and length. +- interrupts : The interrupt from the HDA controller. +- clocks : Must contain an entry for each required entry in clock-names. + See ../clocks/clock-bindings.txt for details. +- clock-names : Must include the following entries: hda, hdacodec_2x, hda2hdmi +- resets : Must contain an entry for each entry in reset-names. + See ../reset/reset.txt for details. +- reset-names : Must include the following entries: hda, hdacodec_2x, hda2hdmi + +Example: + +hda@0,70030000 { + compatible = "nvidia,tegra124-hda", "nvidia,tegra30-hda"; + reg = <0x0 0x70030000 0x0 0x10000>; + interrupts = <GIC_SPI 81 IRQ_TYPE_LEVEL_HIGH>; + clocks = <&tegra_car TEGRA124_CLK_HDA>, + <&tegra_car TEGRA124_CLK_HDA2HDMI>, + <&tegra_car TEGRA124_CLK_HDA2CODEC_2X>; + clock-names = "hda", "hda2hdmi", "hda2codec_2x"; + resets = <&tegra_car 125>, /* hda */ + <&tegra_car 128>; /* hda2hdmi */ + <&tegra_car 111>, /* hda2codec_2x */ + reset-names = "hda", "hda2hdmi", "hda2codec_2x"; +}; diff --git a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/sound/renesas,rsnd.txt b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/sound/renesas,rsnd.txt index a44e9179faf..8346cab046c 100644 --- a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/sound/renesas,rsnd.txt +++ b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/sound/renesas,rsnd.txt @@ -20,6 +20,7 @@ Required properties: SSI subnode properties: - interrupts : Should contain SSI interrupt for PIO transfer - shared-pin : if shared clock pin +- pio-transfer : use PIO transfer mode SRC subnode properties: no properties at this point diff --git a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/sound/rt5640.txt b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/sound/rt5640.txt index 068a1141b06..bac4d9ac1ed 100644 --- a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/sound/rt5640.txt +++ b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/sound/rt5640.txt @@ -1,10 +1,10 @@ -RT5640 audio CODEC +RT5640/RT5639 audio CODEC This device supports I2C only. Required properties: -- compatible : "realtek,rt5640". +- compatible : One of "realtek,rt5640" or "realtek,rt5639". - reg : The I2C address of the device. @@ -18,7 +18,7 @@ Optional properties: - realtek,ldo1-en-gpios : The GPIO that controls the CODEC's LDO1_EN pin. -Pins on the device (for linking into audio routes): +Pins on the device (for linking into audio routes) for RT5639/RT5640: * DMIC1 * DMIC2 @@ -31,13 +31,16 @@ Pins on the device (for linking into audio routes): * HPOR * LOUTL * LOUTR - * MONOP - * MONON * SPOLP * SPOLN * SPORP * SPORN +Additional pins on the device for RT5640: + + * MONOP + * MONON + Example: rt5640 { diff --git a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/sound/simple-card.txt b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/sound/simple-card.txt index 131aa2ad7f1..c2e9841dfce 100644 --- a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/sound/simple-card.txt +++ b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/sound/simple-card.txt @@ -1,6 +1,6 @@ Simple-Card: -Simple-Card specifies audio DAI connection of SoC <-> codec. +Simple-Card specifies audio DAI connections of SoC <-> codec. Required properties: @@ -10,26 +10,54 @@ Optional properties: - simple-audio-card,name : User specified audio sound card name, one string property. -- simple-audio-card,format : CPU/CODEC common audio format. - "i2s", "right_j", "left_j" , "dsp_a" - "dsp_b", "ac97", "pdm", "msb", "lsb" - simple-audio-card,widgets : Please refer to widgets.txt. - simple-audio-card,routing : A list of the connections between audio components. Each entry is a pair of strings, the first being the connection's sink, the second being the connection's source. -- dai-tdm-slot-num : Please refer to tdm-slot.txt. -- dai-tdm-slot-width : Please refer to tdm-slot.txt. +- simple-audio-card,mclk-fs : Multiplication factor between stream rate and codec + mclk. + +Optional subnodes: + +- simple-audio-card,dai-link : Container for dai-link level + properties and the CPU and CODEC + sub-nodes. This container may be + omitted when the card has only one + DAI link. See the examples and the + section bellow. + +Dai-link subnode properties and subnodes: + +If dai-link subnode is omitted and the subnode properties are directly +under "sound"-node the subnode property and subnode names have to be +prefixed with "simple-audio-card,"-prefix. -Required subnodes: +Required dai-link subnodes: -- simple-audio-card,dai-link : container for the CPU and CODEC sub-nodes - This container may be omitted when the - card has only one DAI link. - See the examples. +- cpu : CPU sub-node +- codec : CODEC sub-node -- simple-audio-card,cpu : CPU sub-node -- simple-audio-card,codec : CODEC sub-node +Optional dai-link subnode properties: + +- format : CPU/CODEC common audio format. + "i2s", "right_j", "left_j" , "dsp_a" + "dsp_b", "ac97", "pdm", "msb", "lsb" +- frame-master : Indicates dai-link frame master. + phandle to a cpu or codec subnode. +- bitclock-master : Indicates dai-link bit clock master. + phandle to a cpu or codec subnode. +- bitclock-inversion : bool property. Add this if the + dai-link uses bit clock inversion. +- frame-inversion : bool property. Add this if the + dai-link uses frame clock inversion. + +For backward compatibility the frame-master and bitclock-master +properties can be used as booleans in codec subnode to indicate if the +codec is the dai-link frame or bit clock master. In this case there +should be no dai-link node, the same properties should not be present +at sound-node level, and the bitclock-inversion and frame-inversion +properties should also be placed in the codec node if needed. Required CPU/CODEC subnodes properties: @@ -37,29 +65,21 @@ Required CPU/CODEC subnodes properties: Optional CPU/CODEC subnodes properties: -- format : CPU/CODEC specific audio format if needed. - see simple-audio-card,format -- frame-master : bool property. add this if subnode is frame master -- bitclock-master : bool property. add this if subnode is bitclock master -- bitclock-inversion : bool property. add this if subnode has clock inversion -- frame-inversion : bool property. add this if subnode has frame inversion +- dai-tdm-slot-num : Please refer to tdm-slot.txt. +- dai-tdm-slot-width : Please refer to tdm-slot.txt. - clocks / system-clock-frequency : specify subnode's clock if needed. it can be specified via "clocks" if system has clock node (= common clock), or "system-clock-frequency" (if system doens't support common clock) -Note: - * For 'format', 'frame-master', 'bitclock-master', 'bitclock-inversion' and - 'frame-inversion', the simple card will use the settings of CODEC for both - CPU and CODEC sides as we need to keep the settings identical for both ends - of the link. - Example 1 - single DAI link: sound { compatible = "simple-audio-card"; simple-audio-card,name = "VF610-Tower-Sound-Card"; simple-audio-card,format = "left_j"; + simple-audio-card,bitclock-master = <&dailink0_master>; + simple-audio-card,frame-master = <&dailink0_master>; simple-audio-card,widgets = "Microphone", "Microphone Jack", "Headphone", "Headphone Jack", @@ -69,17 +89,12 @@ sound { "Headphone Jack", "HP_OUT", "External Speaker", "LINE_OUT"; - dai-tdm-slot-num = <2>; - dai-tdm-slot-width = <8>; - simple-audio-card,cpu { sound-dai = <&sh_fsi2 0>; }; - simple-audio-card,codec { + dailink0_master: simple-audio-card,codec { sound-dai = <&ak4648>; - bitclock-master; - frame-master; clocks = <&osc>; }; }; @@ -105,31 +120,31 @@ Example 2 - many DAI links: sound { compatible = "simple-audio-card"; simple-audio-card,name = "Cubox Audio"; - simple-audio-card,format = "i2s"; simple-audio-card,dai-link@0 { /* I2S - HDMI */ - simple-audio-card,cpu { + format = "i2s"; + cpu { sound-dai = <&audio1 0>; }; - simple-audio-card,codec { + codec { sound-dai = <&tda998x 0>; }; }; simple-audio-card,dai-link@1 { /* S/PDIF - HDMI */ - simple-audio-card,cpu { + cpu { sound-dai = <&audio1 1>; }; - simple-audio-card,codec { + codec { sound-dai = <&tda998x 1>; }; }; simple-audio-card,dai-link@2 { /* S/PDIF - S/PDIF */ - simple-audio-card,cpu { + cpu { sound-dai = <&audio1 1>; }; - simple-audio-card,codec { + codec { sound-dai = <&spdif_codec>; }; }; diff --git a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/sound/snow.txt b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/sound/snow.txt new file mode 100644 index 00000000000..678b191c37b --- /dev/null +++ b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/sound/snow.txt @@ -0,0 +1,17 @@ +Audio Binding for Snow boards + +Required properties: +- compatible : Can be one of the following, + "google,snow-audio-max98090" or + "google,snow-audio-max98095" +- samsung,i2s-controller: The phandle of the Samsung I2S controller +- samsung,audio-codec: The phandle of the audio codec + +Example: + +sound { + compatible = "google,snow-audio-max98095"; + + samsung,i2s-controller = <&i2s0>; + samsung,audio-codec = <&max98095>; +}; diff --git a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/sound/st,sta350.txt b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/sound/st,sta350.txt new file mode 100644 index 00000000000..b7e71bf5caf --- /dev/null +++ b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/sound/st,sta350.txt @@ -0,0 +1,131 @@ +STA350 audio CODEC + +The driver for this device only supports I2C. + +Required properties: + + - compatible: "st,sta350" + - reg: the I2C address of the device for I2C + - reset-gpios: a GPIO spec for the reset pin. If specified, it will be + deasserted before communication to the codec starts. + + - power-down-gpios: a GPIO spec for the power down pin. If specified, + it will be deasserted before communication to the codec + starts. + + - vdd-dig-supply: regulator spec, providing 3.3V + - vdd-pll-supply: regulator spec, providing 3.3V + - vcc-supply: regulator spec, providing 5V - 26V + +Optional properties: + + - st,output-conf: number, Selects the output configuration: + 0: 2-channel (full-bridge) power, 2-channel data-out + 1: 2 (half-bridge). 1 (full-bridge) on-board power + 2: 2 Channel (Full-Bridge) Power, 1 Channel FFX + 3: 1 Channel Mono-Parallel + If parameter is missing, mode 0 will be enabled. + This property has to be specified as '/bits/ 8' value. + + - st,ch1-output-mapping: Channel 1 output mapping + - st,ch2-output-mapping: Channel 2 output mapping + - st,ch3-output-mapping: Channel 3 output mapping + 0: Channel 1 + 1: Channel 2 + 2: Channel 3 + If parameter is missing, channel 1 is choosen. + This properties have to be specified as '/bits/ 8' values. + + - st,thermal-warning-recover: + If present, thermal warning recovery is enabled. + + - st,thermal-warning-adjustment: + If present, thermal warning adjustment is enabled. + + - st,fault-detect-recovery: + If present, then fault recovery will be enabled. + + - st,ffx-power-output-mode: string + The FFX power output mode selects how the FFX output timing is + configured. Must be one of these values: + - "drop-compensation" + - "tapered-compensation" + - "full-power-mode" + - "variable-drop-compensation" (default) + + - st,drop-compensation-ns: number + Only required for "st,ffx-power-output-mode" == + "variable-drop-compensation". + Specifies the drop compensation in nanoseconds. + The value must be in the range of 0..300, and only + multiples of 20 are allowed. Default is 140ns. + + - st,overcurrent-warning-adjustment: + If present, overcurrent warning adjustment is enabled. + + - st,max-power-use-mpcc: + If present, then MPCC bits are used for MPC coefficients, + otherwise standard MPC coefficients are used. + + - st,max-power-corr: + If present, power bridge correction for THD reduction near maximum + power output is enabled. + + - st,am-reduction-mode: + If present, FFX mode runs in AM reduction mode, otherwise normal + FFX mode is used. + + - st,odd-pwm-speed-mode: + If present, PWM speed mode run on odd speed mode (341.3 kHz) on all + channels. If not present, normal PWM spped mode (384 kHz) will be used. + + - st,distortion-compensation: + If present, distortion compensation variable uses DCC coefficient. + If not present, preset DC coefficient is used. + + - st,invalid-input-detect-mute: + If present, automatic invalid input detect mute is enabled. + + - st,activate-mute-output: + If present, a mute output will be activated in ase the volume will + reach a value lower than -76 dBFS. + + - st,bridge-immediate-off: + If present, the bridge will be switched off immediately after the + power-down-gpio goes low. Otherwise, the bridge will wait for 13 + million clock cycles to pass before shutting down. + + - st,noise-shape-dc-cut: + If present, the noise-shaping technique on the DC cutoff filter are + enabled. + + - st,powerdown-master-volume: + If present, the power-down pin and I2C power-down functions will + act on the master volume. Otherwise, the functions will act on the + mute commands. + + - st,powerdown-delay-divider: + If present, the bridge power-down time will be divided by the provided + value. If not specified, a divider of 1 will be used. Allowed values + are 1, 2, 4, 8, 16, 32, 64 and 128. + This property has to be specified as '/bits/ 8' value. + +Example: + +codec: sta350@38 { + compatible = "st,sta350"; + reg = <0x1c>; + reset-gpios = <&gpio1 19 0>; + power-down-gpios = <&gpio1 16 0>; + st,output-conf = /bits/ 8 <0x3>; // set output to 2-channel + // (full-bridge) power, + // 2-channel data-out + st,ch1-output-mapping = /bits/ 8 <0>; // set channel 1 output ch 1 + st,ch2-output-mapping = /bits/ 8 <0>; // set channel 2 output ch 1 + st,ch3-output-mapping = /bits/ 8 <0>; // set channel 3 output ch 1 + st,max-power-correction; // enables power bridge + // correction for THD reduction + // near maximum power output + st,invalid-input-detect-mute; // mute if no valid digital + // audio signal is provided. +}; diff --git a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/spi/fsl-spi.txt b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/spi/fsl-spi.txt index b032dd76e9d..a2331372068 100644 --- a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/spi/fsl-spi.txt +++ b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/spi/fsl-spi.txt @@ -42,6 +42,10 @@ Required properties: - interrupts : should contain eSPI interrupt, the device has one interrupt. - fsl,espi-num-chipselects : the number of the chipselect signals. +Optional properties: +- fsl,csbef: chip select assertion time in bits before frame starts +- fsl,csaft: chip select negation time in bits after frame ends + Example: spi@110000 { #address-cells = <1>; @@ -51,4 +55,6 @@ Example: interrupts = <53 0x2>; interrupt-parent = <&mpic>; fsl,espi-num-chipselects = <4>; + fsl,csbef = <1>; + fsl,csaft = <1>; }; diff --git a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/spi/spi-bus.txt b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/spi/spi-bus.txt index e5a4d1b4acf..bbaa857dd68 100644 --- a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/spi/spi-bus.txt +++ b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/spi/spi-bus.txt @@ -55,13 +55,15 @@ contain the following properties. chip select active high - spi-3wire - (optional) Empty property indicating device requires 3-wire mode. +- spi-lsb-first - (optional) Empty property indicating device requires + LSB first mode. - spi-tx-bus-width - (optional) The bus width(number of data wires) that used for MOSI. Defaults to 1 if not present. - spi-rx-bus-width - (optional) The bus width(number of data wires) that used for MISO. Defaults to 1 if not present. Some SPI controllers and devices support Dual and Quad SPI transfer mode. -It allows data in SPI system transfered in 2 wires(DUAL) or 4 wires(QUAD). +It allows data in the SPI system to be transferred in 2 wires(DUAL) or 4 wires(QUAD). Now the value that spi-tx-bus-width and spi-rx-bus-width can receive is only 1(SINGLE), 2(DUAL) and 4(QUAD). Dual/Quad mode is not allowed when 3-wire mode is used. diff --git a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/spi/spi-cadence.txt b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/spi/spi-cadence.txt new file mode 100644 index 00000000000..94f09141a4f --- /dev/null +++ b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/spi/spi-cadence.txt @@ -0,0 +1,31 @@ +Cadence SPI controller Device Tree Bindings +------------------------------------------- + +Required properties: +- compatible : Should be "cdns,spi-r1p6" or "xlnx,zynq-spi-r1p6". +- reg : Physical base address and size of SPI registers map. +- interrupts : Property with a value describing the interrupt + number. +- interrupt-parent : Must be core interrupt controller +- clock-names : List of input clock names - "ref_clk", "pclk" + (See clock bindings for details). +- clocks : Clock phandles (see clock bindings for details). + +Optional properties: +- num-cs : Number of chip selects used. + If a decoder is used, this will be the number of + chip selects after the decoder. +- is-decoded-cs : Flag to indicate whether decoder is used or not. + +Example: + + spi@e0007000 { + compatible = "xlnx,zynq-spi-r1p6"; + clock-names = "ref_clk", "pclk"; + clocks = <&clkc 26>, <&clkc 35>; + interrupt-parent = <&intc>; + interrupts = <0 49 4>; + num-cs = <4>; + is-decoded-cs = <0>; + reg = <0xe0007000 0x1000>; + } ; diff --git a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/spi/spi-dw.txt b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/spi/spi-dw.txt new file mode 100644 index 00000000000..7b63ed60199 --- /dev/null +++ b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/spi/spi-dw.txt @@ -0,0 +1,24 @@ +Synopsys DesignWare SPI master + +Required properties: +- compatible: should be "snps,designware-spi" +- #address-cells: see spi-bus.txt +- #size-cells: see spi-bus.txt +- reg: address and length of the spi master registers +- interrupts: should contain one interrupt +- clocks: spi clock phandle +- num-cs: see spi-bus.txt + +Optional properties: +- cs-gpios: see spi-bus.txt + +Example: + +spi: spi@4020a000 { + compatible = "snps,designware-spi"; + interrupts = <11 1>; + reg = <0x4020a000 0x1000>; + clocks = <&pclk>; + num-cs = <2>; + cs-gpios = <&banka 0 0>; +}; diff --git a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/spmi/spmi.txt b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/spmi/spmi.txt index 462a42fb3a1..4bb10d161a2 100644 --- a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/spmi/spmi.txt +++ b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/spmi/spmi.txt @@ -26,7 +26,7 @@ Each child node must have one and only one 'reg' entry of type SPMI_USID. reg = <...>; #address-cells = <2>; - #size-cells <0>; + #size-cells = <0>; child@0 { compatible = "..."; diff --git a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/staging/imx-drm/fsl-imx-drm.txt b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/staging/imx-drm/fsl-imx-drm.txt index 3be5ce7a965..e75f0e549ff 100644 --- a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/staging/imx-drm/fsl-imx-drm.txt +++ b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/staging/imx-drm/fsl-imx-drm.txt @@ -61,6 +61,7 @@ Required properties: Optional properties: - interface_pix_fmt: How this display is connected to the display interface. Currently supported types: "rgb24", "rgb565", "bgr666" + and "lvds666". - edid: verbatim EDID data block describing attached display. - ddc: phandle describing the i2c bus handling the display data channel diff --git a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/timer/allwinner,sun5i-a13-hstimer.txt b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/timer/allwinner,sun5i-a13-hstimer.txt index 7c26154b8bb..27cfc7d7ccd 100644 --- a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/timer/allwinner,sun5i-a13-hstimer.txt +++ b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/timer/allwinner,sun5i-a13-hstimer.txt @@ -9,6 +9,9 @@ Required properties: one) - clocks: phandle to the source clock (usually the AHB clock) +Optionnal properties: +- resets: phandle to a reset controller asserting the timer + Example: timer@01c60000 { @@ -19,4 +22,5 @@ timer@01c60000 { <0 53 1>, <0 54 1>; clocks = <&ahb1_gates 19>; + resets = <&ahb1rst 19>; }; diff --git a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/timer/efm32,timer.txt b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/timer/energymicro,efm32-timer.txt index 97a568f696c..e502c11b221 100644 --- a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/timer/efm32,timer.txt +++ b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/timer/energymicro,efm32-timer.txt @@ -6,7 +6,7 @@ channels and can be used as PWM or Quadrature Decoder. Available clock sources are the cpu's HFPERCLK (with a 10-bit prescaler) or an external pin. Required properties: -- compatible : Should be efm32,timer +- compatible : Should be "energymicro,efm32-timer" - reg : Address and length of the register set - clocks : Should contain a reference to the HFPERCLK @@ -16,7 +16,7 @@ Optional properties: Example: timer@40010c00 { - compatible = "efm32,timer"; + compatible = "energymicro,efm32-timer"; reg = <0x40010c00 0x400>; interrupts = <14>; clocks = <&cmu clk_HFPERCLKTIMER3>; diff --git a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/timer/fsl,ftm-timer.txt b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/timer/fsl,ftm-timer.txt new file mode 100644 index 00000000000..aa8c40230e5 --- /dev/null +++ b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/timer/fsl,ftm-timer.txt @@ -0,0 +1,31 @@ +Freescale FlexTimer Module (FTM) Timer + +Required properties: + +- compatible : should be "fsl,ftm-timer" +- reg : Specifies base physical address and size of the register sets for the + clock event device and clock source device. +- interrupts : Should be the clock event device interrupt. +- clocks : The clocks provided by the SoC to drive the timer, must contain an + entry for each entry in clock-names. +- clock-names : Must include the following entries: + o "ftm-evt" + o "ftm-src" + o "ftm-evt-counter-en" + o "ftm-src-counter-en" +- big-endian: One boolean property, the big endian mode will be in use if it is + present, or the little endian mode will be in use for all the device registers. + +Example: +ftm: ftm@400b8000 { + compatible = "fsl,ftm-timer"; + reg = <0x400b8000 0x1000 0x400b9000 0x1000>; + interrupts = <0 44 IRQ_TYPE_LEVEL_HIGH>; + clock-names = "ftm-evt", "ftm-src", + "ftm-evt-counter-en", "ftm-src-counter-en"; + clocks = <&clks VF610_CLK_FTM2>, + <&clks VF610_CLK_FTM3>, + <&clks VF610_CLK_FTM2_EXT_FIX_EN>, + <&clks VF610_CLK_FTM3_EXT_FIX_EN>; + big-endian; +}; diff --git a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/usb/ci-hdrc-qcom.txt b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/usb/ci-hdrc-qcom.txt new file mode 100644 index 00000000000..f2899b55093 --- /dev/null +++ b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/usb/ci-hdrc-qcom.txt @@ -0,0 +1,17 @@ +Qualcomm CI13xxx (Chipidea) USB controllers + +Required properties: +- compatible: should contain "qcom,ci-hdrc" +- reg: offset and length of the register set in the memory map +- interrupts: interrupt-specifier for the controller interrupt. +- usb-phy: phandle for the PHY device +- dr_mode: Should be "peripheral" + +Examples: + gadget@f9a55000 { + compatible = "qcom,ci-hdrc"; + reg = <0xf9a55000 0x400>; + dr_mode = "peripheral"; + interrupts = <0 134 0>; + usb-phy = <&usbphy0>; + }; diff --git a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/usb/dwc2.txt b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/usb/dwc2.txt index b8b6871f116..467ddd15d40 100644 --- a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/usb/dwc2.txt +++ b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/usb/dwc2.txt @@ -13,7 +13,7 @@ Refer to clk/clock-bindings.txt for generic clock consumer properties Optional properties: - phys: phy provider specifier -- phy-names: shall be "device" +- phy-names: shall be "usb2-phy" Refer to phy/phy-bindings.txt for generic phy consumer properties Example: diff --git a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/usb/ehci-orion.txt b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/usb/ehci-orion.txt index 6bc09ec14c4..17c3bc858b8 100644 --- a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/usb/ehci-orion.txt +++ b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/usb/ehci-orion.txt @@ -6,6 +6,11 @@ Required properties: region. - interrupts: The EHCI interrupt +Optional properties: +- clocks: reference to the clock +- phys: reference to the USB PHY +- phy-names: name of the USB PHY, should be "usb" + Example: ehci@50000 { diff --git a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/usb/exynos-usb.txt b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/usb/exynos-usb.txt index d967ba16de6..a3b5990d0f2 100644 --- a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/usb/exynos-usb.txt +++ b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/usb/exynos-usb.txt @@ -12,6 +12,13 @@ Required properties: - interrupts: interrupt number to the cpu. - clocks: from common clock binding: handle to usb clock. - clock-names: from common clock binding: Shall be "usbhost". + - port: if in the SoC there are EHCI phys, they should be listed here. + One phy per port. Each port should have following entries: + - reg: port number on EHCI controller, e.g + On Exynos5250, port 0 is USB2.0 otg phy + port 1 is HSIC phy0 + port 2 is HSIC phy1 + - phys: from the *Generic PHY* bindings; specifying phy used by port. Optional properties: - samsung,vbus-gpio: if present, specifies the GPIO that @@ -27,6 +34,14 @@ Example: clocks = <&clock 285>; clock-names = "usbhost"; + + #address-cells = <1>; + #size-cells = <0>; + port@0 { + reg = <0>; + phys = <&usb2phy 1>; + status = "disabled"; + }; }; OHCI @@ -38,6 +53,13 @@ Required properties: - interrupts: interrupt number to the cpu. - clocks: from common clock binding: handle to usb clock. - clock-names: from common clock binding: Shall be "usbhost". + - port: if in the SoC there are OHCI phys, they should be listed here. + One phy per port. Each port should have following entries: + - reg: port number on OHCI controller, e.g + On Exynos5250, port 0 is USB2.0 otg phy + port 1 is HSIC phy0 + port 2 is HSIC phy1 + - phys: from the *Generic PHY* bindings, specifying phy used by port. Example: usb@12120000 { @@ -47,6 +69,15 @@ Example: clocks = <&clock 285>; clock-names = "usbhost"; + + #address-cells = <1>; + #size-cells = <0>; + port@0 { + reg = <0>; + phys = <&usb2phy 1>; + status = "disabled"; + }; + }; DWC3 diff --git a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/usb/gr-udc.txt b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/usb/gr-udc.txt index 0c5118f7a91..e9445224fab 100644 --- a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/usb/gr-udc.txt +++ b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/usb/gr-udc.txt @@ -12,17 +12,23 @@ Required properties: - reg : Address and length of the register set for the device -- interrupts : Interrupt numbers for this device +- interrupts : Interrupt numbers for this device. Either one interrupt number + for all interrupts, or one for status related interrupts, one for IN + endpoint related interrupts and one for OUT endpoint related interrupts. Optional properties: -- epobufsizes : An array of buffer sizes for OUT endpoints. If the property is - not present, or for endpoints outside of the array, 1024 is assumed by - the driver. - -- epibufsizes : An array of buffer sizes for IN endpoints. If the property is - not present, or for endpoints outside of the array, 1024 is assumed by - the driver. +- epobufsizes : Array of buffer sizes for OUT endpoints when they differ + from the default size of 1024. The array is indexed by the OUT endpoint + number. If the property is present it typically contains one entry for + each OUT endpoint of the core. Fewer entries overrides the default sizes + only for as many endpoints as the array contains. + +- epibufsizes : Array of buffer sizes for IN endpoints when they differ + from the default size of 1024. The array is indexed by the IN endpoint + number. If the property is present it typically contains one entry for + each IN endpoint of the core. Fewer entries overrides the default sizes + only for as many endpoints as the array contains. For further information look in the documentation for the GLIB IP core library: http://www.gaisler.com/products/grlib/grip.pdf diff --git a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/usb/msm-hsusb.txt b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/usb/msm-hsusb.txt index 5ea26c631e3..2826f2af503 100644 --- a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/usb/msm-hsusb.txt +++ b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/usb/msm-hsusb.txt @@ -15,3 +15,81 @@ Example EHCI controller device node: usb-phy = <&usb_otg>; }; +USB PHY with optional OTG: + +Required properties: +- compatible: Should contain: + "qcom,usb-otg-ci" for chipsets with ChipIdea 45nm PHY + "qcom,usb-otg-snps" for chipsets with Synopsys 28nm PHY + +- regs: Offset and length of the register set in the memory map +- interrupts: interrupt-specifier for the OTG interrupt. + +- clocks: A list of phandle + clock-specifier pairs for the + clocks listed in clock-names +- clock-names: Should contain the following: + "phy" USB PHY reference clock + "core" Protocol engine clock + "iface" Interface bus clock + "alt_core" Protocol engine clock for targets with asynchronous + reset methodology. (optional) + +- vdccx-supply: phandle to the regulator for the vdd supply for + digital circuit operation. +- v1p8-supply: phandle to the regulator for the 1.8V supply +- v3p3-supply: phandle to the regulator for the 3.3V supply + +- resets: A list of phandle + reset-specifier pairs for the + resets listed in reset-names +- reset-names: Should contain the following: + "phy" USB PHY controller reset + "link" USB LINK controller reset + +- qcom,otg-control: OTG control (VBUS and ID notifications) can be one of + 1 - PHY control + 2 - PMIC control + +Optional properties: +- dr_mode: One of "host", "peripheral" or "otg". Defaults to "otg" + +- qcom,phy-init-sequence: PHY configuration sequence values. This is related to Device + Mode Eye Diagram test. Start address at which these values will be + written is ULPI_EXT_VENDOR_SPECIFIC. Value of -1 is reserved as + "do not overwrite default value at this address". + For example: qcom,phy-init-sequence = < -1 0x63 >; + Will update only value at address ULPI_EXT_VENDOR_SPECIFIC + 1. + +- qcom,phy-num: Select number of pyco-phy to use, can be one of + 0 - PHY one, default + 1 - Second PHY + Some platforms may have configuration to allow USB + controller work with any of the two HSPHYs present. + +- qcom,vdd-levels: This property must be a list of three integer values + (no, min, max) where each value represents either a voltage + in microvolts or a value corresponding to voltage corner. + +Example HSUSB OTG controller device node: + + usb@f9a55000 { + compatible = "qcom,usb-otg-snps"; + reg = <0xf9a55000 0x400>; + interrupts = <0 134 0>; + dr_mode = "peripheral"; + + clocks = <&gcc GCC_XO_CLK>, <&gcc GCC_USB_HS_SYSTEM_CLK>, + <&gcc GCC_USB_HS_AHB_CLK>; + + clock-names = "phy", "core", "iface"; + + vddcx-supply = <&pm8841_s2_corner>; + v1p8-supply = <&pm8941_l6>; + v3p3-supply = <&pm8941_l24>; + + resets = <&gcc GCC_USB2A_PHY_BCR>, <&gcc GCC_USB_HS_BCR>; + reset-names = "phy", "link"; + + qcom,otg-control = <1>; + qcom,phy-init-sequence = < -1 0x63 >; + qcom,vdd-levels = <1 5 7>; + }; diff --git a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/usb/omap-usb.txt b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/usb/omap-usb.txt index 38b2faec419..38d9bb8507c 100644 --- a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/usb/omap-usb.txt +++ b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/usb/omap-usb.txt @@ -44,7 +44,9 @@ Board specific device node entry }; OMAP DWC3 GLUE - - compatible : Should be "ti,dwc3" + - compatible : Should be + * "ti,dwc3" for OMAP5 and DRA7 + * "ti,am437x-dwc3" for AM437x - ti,hwmods : Should be "usb_otg_ss" - reg : Address and length of the register set for the device. - interrupts : The irq number of this device that is used to interrupt the diff --git a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/usb/usb-ehci.txt b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/usb/usb-ehci.txt index ff151ec084c..43c1a4e0676 100644 --- a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/usb/usb-ehci.txt +++ b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/usb/usb-ehci.txt @@ -15,6 +15,7 @@ Optional properties: - clocks : a list of phandle + clock specifier pairs - phys : phandle + phy specifier pair - phy-names : "usb" + - resets : phandle + reset specifier pair Example (Sequoia 440EPx): ehci@e0000300 { diff --git a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/usb/usb-ohci.txt b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/usb/usb-ohci.txt index 45f67d91e88..b968a1aea99 100644 --- a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/usb/usb-ohci.txt +++ b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/usb/usb-ohci.txt @@ -12,6 +12,7 @@ Optional properties: - clocks : a list of phandle + clock specifier pairs - phys : phandle + phy specifier pair - phy-names : "usb" +- resets : phandle + reset specifier pair Example: diff --git a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/usb/usb-xhci.txt b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/usb/usb-xhci.txt index 90f8f607d12..5a79377c6a9 100644 --- a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/usb/usb-xhci.txt +++ b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/usb/usb-xhci.txt @@ -1,11 +1,17 @@ USB xHCI controllers Required properties: - - compatible: should be "generic-xhci" (deprecated: "xhci-platform"). + - compatible: should be one of "generic-xhci", + "marvell,armada-375-xhci", "marvell,armada-380-xhci", + "renesas,xhci-r8a7790", "renesas,xhci-r8a7791" (deprecated: + "xhci-platform"). - reg: should contain address and length of the standard XHCI register set for the device. - interrupts: one XHCI interrupt should be described here. +Optional property: + - clocks: reference to a clock + Example: usb@f0931000 { compatible = "generic-xhci"; diff --git a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/usb/usb3503.txt b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/usb/usb3503.txt index a018da4a7ad..221ac0dbc67 100644 --- a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/usb/usb3503.txt +++ b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/usb/usb3503.txt @@ -15,6 +15,14 @@ Optional properties: - reset-gpios: Should specify GPIO for reset. - initial-mode: Should specify initial mode. (1 for HUB mode, 2 for STANDBY mode) +- refclk: Clock used for driving REFCLK signal (optional, if not provided + the driver assumes that clock signal is always available, its + rate is specified by REF_SEL pins and a value from the primary + reference clock frequencies table is used) +- refclk-frequency: Frequency of the REFCLK signal as defined by REF_SEL + pins (optional, if not provided, driver will not set rate of the + REFCLK signal and assume that a value from the primary reference + clock frequencies table is used) Examples: usb3503@08 { diff --git a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/vendor-prefixes.txt b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/vendor-prefixes.txt index abc308083ac..5261271046c 100644 --- a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/vendor-prefixes.txt +++ b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/vendor-prefixes.txt @@ -13,6 +13,7 @@ allwinner Allwinner Technology Co., Ltd. altr Altera Corp. amcc Applied Micro Circuits Corporation (APM, formally AMCC) amd Advanced Micro Devices (AMD), Inc. +ams AMS AG amstaos AMS-Taos Inc. apm Applied Micro Circuits Corporation (APM) arm ARM Ltd. @@ -73,12 +74,15 @@ lantiq Lantiq Semiconductor lg LG Corporation linux Linux-specific binding lsi LSI Corp. (LSI Logic) +lltc Linear Technology Corporation marvell Marvell Technology Group Ltd. maxim Maxim Integrated Products +micrel Micrel Inc. microchip Microchip Technology Inc. mosaixtech Mosaix Technologies, Inc. moxa Moxa mpl MPL AG +mundoreader Mundo Reader S.L. mxicy Macronix International Co., Ltd. national National Semiconductor neonode Neonode Inc. @@ -98,6 +102,7 @@ powervr PowerVR (deprecated, use img) qca Qualcomm Atheros, Inc. qcom Qualcomm Technologies, Inc qnap QNAP Systems, Inc. +radxa Radxa raidsonic RaidSonic Technology GmbH ralink Mediatek/Ralink Technology Corp. ramtron Ramtron International @@ -123,10 +128,12 @@ stericsson ST-Ericsson synology Synology, Inc. ti Texas Instruments tlm Trusted Logic Mobility +toradex Toradex AG toshiba Toshiba Corporation toumaz Toumaz usi Universal Scientifc Industrial Co., Ltd. v3 V3 Semiconductor +variscite Variscite Ltd. via VIA Technologies, Inc. voipac Voipac Technologies s.r.o. winbond Winbond Electronics corp. diff --git a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/video/hdmi-connector.txt b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/video/hdmi-connector.txt index ccccc19e257..acd5668b1ce 100644 --- a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/video/hdmi-connector.txt +++ b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/video/hdmi-connector.txt @@ -7,6 +7,7 @@ Required properties: Optional properties: - label: a symbolic name for the connector +- hpd-gpios: HPD GPIO number Required nodes: - Video port for HDMI input diff --git a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/video/lgphilips,lb035q02.txt b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/video/lgphilips,lb035q02.txt new file mode 100644 index 00000000000..1a1e653e540 --- /dev/null +++ b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/video/lgphilips,lb035q02.txt @@ -0,0 +1,33 @@ +LG.Philips LB035Q02 Panel +========================= + +Required properties: +- compatible: "lgphilips,lb035q02" +- enable-gpios: panel enable gpio + +Optional properties: +- label: a symbolic name for the panel + +Required nodes: +- Video port for DPI input + +Example +------- + +lcd-panel: panel@0 { + compatible = "lgphilips,lb035q02"; + reg = <0>; + spi-max-frequency = <100000>; + spi-cpol; + spi-cpha; + + label = "lcd"; + + enable-gpios = <&gpio7 7 0>; + + port { + lcd_in: endpoint { + remote-endpoint = <&dpi_out>; + }; + }; +}; diff --git a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/video/panel-dpi.txt b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/video/panel-dpi.txt new file mode 100644 index 00000000000..a40180b05ba --- /dev/null +++ b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/video/panel-dpi.txt @@ -0,0 +1,45 @@ +Generic MIPI DPI Panel +====================== + +Required properties: +- compatible: "panel-dpi" + +Optional properties: +- label: a symbolic name for the panel +- enable-gpios: panel enable gpio + +Required nodes: +- "panel-timing" containing video timings + (Documentation/devicetree/bindings/video/display-timing.txt) +- Video port for DPI input + +Example +------- + +lcd0: display@0 { + compatible = "samsung,lte430wq-f0c", "panel-dpi"; + label = "lcd"; + + port { + lcd_in: endpoint { + remote-endpoint = <&dpi_out>; + }; + }; + + panel-timing { + clock-frequency = <9200000>; + hactive = <480>; + vactive = <272>; + hfront-porch = <8>; + hback-porch = <4>; + hsync-len = <41>; + vback-porch = <2>; + vfront-porch = <4>; + vsync-len = <10>; + + hsync-active = <0>; + vsync-active = <0>; + de-active = <1>; + pixelclk-active = <1>; + }; +}; diff --git a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/video/sharp,ls037v7dw01.txt b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/video/sharp,ls037v7dw01.txt new file mode 100644 index 00000000000..0cc8981e9d4 --- /dev/null +++ b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/video/sharp,ls037v7dw01.txt @@ -0,0 +1,43 @@ +SHARP LS037V7DW01 TFT-LCD panel +=================================== + +Required properties: +- compatible: "sharp,ls037v7dw01" + +Optional properties: +- label: a symbolic name for the panel +- enable-gpios: a GPIO spec for the optional enable pin. + This pin is the INI pin as specified in the LS037V7DW01.pdf file. +- reset-gpios: a GPIO spec for the optional reset pin. + This pin is the RESB pin as specified in the LS037V7DW01.pdf file. +- mode-gpios: a GPIO + ordered MO, LR, and UD as specified in the LS037V7DW01.pdf file. + +Required nodes: +- Video port for DPI input + +This panel can have zero to five GPIOs to configure to change configuration +between QVGA and VGA mode and the scan direction. As these pins can be also +configured with external pulls, all the GPIOs are considered optional with holes +in the array. + +Example +------- + +Example when connected to a omap2+ based device: + +lcd0: display { + compatible = "sharp,ls037v7dw01"; + power-supply = <&lcd_3v3>; + enable-gpios = <&gpio5 24 GPIO_ACTIVE_HIGH>; /* gpio152, lcd INI */ + reset-gpios = <&gpio5 27 GPIO_ACTIVE_HIGH>; /* gpio155, lcd RESB */ + mode-gpios = <&gpio5 26 GPIO_ACTIVE_HIGH /* gpio154, lcd MO */ + &gpio1 2 GPIO_ACTIVE_HIGH /* gpio2, lcd LR */ + &gpio1 3 GPIO_ACTIVE_HIGH>; /* gpio3, lcd UD */ + + port { + lcd_in: endpoint { + remote-endpoint = <&dpi_out>; + }; + }; +}; diff --git a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/video/ti,omap4-dss.txt b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/video/ti,omap4-dss.txt index f85d6fcfa70..b8c29fbd1fb 100644 --- a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/video/ti,omap4-dss.txt +++ b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/video/ti,omap4-dss.txt @@ -109,3 +109,7 @@ Required properties: Optional nodes: - Video port for HDMI output + +HDMI Endpoint optional properties: +- lanes: list of 8 pin numbers for the HDMI lanes: CLK+, CLK-, D0+, D0-, + D1+, D1-, D2+, D2-. (default: 0,1,2,3,4,5,6,7) diff --git a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/video/ti,omap5-dss.txt b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/video/ti,omap5-dss.txt new file mode 100644 index 00000000000..38ffc8fcd81 --- /dev/null +++ b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/video/ti,omap5-dss.txt @@ -0,0 +1,96 @@ +Texas Instruments OMAP5 Display Subsystem +========================================= + +See Documentation/devicetree/bindings/video/ti,omap-dss.txt for generic +description about OMAP Display Subsystem bindings. + +DSS Core +-------- + +Required properties: +- compatible: "ti,omap5-dss" +- reg: address and length of the register space +- ti,hwmods: "dss_core" +- clocks: handle to fclk +- clock-names: "fck" + +Required nodes: +- DISPC + +Optional nodes: +- DSS Submodules: RFBI, DSI, HDMI +- Video port for DPI output + +DPI Endpoint required properties: +- data-lines: number of lines used + + +DISPC +----- + +Required properties: +- compatible: "ti,omap5-dispc" +- reg: address and length of the register space +- ti,hwmods: "dss_dispc" +- interrupts: the DISPC interrupt +- clocks: handle to fclk +- clock-names: "fck" + + +RFBI +---- + +Required properties: +- compatible: "ti,omap5-rfbi" +- reg: address and length of the register space +- ti,hwmods: "dss_rfbi" +- clocks: handles to fclk and iclk +- clock-names: "fck", "ick" + +Optional nodes: +- Video port for RFBI output +- RFBI controlled peripherals + + +DSI +--- + +Required properties: +- compatible: "ti,omap5-dsi" +- reg: addresses and lengths of the register spaces for 'proto', 'phy' and 'pll' +- reg-names: "proto", "phy", "pll" +- interrupts: the DSI interrupt line +- ti,hwmods: "dss_dsi1" or "dss_dsi2" +- vdd-supply: power supply for DSI +- clocks: handles to fclk and pll clock +- clock-names: "fck", "sys_clk" + +Optional nodes: +- Video port for DSI output +- DSI controlled peripherals + +DSI Endpoint required properties: +- lanes: list of pin numbers for the DSI lanes: CLK+, CLK-, DATA0+, DATA0-, + DATA1+, DATA1-, ... + + +HDMI +---- + +Required properties: +- compatible: "ti,omap5-hdmi" +- reg: addresses and lengths of the register spaces for 'wp', 'pll', 'phy', + 'core' +- reg-names: "wp", "pll", "phy", "core" +- interrupts: the HDMI interrupt line +- ti,hwmods: "dss_hdmi" +- vdda-supply: vdda power supply +- clocks: handles to fclk and pll clock +- clock-names: "fck", "sys_clk" + +Optional nodes: +- Video port for HDMI output + +HDMI Endpoint optional properties: +- lanes: list of 8 pin numbers for the HDMI lanes: CLK+, CLK-, D0+, D0-, + D1+, D1-, D2+, D2-. (default: 0,1,2,3,4,5,6,7) diff --git a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/video/toppoly,td028ttec1.txt b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/video/toppoly,td028ttec1.txt new file mode 100644 index 00000000000..7175dc3740a --- /dev/null +++ b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/video/toppoly,td028ttec1.txt @@ -0,0 +1,30 @@ +Toppoly TD028TTEC1 Panel +======================== + +Required properties: +- compatible: "toppoly,td028ttec1" + +Optional properties: +- label: a symbolic name for the panel + +Required nodes: +- Video port for DPI input + +Example +------- + +lcd-panel: td028ttec1@0 { + compatible = "toppoly,td028ttec1"; + reg = <0>; + spi-max-frequency = <100000>; + spi-cpol; + spi-cpha; + + label = "lcd"; + port { + lcd_in: endpoint { + remote-endpoint = <&dpi_out>; + }; + }; +}; + diff --git a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/video/tpo,td043mtea1.txt b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/video/tpo,td043mtea1.txt new file mode 100644 index 00000000000..ec6d6297516 --- /dev/null +++ b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/video/tpo,td043mtea1.txt @@ -0,0 +1,33 @@ +TPO TD043MTEA1 Panel +==================== + +Required properties: +- compatible: "tpo,td043mtea1" +- reset-gpios: panel reset gpio + +Optional properties: +- label: a symbolic name for the panel + +Required nodes: +- Video port for DPI input + +Example +------- + +lcd-panel: panel@0 { + compatible = "tpo,td043mtea1"; + reg = <0>; + spi-max-frequency = <100000>; + spi-cpol; + spi-cpha; + + label = "lcd"; + + reset-gpios = <&gpio7 7 0>; + + port { + lcd_in: endpoint { + remote-endpoint = <&dpi_out>; + }; + }; +}; diff --git a/Documentation/dma-buf-sharing.txt b/Documentation/dma-buf-sharing.txt index 505e71172ae..67a4087d53f 100644 --- a/Documentation/dma-buf-sharing.txt +++ b/Documentation/dma-buf-sharing.txt @@ -66,7 +66,7 @@ The dma_buf buffer sharing API usage contains the following steps: Exporting modules which do not wish to provide any specific name may use the helper define 'dma_buf_export()', with the same arguments as above, but - without the last argument; a __FILE__ pre-processor directive will be + without the last argument; a KBUILD_MODNAME pre-processor directive will be inserted in place of 'exp_name' instead. 2. Userspace gets a handle to pass around to potential buffer-users @@ -217,7 +217,7 @@ NOTES: and then allow further {map,unmap}_dma_buf operations from any buffer-user from the migrated backing-storage. - If the exporter cannot fulfil the backing-storage constraints of the new + If the exporter cannot fulfill the backing-storage constraints of the new buffer-user device as requested, dma_buf_attach() would return an error to denote non-compatibility of the new buffer-sharing request with the current buffer. @@ -352,7 +352,7 @@ Being able to mmap an export dma-buf buffer object has 2 main use-cases: No special interfaces, userspace simply calls mmap on the dma-buf fd. -2. Supporting existing mmap interfaces in exporters +2. Supporting existing mmap interfaces in importers Similar to the motivation for kernel cpu access it is again important that the userspace code of a given importing subsystem can use the same interfaces diff --git a/Documentation/driver-model/devres.txt b/Documentation/driver-model/devres.txt index 4f7897e99cb..89472558011 100644 --- a/Documentation/driver-model/devres.txt +++ b/Documentation/driver-model/devres.txt @@ -236,6 +236,9 @@ certainly invest a bit more effort into libata core layer). MEM devm_kzalloc() devm_kfree() + devm_kmemdup() + devm_get_free_pages() + devm_free_pages() IIO devm_iio_device_alloc() @@ -308,3 +311,10 @@ SLAVE DMA ENGINE SPI devm_spi_register_master() + +GPIO + devm_gpiod_get() + devm_gpiod_get_index() + devm_gpiod_get_optional() + devm_gpiod_get_index_optional() + devm_gpiod_put() diff --git a/Documentation/dynamic-debug-howto.txt b/Documentation/dynamic-debug-howto.txt index 46325eb2ea7..9417871b875 100644 --- a/Documentation/dynamic-debug-howto.txt +++ b/Documentation/dynamic-debug-howto.txt @@ -321,7 +321,7 @@ nullarbor:~ # echo -n 'func svc_process -p' > nullarbor:~ # echo -n 'format "nfsd: READ" +p' > <debugfs>/dynamic_debug/control -// enable messages in files of which the pathes include string "usb" +// enable messages in files of which the paths include string "usb" nullarbor:~ # echo -n '*usb* +p' > <debugfs>/dynamic_debug/control // enable all messages diff --git a/Documentation/edac.txt b/Documentation/edac.txt index cb4c2cefd45..73fff13e848 100644 --- a/Documentation/edac.txt +++ b/Documentation/edac.txt @@ -550,7 +550,7 @@ installs itself as: /sys/devices/systm/edac/test-instance in this directory are various controls, a symlink and one or more 'instance' -directorys. +directories. The standard default controls are: diff --git a/Documentation/efi-stub.txt b/Documentation/efi-stub.txt index c628788d5b4..7747024d3bb 100644 --- a/Documentation/efi-stub.txt +++ b/Documentation/efi-stub.txt @@ -1,13 +1,21 @@ The EFI Boot Stub --------------------------- -On the x86 platform, a bzImage can masquerade as a PE/COFF image, -thereby convincing EFI firmware loaders to load it as an EFI -executable. The code that modifies the bzImage header, along with the -EFI-specific entry point that the firmware loader jumps to are -collectively known as the "EFI boot stub", and live in +On the x86 and ARM platforms, a kernel zImage/bzImage can masquerade +as a PE/COFF image, thereby convincing EFI firmware loaders to load +it as an EFI executable. The code that modifies the bzImage header, +along with the EFI-specific entry point that the firmware loader +jumps to are collectively known as the "EFI boot stub", and live in arch/x86/boot/header.S and arch/x86/boot/compressed/eboot.c, -respectively. +respectively. For ARM the EFI stub is implemented in +arch/arm/boot/compressed/efi-header.S and +arch/arm/boot/compressed/efi-stub.c. EFI stub code that is shared +between architectures is in drivers/firmware/efi/efi-stub-helper.c. + +For arm64, there is no compressed kernel support, so the Image itself +masquerades as a PE/COFF image and the EFI stub is linked into the +kernel. The arm64 EFI stub lives in arch/arm64/kernel/efi-entry.S +and arch/arm64/kernel/efi-stub.c. By using the EFI boot stub it's possible to boot a Linux kernel without the use of a conventional EFI boot loader, such as grub or @@ -23,7 +31,10 @@ The bzImage located in arch/x86/boot/bzImage must be copied to the EFI System Partition (ESP) and renamed with the extension ".efi". Without the extension the EFI firmware loader will refuse to execute it. It's not possible to execute bzImage.efi from the usual Linux file systems -because EFI firmware doesn't have support for them. +because EFI firmware doesn't have support for them. For ARM the +arch/arm/boot/zImage should be copied to the system partition, and it +may not need to be renamed. Similarly for arm64, arch/arm64/boot/Image +should be copied but not necessarily renamed. **** Passing kernel parameters from the EFI shell @@ -63,3 +74,11 @@ Notice how bzImage.efi can be specified with a relative path. That's because the image we're executing is interpreted by the EFI shell, which understands relative paths, whereas the rest of the command line is passed to bzImage.efi. + + +**** The "dtb=" option + +For the ARM and arm64 architectures, we also need to be able to provide a +device tree to the kernel. This is done with the "dtb=" command line option, +and is processed in the same manner as the "initrd=" option that is +described above. diff --git a/Documentation/email-clients.txt b/Documentation/email-clients.txt index e9f5daccbd0..4e30ebaa9e5 100644 --- a/Documentation/email-clients.txt +++ b/Documentation/email-clients.txt @@ -201,20 +201,15 @@ To beat some sense out of the internal editor, do this: - Edit your Thunderbird config settings so that it won't use format=flowed. Go to "edit->preferences->advanced->config editor" to bring up the - thunderbird's registry editor, and set "mailnews.send_plaintext_flowed" to - "false". + thunderbird's registry editor. -- Disable HTML Format: Set "mail.identity.id1.compose_html" to "false". +- Set "mailnews.send_plaintext_flowed" to "false" -- Enable "preformat" mode: Set "editor.quotesPreformatted" to "true". +- Set "mailnews.wraplength" from "72" to "0" -- Enable UTF8: Set "prefs.converted-to-utf8" to "true". +- "View" > "Message Body As" > "Plain Text" -- Install the "toggle wordwrap" extension. Download the file from: - https://addons.mozilla.org/thunderbird/addon/2351/ - Then go to "tools->add ons", select "install" at the bottom of the screen, - and browse to where you saved the .xul file. This adds an "Enable - Wordwrap" entry under the Options menu of the message composer. +- "View" > "Character Encoding" > "Unicode (UTF-8)" ~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~ TkRat (GUI) diff --git a/Documentation/fb/sm501.txt b/Documentation/fb/sm501.txt index 8d17aebd264..187f3b3ccb6 100644 --- a/Documentation/fb/sm501.txt +++ b/Documentation/fb/sm501.txt @@ -3,7 +3,7 @@ Configuration: You can pass the following kernel command line options to sm501 videoframebuffer: sm501fb.bpp= SM501 Display driver: - Specifiy bits-per-pixel if not specified by 'mode' + Specify bits-per-pixel if not specified by 'mode' sm501fb.mode= SM501 Display driver: Specify resolution as diff --git a/Documentation/fb/sstfb.txt b/Documentation/fb/sstfb.txt index 550ca775a4c..13db1075e4a 100644 --- a/Documentation/fb/sstfb.txt +++ b/Documentation/fb/sstfb.txt @@ -10,7 +10,7 @@ Introduction The main page is located at <http://sstfb.sourceforge.net>, and if you want the latest version, check out the CVS, as the driver is a work in progress, I feel uncomfortable with releasing tarballs of something - not completely working...Don't worry, it's still more than useable + not completely working...Don't worry, it's still more than usable (I eat my own dog food) Please read the Bug section, and report any success or failure to me diff --git a/Documentation/filesystems/proc.txt b/Documentation/filesystems/proc.txt index 8b9cd8eb3f9..ddc531a74d0 100644 --- a/Documentation/filesystems/proc.txt +++ b/Documentation/filesystems/proc.txt @@ -234,7 +234,7 @@ Table 1-2: Contents of the status files (as of 2.6.30-rc7) ShdPnd bitmap of shared pending signals for the process SigBlk bitmap of blocked signals SigIgn bitmap of ignored signals - SigCgt bitmap of catched signals + SigCgt bitmap of caught signals CapInh bitmap of inheritable capabilities CapPrm bitmap of permitted capabilities CapEff bitmap of effective capabilities @@ -300,7 +300,7 @@ Table 1-4: Contents of the stat files (as of 2.6.30-rc7) pending bitmap of pending signals blocked bitmap of blocked signals sigign bitmap of ignored signals - sigcatch bitmap of catched signals + sigcatch bitmap of caught signals wchan address where process went to sleep 0 (place holder) 0 (place holder) @@ -854,7 +854,8 @@ WritebackTmp: Memory used by FUSE for temporary writeback buffers if strict overcommit accounting is enabled (mode 2 in 'vm.overcommit_memory'). The CommitLimit is calculated with the following formula: - CommitLimit = ('vm.overcommit_ratio' * Physical RAM) + Swap + CommitLimit = ([total RAM pages] - [total huge TLB pages]) * + overcommit_ratio / 100 + [total swap pages] For example, on a system with 1G of physical RAM and 7G of swap with a `vm.overcommit_ratio` of 30 it would yield a CommitLimit of 7.3G. @@ -1245,8 +1246,9 @@ second). The meanings of the columns are as follows, from left to right: The "intr" line gives counts of interrupts serviced since boot time, for each of the possible system interrupts. The first column is the total of all -interrupts serviced; each subsequent column is the total for that particular -interrupt. +interrupts serviced including unnumbered architecture specific interrupts; +each subsequent column is the total for that particular numbered interrupt. +Unnumbered interrupts are not shown, only summed into the total. The "ctxt" line gives the total number of context switches across all CPUs. diff --git a/Documentation/filesystems/sharedsubtree.txt b/Documentation/filesystems/sharedsubtree.txt index 4ede421c968..32a173dd315 100644 --- a/Documentation/filesystems/sharedsubtree.txt +++ b/Documentation/filesystems/sharedsubtree.txt @@ -727,7 +727,7 @@ replicas continue to be exactly same. mkdir -p /tmp/m3 mount --rbind /root /tmp/m3 - I wont' draw the tree..but it has 24 vfsmounts + I won't draw the tree..but it has 24 vfsmounts at step i the number of vfsmounts is V[i] = i*V[i-1]. diff --git a/Documentation/gpio/consumer.txt b/Documentation/gpio/consumer.txt index 09854fe5930..d8abfc31abb 100644 --- a/Documentation/gpio/consumer.txt +++ b/Documentation/gpio/consumer.txt @@ -41,7 +41,7 @@ Both functions return either a valid GPIO descriptor, or an error code checkable with IS_ERR() (they will never return a NULL pointer). -ENOENT will be returned if and only if no GPIO has been assigned to the device/function/index triplet, other error codes are used for cases where a GPIO has been assigned but an error -occured while trying to acquire it. This is useful to discriminate between mere +occurred while trying to acquire it. This is useful to discriminate between mere errors and an absence of GPIO for optional GPIO parameters. Device-managed variants of these functions are also defined: diff --git a/Documentation/gpio/driver.txt b/Documentation/gpio/driver.txt index f73cc7b5dc8..fa9a0a8b373 100644 --- a/Documentation/gpio/driver.txt +++ b/Documentation/gpio/driver.txt @@ -73,6 +73,65 @@ The IRQ portions of the GPIO block are implemented using an irqchip, using the header <linux/irq.h>. So basically such a driver is utilizing two sub- systems simultaneously: gpio and irq. +GPIO irqchips usually fall in one of two categories: + +* CHAINED GPIO irqchips: these are usually the type that is embedded on + an SoC. This means that there is a fast IRQ handler for the GPIOs that + gets called in a chain from the parent IRQ handler, most typically the + system interrupt controller. This means the GPIO irqchip is registered + using irq_set_chained_handler() or the corresponding + gpiochip_set_chained_irqchip() helper function, and the GPIO irqchip + handler will be called immediately from the parent irqchip, while + holding the IRQs disabled. The GPIO irqchip will then end up calling + something like this sequence in its interrupt handler: + + static irqreturn_t tc3589x_gpio_irq(int irq, void *data) + chained_irq_enter(...); + generic_handle_irq(...); + chained_irq_exit(...); + + Chained GPIO irqchips typically can NOT set the .can_sleep flag on + struct gpio_chip, as everything happens directly in the callbacks. + +* NESTED THREADED GPIO irqchips: these are off-chip GPIO expanders and any + other GPIO irqchip residing on the other side of a sleeping bus. Of course + such drivers that need slow bus traffic to read out IRQ status and similar, + traffic which may in turn incur other IRQs to happen, cannot be handled + in a quick IRQ handler with IRQs disabled. Instead they need to spawn a + thread and then mask the parent IRQ line until the interrupt is handled + by the driver. The hallmark of this driver is to call something like + this in its interrupt handler: + + static irqreturn_t tc3589x_gpio_irq(int irq, void *data) + ... + handle_nested_irq(irq); + + The hallmark of threaded GPIO irqchips is that they set the .can_sleep + flag on struct gpio_chip to true, indicating that this chip may sleep + when accessing the GPIOs. + +To help out in handling the set-up and management of GPIO irqchips and the +associated irqdomain and resource allocation callbacks, the gpiolib has +some helpers that can be enabled by selecting the GPIOLIB_IRQCHIP Kconfig +symbol: + +* gpiochip_irqchip_add(): adds an irqchip to a gpiochip. It will pass + the struct gpio_chip* for the chip to all IRQ callbacks, so the callbacks + need to embed the gpio_chip in its state container and obtain a pointer + to the container using container_of(). + (See Documentation/driver-model/design-patterns.txt) + +* gpiochip_set_chained_irqchip(): sets up a chained irq handler for a + gpio_chip from a parent IRQ and passes the struct gpio_chip* as handler + data. (Notice handler data, since the irqchip data is likely used by the + parent irqchip!) This is for the chained type of chip. + +To use the helpers please keep the following in mind: + +- Make sure to assign all relevant members of the struct gpio_chip so that + the irqchip can initialize. E.g. .dev and .can_sleep shall be set up + properly. + It is legal for any IRQ consumer to request an IRQ from any irqchip no matter if that is a combined GPIO+IRQ driver. The basic premise is that gpio_chip and irq_chip are orthogonal, and offering their services independent of each diff --git a/Documentation/hid/uhid.txt b/Documentation/hid/uhid.txt index ee6593608c8..54c8f9706a9 100644 --- a/Documentation/hid/uhid.txt +++ b/Documentation/hid/uhid.txt @@ -125,7 +125,7 @@ the request was handled successfully. read() ------ -read() will return a queued ouput report. These output reports can be of type +read() will return a queued output report. These output reports can be of type UHID_START, UHID_STOP, UHID_OPEN, UHID_CLOSE, UHID_OUTPUT or UHID_OUTPUT_EV. No reaction is required to any of them but you should handle them according to your needs. Only UHID_OUTPUT and UHID_OUTPUT_EV have payloads. diff --git a/Documentation/hsi.txt b/Documentation/hsi.txt new file mode 100644 index 00000000000..6ac6cd51852 --- /dev/null +++ b/Documentation/hsi.txt @@ -0,0 +1,75 @@ +HSI - High-speed Synchronous Serial Interface + +1. Introduction +~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~ + +High Speed Syncronous Interface (HSI) is a fullduplex, low latency protocol, +that is optimized for die-level interconnect between an Application Processor +and a Baseband chipset. It has been specified by the MIPI alliance in 2003 and +implemented by multiple vendors since then. + +The HSI interface supports full duplex communication over multiple channels +(typically 8) and is capable of reaching speeds up to 200 Mbit/s. + +The serial protocol uses two signals, DATA and FLAG as combined data and clock +signals and an additional READY signal for flow control. An additional WAKE +signal can be used to wakeup the chips from standby modes. The signals are +commonly prefixed by AC for signals going from the application die to the +cellular die and CA for signals going the other way around. + ++------------+ +---------------+ +| Cellular | | Application | +| Die | | Die | +| | - - - - - - CAWAKE - - - - - - >| | +| T|------------ CADATA ------------>|R | +| X|------------ CAFLAG ------------>|X | +| |<----------- ACREADY ------------| | +| | | | +| | | | +| |< - - - - - ACWAKE - - - - - - -| | +| R|<----------- ACDATA -------------|T | +| X|<----------- ACFLAG -------------|X | +| |------------ CAREADY ----------->| | +| | | | +| | | | ++------------+ +---------------+ + +2. HSI Subsystem in Linux +~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~ + +In the Linux kernel the hsi subsystem is supposed to be used for HSI devices. +The hsi subsystem contains drivers for hsi controllers including support for +multi-port controllers and provides a generic API for using the HSI ports. + +It also contains HSI client drivers, which make use of the generic API to +implement a protocol used on the HSI interface. These client drivers can +use an arbitrary number of channels. + +3. hsi-char Device +~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~ + +Each port automatically registers a generic client driver called hsi_char, +which provides a charecter device for userspace representing the HSI port. +It can be used to communicate via HSI from userspace. Userspace may +configure the hsi_char device using the following ioctl commands: + +* HSC_RESET: + - flush the HSI port + +* HSC_SET_PM + - enable or disable the client. + +* HSC_SEND_BREAK + - send break + +* HSC_SET_RX + - set RX configuration + +* HSC_GET_RX + - get RX configuration + +* HSC_SET_TX + - set TX configuration + +* HSC_GET_TX + - get TX configuration diff --git a/Documentation/hwmon/emc1403 b/Documentation/hwmon/emc1403 new file mode 100644 index 00000000000..a869b0ef6a9 --- /dev/null +++ b/Documentation/hwmon/emc1403 @@ -0,0 +1,59 @@ +Kernel driver emc1403 +===================== + +Supported chips: + * SMSC / Microchip EMC1402, EMC1412 + Addresses scanned: I2C 0x18, 0x1c, 0x29, 0x4c, 0x4d, 0x5c + Prefix: 'emc1402' + Datasheets: + http://ww1.microchip.com/downloads/en/DeviceDoc/1412.pdf + http://ww1.microchip.com/downloads/en/DeviceDoc/1402.pdf + * SMSC / Microchip EMC1403, EMC1404, EMC1413, EMC1414 + Addresses scanned: I2C 0x18, 0x29, 0x4c, 0x4d + Prefix: 'emc1403', 'emc1404' + Datasheets: + http://ww1.microchip.com/downloads/en/DeviceDoc/1403_1404.pdf + http://ww1.microchip.com/downloads/en/DeviceDoc/1413_1414.pdf + * SMSC / Microchip EMC1422 + Addresses scanned: I2C 0x4c + Prefix: 'emc1422' + Datasheet: + http://ww1.microchip.com/downloads/en/DeviceDoc/1422.pdf + * SMSC / Microchip EMC1423, EMC1424 + Addresses scanned: I2C 0x4c + Prefix: 'emc1423', 'emc1424' + Datasheet: + http://ww1.microchip.com/downloads/en/DeviceDoc/1423_1424.pdf + +Author: + Kalhan Trisal <kalhan.trisal@intel.com + + +Description +----------- + +The Standard Microsystems Corporation (SMSC) / Microchip EMC14xx chips +contain up to four temperature sensors. EMC14x2 support two sensors +(one internal, one external). EMC14x3 support three sensors (one internal, +two external), and EMC14x4 support four sensors (one internal, three +external). + +The chips implement three limits for each sensor: low (tempX_min), high +(tempX_max) and critical (tempX_crit.) The chips also implement an +hysteresis mechanism which applies to all limits. The relative difference +is stored in a single register on the chip, which means that the relative +difference between the limit and its hysteresis is always the same for +all three limits. + +This implementation detail implies the following: +* When setting a limit, its hysteresis will automatically follow, the + difference staying unchanged. For example, if the old critical limit + was 80 degrees C, and the hysteresis was 75 degrees C, and you change + the critical limit to 90 degrees C, then the hysteresis will + automatically change to 85 degrees C. +* The hysteresis values can't be set independently. We decided to make + only temp1_crit_hyst writable, while all other hysteresis attributes + are read-only. Setting temp1_crit_hyst writes the difference between + temp1_crit_hyst and temp1_crit into the chip, and the same relative + hysteresis applies automatically to all other limits. +* The limits should be set before the hysteresis. diff --git a/Documentation/hwmon/hwmon-kernel-api.txt b/Documentation/hwmon/hwmon-kernel-api.txt new file mode 100644 index 00000000000..2ecdbfc85ec --- /dev/null +++ b/Documentation/hwmon/hwmon-kernel-api.txt @@ -0,0 +1,107 @@ +The Linux Hardware Monitoring kernel API. +========================================= + +Guenter Roeck + +Introduction +------------ + +This document describes the API that can be used by hardware monitoring +drivers that want to use the hardware monitoring framework. + +This document does not describe what a hardware monitoring (hwmon) Driver or +Device is. It also does not describe the API which can be used by user space +to communicate with a hardware monitoring device. If you want to know this +then please read the following file: Documentation/hwmon/sysfs-interface. + +For additional guidelines on how to write and improve hwmon drivers, please +also read Documentation/hwmon/submitting-patches. + +The API +------- +Each hardware monitoring driver must #include <linux/hwmon.h> and, in most +cases, <linux/hwmon-sysfs.h>. linux/hwmon.h declares the following +register/unregister functions: + +struct device *hwmon_device_register(struct device *dev); +struct device * +hwmon_device_register_with_groups(struct device *dev, const char *name, + void *drvdata, + const struct attribute_group **groups); + +struct device * +devm_hwmon_device_register_with_groups(struct device *dev, + const char *name, void *drvdata, + const struct attribute_group **groups); + +void hwmon_device_unregister(struct device *dev); +void devm_hwmon_device_unregister(struct device *dev); + +hwmon_device_register registers a hardware monitoring device. The parameter +of this function is a pointer to the parent device. +This function returns a pointer to the newly created hardware monitoring device +or PTR_ERR for failure. If this registration function is used, hardware +monitoring sysfs attributes are expected to have been created and attached to +the parent device prior to calling hwmon_device_register. A name attribute must +have been created by the caller. + +hwmon_device_register_with_groups is similar to hwmon_device_register. However, +it has additional parameters. The name parameter is a pointer to the hwmon +device name. The registration function wil create a name sysfs attribute +pointing to this name. The drvdata parameter is the pointer to the local +driver data. hwmon_device_register_with_groups will attach this pointer +to the newly allocated hwmon device. The pointer can be retrieved by the driver +using dev_get_drvdata() on the hwmon device pointer. The groups parameter is +a pointer to a list of sysfs attribute groups. The list must be NULL terminated. +hwmon_device_register_with_groups creates the hwmon device with name attribute +as well as all sysfs attributes attached to the hwmon device. + +devm_hwmon_device_register_with_groups is similar to +hwmon_device_register_with_groups. However, it is device managed, meaning the +hwmon device does not have to be removed explicitly by the removal function. + +hwmon_device_unregister deregisters a registered hardware monitoring device. +The parameter of this function is the pointer to the registered hardware +monitoring device structure. This function must be called from the driver +remove function if the hardware monitoring device was registered with +hwmon_device_register or with hwmon_device_register_with_groups. + +devm_hwmon_device_unregister does not normally have to be called. It is only +needed for error handling, and only needed if the driver probe fails after +the call to devm_hwmon_device_register_with_groups. + +The header file linux/hwmon-sysfs.h provides a number of useful macros to +declare and use hardware monitoring sysfs attributes. + +In many cases, you can use the exsting define DEVICE_ATTR to declare such +attributes. This is feasible if an attribute has no additional context. However, +in many cases there will be additional information such as a sensor index which +will need to be passed to the sysfs attribute handling function. + +SENSOR_DEVICE_ATTR and SENSOR_DEVICE_ATTR_2 can be used to define attributes +which need such additional context information. SENSOR_DEVICE_ATTR requires +one additional argument, SENSOR_DEVICE_ATTR_2 requires two. + +SENSOR_DEVICE_ATTR defines a struct sensor_device_attribute variable. +This structure has the following fields. + +struct sensor_device_attribute { + struct device_attribute dev_attr; + int index; +}; + +You can use to_sensor_dev_attr to get the pointer to this structure from the +attribute read or write function. Its parameter is the device to which the +attribute is attached. + +SENSOR_DEVICE_ATTR_2 defines a struct sensor_device_attribute_2 variable, +which is defined as follows. + +struct sensor_device_attribute_2 { + struct device_attribute dev_attr; + u8 index; + u8 nr; +}; + +Use to_sensor_dev_attr_2 to get the pointer to this structure. Its parameter +is the device to which the attribute is attached. diff --git a/Documentation/hwmon/jc42 b/Documentation/hwmon/jc42 index 868d74d6b77..f3893f7440d 100644 --- a/Documentation/hwmon/jc42 +++ b/Documentation/hwmon/jc42 @@ -5,9 +5,12 @@ Supported chips: * Analog Devices ADT7408 Datasheets: http://www.analog.com/static/imported-files/data_sheets/ADT7408.pdf - * Atmel AT30TS00 + * Atmel AT30TS00, AT30TS002A/B, AT30TSE004A Datasheets: http://www.atmel.com/Images/doc8585.pdf + http://www.atmel.com/Images/doc8711.pdf + http://www.atmel.com/Images/Atmel-8852-SEEPROM-AT30TSE002A-Datasheet.pdf + http://www.atmel.com/Images/Atmel-8868-DTS-AT30TSE004A-Datasheet.pdf * IDT TSE2002B3, TSE2002GB2, TS3000B3, TS3000GB2 Datasheets: http://www.idt.com/sites/default/files/documents/IDT_TSE2002B3C_DST_20100512_120303152056.pdf @@ -34,12 +37,13 @@ Supported chips: Datasheet: http://www.onsemi.com/pub_link/Collateral/CAT34TS02-D.PDF http://www.onsemi.com/pub/Collateral/CAT6095-D.PDF - * ST Microelectronics STTS424, STTS424E02, STTS2002, STTS3000 + * ST Microelectronics STTS424, STTS424E02, STTS2002, STTS2004, STTS3000 Datasheets: - http://www.st.com/internet/com/TECHNICAL_RESOURCES/TECHNICAL_LITERATURE/DATASHEET/CD00157556.pdf - http://www.st.com/internet/com/TECHNICAL_RESOURCES/TECHNICAL_LITERATURE/DATASHEET/CD00157558.pdf - http://www.st.com/internet/com/TECHNICAL_RESOURCES/TECHNICAL_LITERATURE/DATASHEET/CD00225278.pdf - http://www.st.com/internet/com/TECHNICAL_RESOURCES/TECHNICAL_LITERATURE/DATA_BRIEF/CD00270920.pdf + http://www.st.com/web/en/resource/technical/document/datasheet/CD00157556.pdf + http://www.st.com/web/en/resource/technical/document/datasheet/CD00157558.pdf + http://www.st.com/web/en/resource/technical/document/datasheet/CD00266638.pdf + http://www.st.com/web/en/resource/technical/document/datasheet/CD00225278.pdf + http://www.st.com/web/en/resource/technical/document/datasheet/DM00076709.pdf * JEDEC JC 42.4 compliant temperature sensor chips Datasheet: http://www.jedec.org/sites/default/files/docs/4_01_04R19.pdf diff --git a/Documentation/hwmon/lm77 b/Documentation/hwmon/lm77 index 57c3a46d637..bfc915fe363 100644 --- a/Documentation/hwmon/lm77 +++ b/Documentation/hwmon/lm77 @@ -18,5 +18,21 @@ sensor incorporates a band-gap type temperature sensor, 10-bit ADC, and a digital comparator with user-programmable upper and lower limit values. -Limits can be set through the Overtemperature Shutdown register and -Hysteresis register. +The LM77 implements 3 limits: low (temp1_min), high (temp1_max) and +critical (temp1_crit.) It also implements an hysteresis mechanism which +applies to all 3 limits. The relative difference is stored in a single +register on the chip, which means that the relative difference between +the limit and its hysteresis is always the same for all 3 limits. + +This implementation detail implies the following: +* When setting a limit, its hysteresis will automatically follow, the + difference staying unchanged. For example, if the old critical limit + was 80 degrees C, and the hysteresis was 75 degrees C, and you change + the critical limit to 90 degrees C, then the hysteresis will + automatically change to 85 degrees C. +* All 3 hysteresis can't be set independently. We decided to make + temp1_crit_hyst writable, while temp1_min_hyst and temp1_max_hyst are + read-only. Setting temp1_crit_hyst writes the difference between + temp1_crit_hyst and temp1_crit into the chip, and the same relative + hysteresis applies automatically to the low and high limits. +* The limits should be set before the hysteresis. diff --git a/Documentation/hwmon/nct6683 b/Documentation/hwmon/nct6683 new file mode 100644 index 00000000000..c1301d4300c --- /dev/null +++ b/Documentation/hwmon/nct6683 @@ -0,0 +1,57 @@ +Kernel driver nct6683 +===================== + +Supported chips: + * Nuvoton NCT6683D + Prefix: 'nct6683' + Addresses scanned: ISA address retrieved from Super I/O registers + Datasheet: Available from Nuvoton upon request + +Authors: + Guenter Roeck <linux@roeck-us.net> + +Description +----------- + +This driver implements support for the Nuvoton NCT6683D eSIO chip. + +The chips implement up to shared 32 temperature and voltage sensors. +It supports up to 16 fan rotation sensors and up to 8 fan control engines. + +Temperatures are measured in degrees Celsius. Measurement resolution is +0.5 degrees C. + +Voltage sensors (also known as IN sensors) report their values in millivolts. + +Fan rotation speeds are reported in RPM (rotations per minute). + +Usage Note +---------- + +Limit register locations on Intel boards with EC firmware version 1.0 +build date 04/03/13 do not match the register locations in the Nuvoton +datasheet. Nuvoton confirms that Intel uses a special firmware version +with different register addresses. The specification describing the Intel +firmware is held under NDA by Nuvoton and Intel and not available +to the public. + +Some of the register locations can be reverse engineered; others are too +well hidden. Given this, writing any values from the operating system is +considered too risky with this firmware and has been disabled. All limits +must all be written from the BIOS. + +The driver has only been tested with the Intel firmware, and by default +only instantiates on Intel boards. To enable it on non-Intel boards, +set the 'force' module parameter to 1. + +Tested Boards and Firmware Versions +----------------------------------- + +The driver has been reported to work with the following boards and +firmware versions. + +Board Firmware version +--------------------------------------------------------------- +Intel DH87RL NCT6683D EC firmware version 1.0 build 04/03/13 +Intel DH87MC NCT6683D EC firmware version 1.0 build 04/03/13 +Intel DB85FL NCT6683D EC firmware version 1.0 build 04/03/13 diff --git a/Documentation/hwmon/sysfs-interface b/Documentation/hwmon/sysfs-interface index 79f8257dd79..2cc95ad4660 100644 --- a/Documentation/hwmon/sysfs-interface +++ b/Documentation/hwmon/sysfs-interface @@ -327,6 +327,13 @@ temp[1-*]_max_hyst from the max value. RW +temp[1-*]_min_hyst + Temperature hysteresis value for min limit. + Unit: millidegree Celsius + Must be reported as an absolute temperature, NOT a delta + from the min value. + RW + temp[1-*]_input Temperature input value. Unit: millidegree Celsius RO @@ -362,6 +369,13 @@ temp[1-*]_lcrit Temperature critical min value, typically lower than Unit: millidegree Celsius RW +temp[1-*]_lcrit_hyst + Temperature hysteresis value for critical min limit. + Unit: millidegree Celsius + Must be reported as an absolute temperature, NOT a delta + from the critical min value. + RW + temp[1-*]_offset Temperature offset which is added to the temperature reading by the chip. diff --git a/Documentation/input/alps.txt b/Documentation/input/alps.txt index e544c7ff8cf..90bca6f988e 100644 --- a/Documentation/input/alps.txt +++ b/Documentation/input/alps.txt @@ -94,7 +94,7 @@ PS/2 packet format Note that the device never signals overflow condition. -ALPS Absolute Mode - Protocol Verion 1 +ALPS Absolute Mode - Protocol Version 1 -------------------------------------- byte 0: 1 0 0 0 1 x9 x8 x7 diff --git a/Documentation/input/input.txt b/Documentation/input/input.txt index 666c06c5ab0..0acfddbe202 100644 --- a/Documentation/input/input.txt +++ b/Documentation/input/input.txt @@ -226,7 +226,7 @@ And so on up to js31. ~~~~~~~~~~~ evdev is the generic input event interface. It passes the events generated in the kernel straight to the program, with timestamps. The -API is still evolving, but should be useable now. It's described in +API is still evolving, but should be usable now. It's described in section 5. This should be the way for GPM and X to get keyboard and mouse diff --git a/Documentation/java.txt b/Documentation/java.txt index e6a72328154..418020584cc 100644 --- a/Documentation/java.txt +++ b/Documentation/java.txt @@ -188,6 +188,9 @@ shift #define CP_METHODREF 10 #define CP_INTERFACEMETHODREF 11 #define CP_NAMEANDTYPE 12 +#define CP_METHODHANDLE 15 +#define CP_METHODTYPE 16 +#define CP_INVOKEDYNAMIC 18 /* Define some commonly used error messages */ @@ -242,14 +245,19 @@ void skip_constant(FILE *classfile, u_int16_t *cur) break; case CP_CLASS: case CP_STRING: + case CP_METHODTYPE: seekerr = fseek(classfile, 2, SEEK_CUR); break; + case CP_METHODHANDLE: + seekerr = fseek(classfile, 3, SEEK_CUR); + break; case CP_INTEGER: case CP_FLOAT: case CP_FIELDREF: case CP_METHODREF: case CP_INTERFACEMETHODREF: case CP_NAMEANDTYPE: + case CP_INVOKEDYNAMIC: seekerr = fseek(classfile, 4, SEEK_CUR); break; case CP_LONG: diff --git a/Documentation/kernel-parameters.txt b/Documentation/kernel-parameters.txt index 30a8ad0dae5..9973a7e2e0a 100644 --- a/Documentation/kernel-parameters.txt +++ b/Documentation/kernel-parameters.txt @@ -214,6 +214,11 @@ bytes respectively. Such letter suffixes can also be entirely omitted. unusable. The "log_buf_len" parameter may be useful if you need to capture more output. + acpi_force_table_verification [HW,ACPI] + Enable table checksum verification during early stage. + By default, this is disabled due to x86 early mapping + size limitation. + acpi_irq_balance [HW,ACPI] ACPI will balance active IRQs default in APIC mode @@ -237,7 +242,15 @@ bytes respectively. Such letter suffixes can also be entirely omitted. This feature is enabled by default. This option allows to turn off the feature. - acpi_no_auto_ssdt [HW,ACPI] Disable automatic loading of SSDT + acpi_no_static_ssdt [HW,ACPI] + Disable installation of static SSDTs at early boot time + By default, SSDTs contained in the RSDT/XSDT will be + installed automatically and they will appear under + /sys/firmware/acpi/tables. + This option turns off this feature. + Note that specifying this option does not affect + dynamic table installation which will install SSDT + tables to /sys/firmware/acpi/tables/dynamic. acpica_no_return_repair [HW, ACPI] Disable AML predefined validation mechanism @@ -617,8 +630,11 @@ bytes respectively. Such letter suffixes can also be entirely omitted. Also note the kernel might malfunction if you disable some critical bits. - cma=nn[MG] [ARM,KNL] - Sets the size of kernel global memory area for contiguous + cma=nn[MG]@[start[MG][-end[MG]]] + [ARM,X86,KNL] + Sets the size of kernel global memory area for + contiguous memory allocations and optionally the + placement constraint by the physical address range of memory allocations. For more information, see include/linux/dma-contiguous.h @@ -883,6 +899,7 @@ bytes respectively. Such letter suffixes can also be entirely omitted. which are not unmapped. earlycon= [KNL] Output early console device and options. + uart[8250],io,<addr>[,options] uart[8250],mmio,<addr>[,options] uart[8250],mmio32,<addr>[,options] @@ -892,7 +909,15 @@ bytes respectively. Such letter suffixes can also be entirely omitted. (mmio) or 32-bit (mmio32). The options are the same as for ttyS, above. - earlyprintk= [X86,SH,BLACKFIN,ARM] + pl011,<addr> + Start an early, polled-mode console on a pl011 serial + port at the specified address. The pl011 serial port + must already be setup and configured. Options are not + yet supported. + + smh Use ARM semihosting calls for early console. + + earlyprintk= [X86,SH,BLACKFIN,ARM,M68k] earlyprintk=vga earlyprintk=efi earlyprintk=xen @@ -1287,6 +1312,10 @@ bytes respectively. Such letter suffixes can also be entirely omitted. for working out where the kernel is dying during startup. + initcall_blacklist= [KNL] Do not execute a comma-separated list of + initcall functions. Useful for debugging built-in + modules and initcalls. + initrd= [BOOT] Specify the location of the initial ramdisk inport.irq= [HW] Inport (ATI XL and Microsoft) busmouse driver @@ -2889,6 +2918,13 @@ bytes respectively. Such letter suffixes can also be entirely omitted. [KNL, SMP] Set scheduler's default relax_domain_level. See Documentation/cgroups/cpusets.txt. + relative_sleep_states= + [SUSPEND] Use sleep state labeling where the deepest + state available other than hibernation is always "mem". + Format: { "0" | "1" } + 0 -- Traditional sleep state labels. + 1 -- Relative sleep state labels. + reserve= [KNL,BUGS] Force the kernel to ignore some iomem area reservetop= [X86-32] @@ -3461,7 +3497,7 @@ bytes respectively. Such letter suffixes can also be entirely omitted. the allocated input device; If set to 0, video driver will only send out the event without touching backlight brightness level. - default: 1 + default: 0 virtio_mmio.device= [VMMIO] Memory mapped virtio (platform) device. diff --git a/Documentation/memory-barriers.txt b/Documentation/memory-barriers.txt index 556f951f862..46412bded10 100644 --- a/Documentation/memory-barriers.txt +++ b/Documentation/memory-barriers.txt @@ -1583,20 +1583,21 @@ There are some more advanced barrier functions: insert anything more than a compiler barrier in a UP compilation. - (*) smp_mb__before_atomic_dec(); - (*) smp_mb__after_atomic_dec(); - (*) smp_mb__before_atomic_inc(); - (*) smp_mb__after_atomic_inc(); + (*) smp_mb__before_atomic(); + (*) smp_mb__after_atomic(); - These are for use with atomic add, subtract, increment and decrement - functions that don't return a value, especially when used for reference - counting. These functions do not imply memory barriers. + These are for use with atomic (such as add, subtract, increment and + decrement) functions that don't return a value, especially when used for + reference counting. These functions do not imply memory barriers. + + These are also used for atomic bitop functions that do not return a + value (such as set_bit and clear_bit). As an example, consider a piece of code that marks an object as being dead and then decrements the object's reference count: obj->dead = 1; - smp_mb__before_atomic_dec(); + smp_mb__before_atomic(); atomic_dec(&obj->ref_count); This makes sure that the death mark on the object is perceived to be set @@ -1606,27 +1607,6 @@ There are some more advanced barrier functions: operations" subsection for information on where to use these. - (*) smp_mb__before_clear_bit(void); - (*) smp_mb__after_clear_bit(void); - - These are for use similar to the atomic inc/dec barriers. These are - typically used for bitwise unlocking operations, so care must be taken as - there are no implicit memory barriers here either. - - Consider implementing an unlock operation of some nature by clearing a - locking bit. The clear_bit() would then need to be barriered like this: - - smp_mb__before_clear_bit(); - clear_bit( ... ); - - This prevents memory operations before the clear leaking to after it. See - the subsection on "Locking Functions" with reference to RELEASE operation - implications. - - See Documentation/atomic_ops.txt for more information. See the "Atomic - operations" subsection for information on where to use these. - - MMIO WRITE BARRIER ------------------ @@ -2283,11 +2263,11 @@ operations: change_bit(); With these the appropriate explicit memory barrier should be used if necessary -(smp_mb__before_clear_bit() for instance). +(smp_mb__before_atomic() for instance). The following also do _not_ imply memory barriers, and so may require explicit -memory barriers under some circumstances (smp_mb__before_atomic_dec() for +memory barriers under some circumstances (smp_mb__before_atomic() for instance): atomic_add(); diff --git a/Documentation/memory-hotplug.txt b/Documentation/memory-hotplug.txt index 58340d50f8a..f304edb8fbe 100644 --- a/Documentation/memory-hotplug.txt +++ b/Documentation/memory-hotplug.txt @@ -88,16 +88,21 @@ phase by hand. 1.3. Unit of Memory online/offline operation ------------ -Memory hotplug uses SPARSEMEM memory model. SPARSEMEM divides the whole memory -into chunks of the same size. The chunk is called a "section". The size of -a section is architecture dependent. For example, power uses 16MiB, ia64 uses -1GiB. The unit of online/offline operation is "one section". (see Section 3.) +Memory hotplug uses SPARSEMEM memory model which allows memory to be divided +into chunks of the same size. These chunks are called "sections". The size of +a memory section is architecture dependent. For example, power uses 16MiB, ia64 +uses 1GiB. -To determine the size of sections, please read this file: +Memory sections are combined into chunks referred to as "memory blocks". The +size of a memory block is architecture dependent and represents the logical +unit upon which memory online/offline operations are to be performed. The +default size of a memory block is the same as memory section size unless an +architecture specifies otherwise. (see Section 3.) + +To determine the size (in bytes) of a memory block please read this file: /sys/devices/system/memory/block_size_bytes -This file shows the size of sections in byte. ----------------------- 2. Kernel Configuration @@ -123,42 +128,35 @@ config options. (CONFIG_ACPI_CONTAINER). This option can be kernel module too. + -------------------------------- -4 sysfs files for memory hotplug +3 sysfs files for memory hotplug -------------------------------- -All sections have their device information in sysfs. Each section is part of -a memory block under /sys/devices/system/memory as +All memory blocks have their device information in sysfs. Each memory block +is described under /sys/devices/system/memory as /sys/devices/system/memory/memoryXXX -(XXX is the section id.) +(XXX is the memory block id.) -Now, XXX is defined as (start_address_of_section / section_size) of the first -section contained in the memory block. The files 'phys_index' and -'end_phys_index' under each directory report the beginning and end section id's -for the memory block covered by the sysfs directory. It is expected that all +For the memory block covered by the sysfs directory. It is expected that all memory sections in this range are present and no memory holes exist in the range. Currently there is no way to determine if there is a memory hole, but the existence of one should not affect the hotplug capabilities of the memory block. -For example, assume 1GiB section size. A device for a memory starting at +For example, assume 1GiB memory block size. A device for a memory starting at 0x100000000 is /sys/device/system/memory/memory4 (0x100000000 / 1Gib = 4) This device covers address range [0x100000000 ... 0x140000000) -Under each section, you can see 4 or 5 files, the end_phys_index file being -a recent addition and not present on older kernels. +Under each memory block, you can see 4 files: -/sys/devices/system/memory/memoryXXX/start_phys_index -/sys/devices/system/memory/memoryXXX/end_phys_index +/sys/devices/system/memory/memoryXXX/phys_index /sys/devices/system/memory/memoryXXX/phys_device /sys/devices/system/memory/memoryXXX/state /sys/devices/system/memory/memoryXXX/removable -'phys_index' : read-only and contains section id of the first section - in the memory block, same as XXX. -'end_phys_index' : read-only and contains section id of the last section - in the memory block. +'phys_index' : read-only and contains memory block id, same as XXX. 'state' : read-write at read: contains online/offline state of memory. at write: user can specify "online_kernel", @@ -185,6 +183,7 @@ For example: A backlink will also be created: /sys/devices/system/memory/memory9/node0 -> ../../node/node0 + -------------------------------- 4. Physical memory hot-add phase -------------------------------- @@ -227,11 +226,10 @@ You can tell the physical address of new memory to the kernel by % echo start_address_of_new_memory > /sys/devices/system/memory/probe -Then, [start_address_of_new_memory, start_address_of_new_memory + section_size) -memory range is hot-added. In this case, hotplug script is not called (in -current implementation). You'll have to online memory by yourself. -Please see "How to online memory" in this text. - +Then, [start_address_of_new_memory, start_address_of_new_memory + +memory_block_size] memory range is hot-added. In this case, hotplug script is +not called (in current implementation). You'll have to online memory by +yourself. Please see "How to online memory" in this text. ------------------------------ @@ -240,36 +238,36 @@ Please see "How to online memory" in this text. 5.1. State of memory ------------ -To see (online/offline) state of memory section, read 'state' file. +To see (online/offline) state of a memory block, read 'state' file. % cat /sys/device/system/memory/memoryXXX/state -If the memory section is online, you'll read "online". -If the memory section is offline, you'll read "offline". +If the memory block is online, you'll read "online". +If the memory block is offline, you'll read "offline". 5.2. How to online memory ------------ Even if the memory is hot-added, it is not at ready-to-use state. -For using newly added memory, you have to "online" the memory section. +For using newly added memory, you have to "online" the memory block. -For onlining, you have to write "online" to the section's state file as: +For onlining, you have to write "online" to the memory block's state file as: % echo online > /sys/devices/system/memory/memoryXXX/state -This onlining will not change the ZONE type of the target memory section, -If the memory section is in ZONE_NORMAL, you can change it to ZONE_MOVABLE: +This onlining will not change the ZONE type of the target memory block, +If the memory block is in ZONE_NORMAL, you can change it to ZONE_MOVABLE: % echo online_movable > /sys/devices/system/memory/memoryXXX/state -(NOTE: current limit: this memory section must be adjacent to ZONE_MOVABLE) +(NOTE: current limit: this memory block must be adjacent to ZONE_MOVABLE) -And if the memory section is in ZONE_MOVABLE, you can change it to ZONE_NORMAL: +And if the memory block is in ZONE_MOVABLE, you can change it to ZONE_NORMAL: % echo online_kernel > /sys/devices/system/memory/memoryXXX/state -(NOTE: current limit: this memory section must be adjacent to ZONE_NORMAL) +(NOTE: current limit: this memory block must be adjacent to ZONE_NORMAL) -After this, section memoryXXX's state will be 'online' and the amount of +After this, memory block XXX's state will be 'online' and the amount of available memory will be increased. Currently, newly added memory is added as ZONE_NORMAL (for powerpc, ZONE_DMA). @@ -284,22 +282,22 @@ This may be changed in future. 6.1 Memory offline and ZONE_MOVABLE ------------ Memory offlining is more complicated than memory online. Because memory offline -has to make the whole memory section be unused, memory offline can fail if -the section includes memory which cannot be freed. +has to make the whole memory block be unused, memory offline can fail if +the memory block includes memory which cannot be freed. In general, memory offline can use 2 techniques. -(1) reclaim and free all memory in the section. -(2) migrate all pages in the section. +(1) reclaim and free all memory in the memory block. +(2) migrate all pages in the memory block. In the current implementation, Linux's memory offline uses method (2), freeing -all pages in the section by page migration. But not all pages are +all pages in the memory block by page migration. But not all pages are migratable. Under current Linux, migratable pages are anonymous pages and -page caches. For offlining a section by migration, the kernel has to guarantee -that the section contains only migratable pages. +page caches. For offlining a memory block by migration, the kernel has to +guarantee that the memory block contains only migratable pages. -Now, a boot option for making a section which consists of migratable pages is -supported. By specifying "kernelcore=" or "movablecore=" boot option, you can +Now, a boot option for making a memory block which consists of migratable pages +is supported. By specifying "kernelcore=" or "movablecore=" boot option, you can create ZONE_MOVABLE...a zone which is just used for movable pages. (See also Documentation/kernel-parameters.txt) @@ -315,28 +313,27 @@ creates ZONE_MOVABLE as following. Size of memory for movable pages (for offline) is ZZZZ. -Note) Unfortunately, there is no information to show which section belongs +Note: Unfortunately, there is no information to show which memory block belongs to ZONE_MOVABLE. This is TBD. 6.2. How to offline memory ------------ -You can offline a section by using the same sysfs interface that was used in -memory onlining. +You can offline a memory block by using the same sysfs interface that was used +in memory onlining. % echo offline > /sys/devices/system/memory/memoryXXX/state -If offline succeeds, the state of the memory section is changed to be "offline". +If offline succeeds, the state of the memory block is changed to be "offline". If it fails, some error core (like -EBUSY) will be returned by the kernel. -Even if a section does not belong to ZONE_MOVABLE, you can try to offline it. -If it doesn't contain 'unmovable' memory, you'll get success. +Even if a memory block does not belong to ZONE_MOVABLE, you can try to offline +it. If it doesn't contain 'unmovable' memory, you'll get success. -A section under ZONE_MOVABLE is considered to be able to be offlined easily. -But under some busy state, it may return -EBUSY. Even if a memory section -cannot be offlined due to -EBUSY, you can retry offlining it and may be able to -offline it (or not). -(For example, a page is referred to by some kernel internal call and released - soon.) +A memory block under ZONE_MOVABLE is considered to be able to be offlined +easily. But under some busy state, it may return -EBUSY. Even if a memory +block cannot be offlined due to -EBUSY, you can retry offlining it and may be +able to offline it (or not). (For example, a page is referred to by some kernel +internal call and released soon.) Consideration: Memory hotplug's design direction is to make the possibility of memory offlining @@ -373,11 +370,11 @@ MEMORY_GOING_OFFLINE Generated to begin the process of offlining memory. Allocations are no longer possible from the memory but some of the memory to be offlined is still in use. The callback can be used to free memory known to a - subsystem from the indicated memory section. + subsystem from the indicated memory block. MEMORY_CANCEL_OFFLINE Generated if MEMORY_GOING_OFFLINE fails. Memory is available again from - the section that we attempted to offline. + the memory block that we attempted to offline. MEMORY_OFFLINE Generated after offlining memory is complete. @@ -413,8 +410,8 @@ node if necessary. -------------- - allowing memory hot-add to ZONE_MOVABLE. maybe we need some switch like sysctl or new control file. - - showing memory section and physical device relationship. - - showing memory section is under ZONE_MOVABLE or not + - showing memory block and physical device relationship. + - showing memory block is under ZONE_MOVABLE or not - test and make it better memory offlining. - support HugeTLB page migration and offlining. - memmap removing at memory offline. diff --git a/Documentation/mtd/nand/pxa3xx-nand.txt b/Documentation/mtd/nand/pxa3xx-nand.txt index 840fd41c181..1074cbc67ec 100644 --- a/Documentation/mtd/nand/pxa3xx-nand.txt +++ b/Documentation/mtd/nand/pxa3xx-nand.txt @@ -48,7 +48,7 @@ configurable between two modes: 1) Hamming, 2) BCH. Note that the actual BCH mode: BCH-4 or BCH-8 will depend on the way the controller is configured to transfer the data. -In the BCH mode the ECC code will be calculated for each transfered chunk +In the BCH mode the ECC code will be calculated for each transferred chunk and expected to be located (when reading/programming) right after the spare bytes as the figure above shows. diff --git a/Documentation/networking/can.txt b/Documentation/networking/can.txt index 2fa44cbe81b..4f7ae526136 100644 --- a/Documentation/networking/can.txt +++ b/Documentation/networking/can.txt @@ -706,7 +706,7 @@ solution for a couple of reasons: RX_NO_AUTOTIMER: Prevent automatically starting the timeout monitor. - RX_ANNOUNCE_RESUME: If passed at RX_SETUP and a receive timeout occured, a + RX_ANNOUNCE_RESUME: If passed at RX_SETUP and a receive timeout occurred, a RX_CHANGED message will be generated when the (cyclic) receive restarts. TX_RESET_MULTI_IDX: Reset the index for the multiple frame transmission. diff --git a/Documentation/networking/dccp.txt b/Documentation/networking/dccp.txt index bf5dbe3ab8c..55c575fcaf1 100644 --- a/Documentation/networking/dccp.txt +++ b/Documentation/networking/dccp.txt @@ -86,7 +86,7 @@ built-in CCIDs. DCCP_SOCKOPT_CCID is write-only and sets both the TX and RX CCIDs at the same time, combining the operation of the next two socket options. This option is -preferrable over the latter two, since often applications will use the same +preferable over the latter two, since often applications will use the same type of CCID for both directions; and mixed use of CCIDs is not currently well understood. This socket option takes as argument at least one uint8_t value, or an array of uint8_t values, which must match available CCIDS (see above). CCIDs diff --git a/Documentation/networking/filter.txt b/Documentation/networking/filter.txt index 81f940f4e88..e3ba753cb71 100644 --- a/Documentation/networking/filter.txt +++ b/Documentation/networking/filter.txt @@ -277,7 +277,7 @@ Possible BPF extensions are shown in the following table: mark skb->mark queue skb->queue_mapping hatype skb->dev->type - rxhash skb->rxhash + rxhash skb->hash cpu raw_smp_processor_id() vlan_tci vlan_tx_tag_get(skb) vlan_pr vlan_tx_tag_present(skb) diff --git a/Documentation/networking/packet_mmap.txt b/Documentation/networking/packet_mmap.txt index 6fea79efb4c..38112d512f4 100644 --- a/Documentation/networking/packet_mmap.txt +++ b/Documentation/networking/packet_mmap.txt @@ -578,7 +578,7 @@ processes. This also works in combination with mmap(2) on packet sockets. Currently implemented fanout policies are: - - PACKET_FANOUT_HASH: schedule to socket by skb's rxhash + - PACKET_FANOUT_HASH: schedule to socket by skb's packet hash - PACKET_FANOUT_LB: schedule to socket by round-robin - PACKET_FANOUT_CPU: schedule to socket by CPU packet arrives on - PACKET_FANOUT_RND: schedule to socket by random selection diff --git a/Documentation/power/devices.txt b/Documentation/power/devices.txt index 47d46dff70f..d172bce0fd4 100644 --- a/Documentation/power/devices.txt +++ b/Documentation/power/devices.txt @@ -2,6 +2,7 @@ Device Power Management Copyright (c) 2010-2011 Rafael J. Wysocki <rjw@sisk.pl>, Novell Inc. Copyright (c) 2010 Alan Stern <stern@rowland.harvard.edu> +Copyright (c) 2014 Intel Corp., Rafael J. Wysocki <rafael.j.wysocki@intel.com> Most of the code in Linux is device drivers, so most of the Linux power @@ -326,6 +327,20 @@ the phases are: driver in some way for the upcoming system power transition, but it should not put the device into a low-power state. + For devices supporting runtime power management, the return value of the + prepare callback can be used to indicate to the PM core that it may + safely leave the device in runtime suspend (if runtime-suspended + already), provided that all of the device's descendants are also left in + runtime suspend. Namely, if the prepare callback returns a positive + number and that happens for all of the descendants of the device too, + and all of them (including the device itself) are runtime-suspended, the + PM core will skip the suspend, suspend_late and suspend_noirq suspend + phases as well as the resume_noirq, resume_early and resume phases of + the following system resume for all of these devices. In that case, + the complete callback will be called directly after the prepare callback + and is entirely responsible for bringing the device back to the + functional state as appropriate. + 2. The suspend methods should quiesce the device to stop it from performing I/O. They also may save the device registers and put it into the appropriate low-power state, depending on the bus type the device is on, @@ -400,12 +415,23 @@ When resuming from freeze, standby or memory sleep, the phases are: the resume callbacks occur; it's not necessary to wait until the complete phase. + Moreover, if the preceding prepare callback returned a positive number, + the device may have been left in runtime suspend throughout the whole + system suspend and resume (the suspend, suspend_late, suspend_noirq + phases of system suspend and the resume_noirq, resume_early, resume + phases of system resume may have been skipped for it). In that case, + the complete callback is entirely responsible for bringing the device + back to the functional state after system suspend if necessary. [For + example, it may need to queue up a runtime resume request for the device + for this purpose.] To check if that is the case, the complete callback + can consult the device's power.direct_complete flag. Namely, if that + flag is set when the complete callback is being run, it has been called + directly after the preceding prepare and special action may be required + to make the device work correctly afterward. + At the end of these phases, drivers should be as functional as they were before suspending: I/O can be performed using DMA and IRQs, and the relevant clocks are -gated on. Even if the device was in a low-power state before the system sleep -because of runtime power management, afterwards it should be back in its -full-power state. There are multiple reasons why it's best to do this; they are -discussed in more detail in Documentation/power/runtime_pm.txt. +gated on. However, the details here may again be platform-specific. For example, some systems support multiple "run" states, and the mode in effect at diff --git a/Documentation/power/opp.txt b/Documentation/power/opp.txt index b8a907dc016..a9adad828cd 100644 --- a/Documentation/power/opp.txt +++ b/Documentation/power/opp.txt @@ -10,8 +10,7 @@ Contents 3. OPP Search Functions 4. OPP Availability Control Functions 5. OPP Data Retrieval Functions -6. Cpufreq Table Generation -7. Data Structures +6. Data Structures 1. Introduction =============== @@ -72,7 +71,6 @@ operations until that OPP could be re-enabled if possible. OPP library facilitates this concept in it's implementation. The following operational functions operate only on available opps: opp_find_freq_{ceil, floor}, dev_pm_opp_get_voltage, dev_pm_opp_get_freq, dev_pm_opp_get_opp_count -and dev_pm_opp_init_cpufreq_table dev_pm_opp_find_freq_exact is meant to be used to find the opp pointer which can then be used for dev_pm_opp_enable/disable functions to make an opp available as required. @@ -96,10 +94,9 @@ using RCU read locks. The opp_find_freq_{exact,ceil,floor}, opp_get_{voltage, freq, opp_count} fall into this category. opp_{add,enable,disable} are updaters which use mutex and implement it's own -RCU locking mechanisms. dev_pm_opp_init_cpufreq_table acts as an updater and uses -mutex to implment RCU updater strategy. These functions should *NOT* be called -under RCU locks and other contexts that prevent blocking functions in RCU or -mutex operations from working. +RCU locking mechanisms. These functions should *NOT* be called under RCU locks +and other contexts that prevent blocking functions in RCU or mutex operations +from working. 2. Initial OPP List Registration ================================ @@ -311,34 +308,7 @@ dev_pm_opp_get_opp_count - Retrieve the number of available opps for a device /* Do other things */ } -6. Cpufreq Table Generation -=========================== -dev_pm_opp_init_cpufreq_table - cpufreq framework typically is initialized with - cpufreq_frequency_table_cpuinfo which is provided with the list of - frequencies that are available for operation. This function provides - a ready to use conversion routine to translate the OPP layer's internal - information about the available frequencies into a format readily - providable to cpufreq. - - WARNING: Do not use this function in interrupt context. - - Example: - soc_pm_init() - { - /* Do things */ - r = dev_pm_opp_init_cpufreq_table(dev, &freq_table); - if (!r) - cpufreq_frequency_table_cpuinfo(policy, freq_table); - /* Do other things */ - } - - NOTE: This function is available only if CONFIG_CPU_FREQ is enabled in - addition to CONFIG_PM as power management feature is required to - dynamically scale voltage and frequency in a system. - -dev_pm_opp_free_cpufreq_table - Free up the table allocated by dev_pm_opp_init_cpufreq_table - -7. Data Structures +6. Data Structures ================== Typically an SoC contains multiple voltage domains which are variable. Each domain is represented by a device pointer. The relationship to OPP can be diff --git a/Documentation/power/runtime_pm.txt b/Documentation/power/runtime_pm.txt index 5f96daf8566..f32ce541957 100644 --- a/Documentation/power/runtime_pm.txt +++ b/Documentation/power/runtime_pm.txt @@ -2,6 +2,7 @@ Runtime Power Management Framework for I/O Devices (C) 2009-2011 Rafael J. Wysocki <rjw@sisk.pl>, Novell Inc. (C) 2010 Alan Stern <stern@rowland.harvard.edu> +(C) 2014 Intel Corp., Rafael J. Wysocki <rafael.j.wysocki@intel.com> 1. Introduction @@ -444,6 +445,10 @@ drivers/base/power/runtime.c and include/linux/pm_runtime.h: bool pm_runtime_status_suspended(struct device *dev); - return true if the device's runtime PM status is 'suspended' + bool pm_runtime_suspended_if_enabled(struct device *dev); + - return true if the device's runtime PM status is 'suspended' and its + 'power.disable_depth' field is equal to 1 + void pm_runtime_allow(struct device *dev); - set the power.runtime_auto flag for the device and decrease its usage counter (used by the /sys/devices/.../power/control interface to @@ -644,19 +649,33 @@ place (in particular, if the system is not waking up from hibernation), it may be more efficient to leave the devices that had been suspended before the system suspend began in the suspended state. +To this end, the PM core provides a mechanism allowing some coordination between +different levels of device hierarchy. Namely, if a system suspend .prepare() +callback returns a positive number for a device, that indicates to the PM core +that the device appears to be runtime-suspended and its state is fine, so it +may be left in runtime suspend provided that all of its descendants are also +left in runtime suspend. If that happens, the PM core will not execute any +system suspend and resume callbacks for all of those devices, except for the +complete callback, which is then entirely responsible for handling the device +as appropriate. This only applies to system suspend transitions that are not +related to hibernation (see Documentation/power/devices.txt for more +information). + The PM core does its best to reduce the probability of race conditions between the runtime PM and system suspend/resume (and hibernation) callbacks by carrying out the following operations: - * During system suspend it calls pm_runtime_get_noresume() and - pm_runtime_barrier() for every device right before executing the - subsystem-level .suspend() callback for it. In addition to that it calls - __pm_runtime_disable() with 'false' as the second argument for every device - right before executing the subsystem-level .suspend_late() callback for it. - - * During system resume it calls pm_runtime_enable() and pm_runtime_put() - for every device right after executing the subsystem-level .resume_early() - callback and right after executing the subsystem-level .resume() callback + * During system suspend pm_runtime_get_noresume() is called for every device + right before executing the subsystem-level .prepare() callback for it and + pm_runtime_barrier() is called for every device right before executing the + subsystem-level .suspend() callback for it. In addition to that the PM core + calls __pm_runtime_disable() with 'false' as the second argument for every + device right before executing the subsystem-level .suspend_late() callback + for it. + + * During system resume pm_runtime_enable() and pm_runtime_put() are called for + every device right after executing the subsystem-level .resume_early() + callback and right after executing the subsystem-level .complete() callback for it, respectively. 7. Generic subsystem callbacks diff --git a/Documentation/power/states.txt b/Documentation/power/states.txt index 442d43df9b2..50f3ef9177c 100644 --- a/Documentation/power/states.txt +++ b/Documentation/power/states.txt @@ -1,62 +1,87 @@ +System Power Management Sleep States -System Power Management States +(C) 2014 Intel Corp., Rafael J. Wysocki <rafael.j.wysocki@intel.com> +The kernel supports up to four system sleep states generically, although three +of them depend on the platform support code to implement the low-level details +for each state. -The kernel supports four power management states generically, though -one is generic and the other three are dependent on platform support -code to implement the low-level details for each state. -This file describes each state, what they are -commonly called, what ACPI state they map to, and what string to write -to /sys/power/state to enter that state +The states are represented by strings that can be read or written to the +/sys/power/state file. Those strings may be "mem", "standby", "freeze" and +"disk", where the last one always represents hibernation (Suspend-To-Disk) and +the meaning of the remaining ones depends on the relative_sleep_states command +line argument. -state: Freeze / Low-Power Idle +For relative_sleep_states=1, the strings "mem", "standby" and "freeze" label the +available non-hibernation sleep states from the deepest to the shallowest, +respectively. In that case, "mem" is always present in /sys/power/state, +because there is at least one non-hibernation sleep state in every system. If +the given system supports two non-hibernation sleep states, "standby" is present +in /sys/power/state in addition to "mem". If the system supports three +non-hibernation sleep states, "freeze" will be present in /sys/power/state in +addition to "mem" and "standby". + +For relative_sleep_states=0, which is the default, the following descriptions +apply. + +state: Suspend-To-Idle ACPI state: S0 -String: "freeze" +Label: "freeze" -This state is a generic, pure software, light-weight, low-power state. -It allows more energy to be saved relative to idle by freezing user +This state is a generic, pure software, light-weight, system sleep state. +It allows more energy to be saved relative to runtime idle by freezing user space and putting all I/O devices into low-power states (possibly lower-power than available at run time), such that the processors can spend more time in their idle states. -This state can be used for platforms without Standby/Suspend-to-RAM + +This state can be used for platforms without Power-On Suspend/Suspend-to-RAM support, or it can be used in addition to Suspend-to-RAM (memory sleep) -to provide reduced resume latency. +to provide reduced resume latency. It is always supported. State: Standby / Power-On Suspend ACPI State: S1 -String: "standby" +Label: "standby" -This state offers minimal, though real, power savings, while providing -a very low-latency transition back to a working system. No operating -state is lost (the CPU retains power), so the system easily starts up +This state, if supported, offers moderate, though real, power savings, while +providing a relatively low-latency transition back to a working system. No +operating state is lost (the CPU retains power), so the system easily starts up again where it left off. -We try to put devices in a low-power state equivalent to D1, which -also offers low power savings, but low resume latency. Not all devices -support D1, and those that don't are left on. +In addition to freezing user space and putting all I/O devices into low-power +states, which is done for Suspend-To-Idle too, nonboot CPUs are taken offline +and all low-level system functions are suspended during transitions into this +state. For this reason, it should allow more energy to be saved relative to +Suspend-To-Idle, but the resume latency will generally be greater than for that +state. State: Suspend-to-RAM ACPI State: S3 -String: "mem" +Label: "mem" -This state offers significant power savings as everything in the -system is put into a low-power state, except for memory, which is -placed in self-refresh mode to retain its contents. +This state, if supported, offers significant power savings as everything in the +system is put into a low-power state, except for memory, which should be placed +into the self-refresh mode to retain its contents. All of the steps carried out +when entering Power-On Suspend are also carried out during transitions to STR. +Additional operations may take place depending on the platform capabilities. In +particular, on ACPI systems the kernel passes control to the BIOS (platform +firmware) as the last step during STR transitions and that usually results in +powering down some more low-level components that aren't directly controlled by +the kernel. -System and device state is saved and kept in memory. All devices are -suspended and put into D3. In many cases, all peripheral buses lose -power when entering STR, so devices must be able to handle the -transition back to the On state. +System and device state is saved and kept in memory. All devices are suspended +and put into low-power states. In many cases, all peripheral buses lose power +when entering STR, so devices must be able to handle the transition back to the +"on" state. -For at least ACPI, STR requires some minimal boot-strapping code to -resume the system from STR. This may be true on other platforms. +For at least ACPI, STR requires some minimal boot-strapping code to resume the +system from it. This may be the case on other platforms too. State: Suspend-to-disk ACPI State: S4 -String: "disk" +Label: "disk" This state offers the greatest power savings, and can be used even in the absence of low-level platform support for power management. This diff --git a/Documentation/power/swsusp.txt b/Documentation/power/swsusp.txt index 079160e22bc..f732a8321e8 100644 --- a/Documentation/power/swsusp.txt +++ b/Documentation/power/swsusp.txt @@ -220,7 +220,10 @@ Q: After resuming, system is paging heavily, leading to very bad interactivity. A: Try running -cat `cat /proc/[0-9]*/maps | grep / | sed 's:.* /:/:' | sort -u` > /dev/null +cat /proc/[0-9]*/maps | grep / | sed 's:.* /:/:' | sort -u | while read file +do + test -f "$file" && cat "$file" > /dev/null +done after resume. swapoff -a; swapon -a may also be useful. diff --git a/Documentation/powerpc/transactional_memory.txt b/Documentation/powerpc/transactional_memory.txt index dc23e58ae26..9791e98ab49 100644 --- a/Documentation/powerpc/transactional_memory.txt +++ b/Documentation/powerpc/transactional_memory.txt @@ -160,7 +160,7 @@ To avoid this, when taking a signal in an active transaction, we need to use the stack pointer from the checkpointed state, rather than the speculated state. This ensures that the signal context (written tm suspended) will be written below the stack required for the rollback. The transaction is aborted -becuase of the treclaim, so any memory written between the tbegin and the +because of the treclaim, so any memory written between the tbegin and the signal will be rolled back anyway. For signals taken in non-TM or suspended mode, we use the diff --git a/Documentation/printk-formats.txt b/Documentation/printk-formats.txt index 6f4eb322ffa..b4498218c47 100644 --- a/Documentation/printk-formats.txt +++ b/Documentation/printk-formats.txt @@ -199,11 +199,11 @@ struct va_format: Do not use this feature without some mechanism to verify the correctness of the format string and va_list arguments. -u64 SHOULD be printed with %llu/%llx, (unsigned long long): +u64 SHOULD be printed with %llu/%llx: printk("%llu", u64_var); -s64 SHOULD be printed with %lld/%llx, (long long): +s64 SHOULD be printed with %lld/%llx: printk("%lld", s64_var); diff --git a/Documentation/rbtree.txt b/Documentation/rbtree.txt index 61b6c48871a..39873ef41bf 100644 --- a/Documentation/rbtree.txt +++ b/Documentation/rbtree.txt @@ -255,7 +255,7 @@ However, rbtree can be augmented to store such interval ranges in a structured way making it possible to do efficient lookup and exact match. This "extra information" stored in each node is the maximum hi -(max_hi) value among all the nodes that are its descendents. This +(max_hi) value among all the nodes that are its descendants. This information can be maintained at each node just be looking at the node and its immediate children. And this will be used in O(log n) lookup for lowest match (lowest start address among all possible matches) diff --git a/Documentation/rfkill.txt b/Documentation/rfkill.txt index f430004df73..427e89712f4 100644 --- a/Documentation/rfkill.txt +++ b/Documentation/rfkill.txt @@ -21,7 +21,7 @@ aircraft. The rfkill subsystem has a concept of "hard" and "soft" block, which differ little in their meaning (block == transmitters off) but rather in whether they can be changed or not: - - hard block: read-only radio block that cannot be overriden by software + - hard block: read-only radio block that cannot be overridden by software - soft block: writable radio block (need not be readable) that is set by the system software. diff --git a/Documentation/robust-futexes.txt b/Documentation/robust-futexes.txt index 0a9446a53bd..af6fce23e48 100644 --- a/Documentation/robust-futexes.txt +++ b/Documentation/robust-futexes.txt @@ -210,7 +210,7 @@ i386 and x86_64 syscalls are wired up at the moment, and Ulrich has tested the new glibc code (on x86_64 and i386), and it works for his robust-mutex testcases. -All other architectures should build just fine too - but they wont have +All other architectures should build just fine too - but they won't have the new syscalls yet. Architectures need to implement the new futex_atomic_cmpxchg_inatomic() diff --git a/Documentation/s390/monreader.txt b/Documentation/s390/monreader.txt index beeaa4b2442..d3729585fdb 100644 --- a/Documentation/s390/monreader.txt +++ b/Documentation/s390/monreader.txt @@ -10,7 +10,7 @@ Author: Gerald Schaefer (geraldsc@de.ibm.com) Description =========== This item delivers a new Linux API in the form of a misc char device that is -useable from user space and allows read access to the z/VM Monitor Records +usable from user space and allows read access to the z/VM Monitor Records collected by the *MONITOR System Service of z/VM. diff --git a/Documentation/s390/zfcpdump.txt b/Documentation/s390/zfcpdump.txt index cf45d27c460..dc929be9601 100644 --- a/Documentation/s390/zfcpdump.txt +++ b/Documentation/s390/zfcpdump.txt @@ -1,15 +1,15 @@ -s390 SCSI dump tool (zfcpdump) +The s390 SCSI dump tool (zfcpdump) System z machines (z900 or higher) provide hardware support for creating system dumps on SCSI disks. The dump process is initiated by booting a dump tool, which has to create a dump of the current (probably crashed) Linux image. In order to not overwrite memory of the crashed Linux with data of the dump tool, the -hardware saves some memory plus the register sets of the boot cpu before the +hardware saves some memory plus the register sets of the boot CPU before the dump tool is loaded. There exists an SCLP hardware interface to obtain the saved memory afterwards. Currently 32 MB are saved. This zfcpdump implementation consists of a Linux dump kernel together with -a userspace dump tool, which are loaded together into the saved memory region +a user space dump tool, which are loaded together into the saved memory region below 32 MB. zfcpdump is installed on a SCSI disk using zipl (as contained in the s390-tools package) to make the device bootable. The operator of a Linux system can then trigger a SCSI dump by booting the SCSI disk, where zfcpdump @@ -19,68 +19,33 @@ The kernel part of zfcpdump is implemented as a debugfs file under "zcore/mem", which exports memory and registers of the crashed Linux in an s390 standalone dump format. It can be used in the same way as e.g. /dev/mem. The dump format defines a 4K header followed by plain uncompressed memory. The -register sets are stored in the prefix pages of the respective cpus. To build a +register sets are stored in the prefix pages of the respective CPUs. To build a dump enabled kernel with the zcore driver, the kernel config option -CONFIG_ZFCPDUMP has to be set. When reading from "zcore/mem", the part of +CONFIG_CRASH_DUMP has to be set. When reading from "zcore/mem", the part of memory, which has been saved by hardware is read by the driver via the SCLP hardware interface. The second part is just copied from the non overwritten real memory. -The userspace application of zfcpdump can reside e.g. in an intitramfs or an -initrd. It reads from zcore/mem and writes the system dump to a file on a -SCSI disk. +Since kernel version 3.12 also the /proc/vmcore file can also be used to access +the dump. -To build a zfcpdump kernel use the following settings in your kernel -configuration: - * CONFIG_ZFCPDUMP=y - * Enable ZFCP driver - * Enable SCSI driver - * Enable ext2 and ext3 filesystems - * Disable as many features as possible to keep the kernel small. - E.g. network support is not needed at all. +To get a valid zfcpdump kernel configuration use "make zfcpdump_defconfig". -To use the zfcpdump userspace application in an initramfs you have to do the -following: +The s390 zipl tool looks for the zfcpdump kernel and optional initrd/initramfs +under the following locations: - * Copy the zfcpdump executable somewhere into your Linux tree. - E.g. to "arch/s390/boot/zfcpdump. If you do not want to include - shared libraries, compile the tool with the "-static" gcc option. - * If you want to include e2fsck, add it to your source tree, too. The zfcpdump - application attempts to start /sbin/e2fsck from the ramdisk. - * Use an initramfs config file like the following: +* kernel: <zfcpdump directory>/zfcpdump.image +* ramdisk: <zfcpdump directory>/zfcpdump.rd - dir /dev 755 0 0 - nod /dev/console 644 0 0 c 5 1 - nod /dev/null 644 0 0 c 1 3 - nod /dev/sda1 644 0 0 b 8 1 - nod /dev/sda2 644 0 0 b 8 2 - nod /dev/sda3 644 0 0 b 8 3 - nod /dev/sda4 644 0 0 b 8 4 - nod /dev/sda5 644 0 0 b 8 5 - nod /dev/sda6 644 0 0 b 8 6 - nod /dev/sda7 644 0 0 b 8 7 - nod /dev/sda8 644 0 0 b 8 8 - nod /dev/sda9 644 0 0 b 8 9 - nod /dev/sda10 644 0 0 b 8 10 - nod /dev/sda11 644 0 0 b 8 11 - nod /dev/sda12 644 0 0 b 8 12 - nod /dev/sda13 644 0 0 b 8 13 - nod /dev/sda14 644 0 0 b 8 14 - nod /dev/sda15 644 0 0 b 8 15 - file /init arch/s390/boot/zfcpdump 755 0 0 - file /sbin/e2fsck arch/s390/boot/e2fsck 755 0 0 - dir /proc 755 0 0 - dir /sys 755 0 0 - dir /mnt 755 0 0 - dir /sbin 755 0 0 +The zfcpdump directory is defined in the s390-tools package. - * Issue "make image" to build the zfcpdump image with initramfs. +The user space application of zfcpdump can reside in an intitramfs or an +initrd. It can also be included in a built-in kernel initramfs. The application +reads from /proc/vmcore or zcore/mem and writes the system dump to a SCSI disk. -In a Linux distribution the zfcpdump enabled kernel image must be copied to -/usr/share/zfcpdump/zfcpdump.image, where the s390 zipl tool is looking for the -dump kernel when preparing a SCSI dump disk. - -If you use a ramdisk copy it to "/usr/share/zfcpdump/zfcpdump.rd". +The s390-tools package version 1.24.0 and above builds an external zfcpdump +initramfs with a user space application that writes the dump to a SCSI +partition. For more information on how to use zfcpdump refer to the s390 'Using the Dump Tools book', which is available from diff --git a/Documentation/security/Yama.txt b/Documentation/security/Yama.txt index dd908cf64ec..227a63f018a 100644 --- a/Documentation/security/Yama.txt +++ b/Documentation/security/Yama.txt @@ -37,7 +37,7 @@ still work as root). In mode 1, software that has defined application-specific relationships between a debugging process and its inferior (crash handlers, etc), prctl(PR_SET_PTRACER, pid, ...) can be used. An inferior can declare which -other process (and its descendents) are allowed to call PTRACE_ATTACH +other process (and its descendants) are allowed to call PTRACE_ATTACH against it. Only one such declared debugging process can exists for each inferior at a time. For example, this is used by KDE, Chromium, and Firefox's crash handlers, and by Wine for allowing only Wine processes diff --git a/Documentation/serial/driver b/Documentation/serial/driver index c3a7689a90e..3bba1aeb799 100644 --- a/Documentation/serial/driver +++ b/Documentation/serial/driver @@ -429,3 +429,28 @@ thus: struct uart_port port; int my_stuff; }; + +Modem control lines via GPIO +---------------------------- + +Some helpers are provided in order to set/get modem control lines via GPIO. + +mctrl_gpio_init(dev, idx): + This will get the {cts,rts,...}-gpios from device tree if they are + present and request them, set direction etc, and return an + allocated structure. devm_* functions are used, so there's no need + to call mctrl_gpio_free(). + +mctrl_gpio_free(dev, gpios): + This will free the requested gpios in mctrl_gpio_init(). + As devm_* function are used, there's generally no need to call + this function. + +mctrl_gpio_to_gpiod(gpios, gidx) + This returns the gpio structure associated to the modem line index. + +mctrl_gpio_set(gpios, mctrl): + This will sets the gpios according to the mctrl state. + +mctrl_gpio_get(gpios, mctrl): + This will update mctrl with the gpios values. diff --git a/Documentation/sound/alsa/ALSA-Configuration.txt b/Documentation/sound/alsa/ALSA-Configuration.txt index b8dd0df7695..7ccf933bfbe 100644 --- a/Documentation/sound/alsa/ALSA-Configuration.txt +++ b/Documentation/sound/alsa/ALSA-Configuration.txt @@ -948,7 +948,7 @@ Prior to version 0.9.0rc4 options had a 'snd_' prefix. This was removed. avoided as much as possible... MORE NOTES ON "azx_get_response timeout" PROBLEMS: - On some hardwares, you may need to add a proper probe_mask option + On some hardware, you may need to add a proper probe_mask option to avoid the "azx_get_response timeout" problem above, instead. This occurs when the access to non-existing or non-working codec slot (likely a modem one) causes a stall of the communication via HD-audio @@ -1124,7 +1124,7 @@ Prior to version 0.9.0rc4 options had a 'snd_' prefix. This was removed. buggy_irq - Enable workaround for buggy interrupts on some motherboards (default yes on nForce chips, otherwise off) - buggy_semaphore - Enable workaround for hardwares with buggy + buggy_semaphore - Enable workaround for hardware with buggy semaphores (e.g. on some ASUS laptops) (default off) spdif_aclink - Use S/PDIF over AC-link instead of direct connection diff --git a/Documentation/sysctl/vm.txt b/Documentation/sysctl/vm.txt index dd9d0e33b44..bd4b34c0373 100644 --- a/Documentation/sysctl/vm.txt +++ b/Documentation/sysctl/vm.txt @@ -746,8 +746,8 @@ Changing this takes effect whenever an application requests memory. vfs_cache_pressure ------------------ -Controls the tendency of the kernel to reclaim the memory which is used for -caching of directory and inode objects. +This percentage value controls the tendency of the kernel to reclaim +the memory which is used for caching of directory and inode objects. At the default value of vfs_cache_pressure=100 the kernel will attempt to reclaim dentries and inodes at a "fair" rate with respect to pagecache and @@ -757,6 +757,11 @@ never reclaim dentries and inodes due to memory pressure and this can easily lead to out-of-memory conditions. Increasing vfs_cache_pressure beyond 100 causes the kernel to prefer to reclaim dentries and inodes. +Increasing vfs_cache_pressure significantly beyond 100 may have negative +performance impact. Reclaim code needs to take various locks to find freeable +directory and inode objects. With vfs_cache_pressure=1000, it will look for +ten times more freeable objects than there are. + ============================================================== zone_reclaim_mode: @@ -772,16 +777,17 @@ This is value ORed together of 2 = Zone reclaim writes dirty pages out 4 = Zone reclaim swaps pages -zone_reclaim_mode is set during bootup to 1 if it is determined that pages -from remote zones will cause a measurable performance reduction. The -page allocator will then reclaim easily reusable pages (those page -cache pages that are currently not used) before allocating off node pages. - -It may be beneficial to switch off zone reclaim if the system is -used for a file server and all of memory should be used for caching files -from disk. In that case the caching effect is more important than +zone_reclaim_mode is disabled by default. For file servers or workloads +that benefit from having their data cached, zone_reclaim_mode should be +left disabled as the caching effect is likely to be more important than data locality. +zone_reclaim may be enabled if it's known that the workload is partitioned +such that each partition fits within a NUMA node and that accessing remote +memory would cause a measurable performance reduction. The page allocator +will then reclaim easily reusable pages (those page cache pages that are +currently not used) before allocating off node pages. + Allowing zone reclaim to write out pages stops processes that are writing large amounts of data from dirtying pages on other nodes. Zone reclaim will write out dirty pages if a zone fills up and so effectively diff --git a/Documentation/timers/timer_stats.txt b/Documentation/timers/timer_stats.txt index 8abd40b22b7..de835ee9745 100644 --- a/Documentation/timers/timer_stats.txt +++ b/Documentation/timers/timer_stats.txt @@ -39,9 +39,9 @@ To stop a sample period issue: The statistics can be retrieved by: # cat /proc/timer_stats -The readout of /proc/timer_stats automatically disables sampling. The sampled -information is kept until a new sample period is started. This allows multiple -readouts. +While sampling is enabled, each readout from /proc/timer_stats will see +newly updated statistics. Once sampling is disabled, the sampled information +is kept until a new sample period is started. This allows multiple readouts. Sample output of /proc/timer_stats: diff --git a/Documentation/trace/events.txt b/Documentation/trace/events.txt index c94435df203..75d25a1d6e4 100644 --- a/Documentation/trace/events.txt +++ b/Documentation/trace/events.txt @@ -443,7 +443,7 @@ The following commands are supported: The following command creates a snapshot every time a block request queue is unplugged with a depth > 1. If you were tracing a set of events or functions at the time, the snapshot trace buffer would - capture those events when the trigger event occured: + capture those events when the trigger event occurred: # echo 'snapshot if nr_rq > 1' > \ /sys/kernel/debug/tracing/events/block/block_unplug/trigger diff --git a/Documentation/usb/chipidea.txt b/Documentation/usb/chipidea.txt new file mode 100644 index 00000000000..995c8bca40e --- /dev/null +++ b/Documentation/usb/chipidea.txt @@ -0,0 +1,71 @@ +1. How to test OTG FSM(HNP and SRP) +----------------------------------- +To show how to demo OTG HNP and SRP functions via sys input files +with 2 Freescale i.MX6Q sabre SD boards. + +1.1 How to enable OTG FSM in menuconfig +--------------------------------------- +Select CONFIG_USB_OTG_FSM, rebuild kernel Image and modules. +If you want to check some internal variables for otg fsm, +select CONFIG_USB_CHIPIDEA_DEBUG, there are 2 files which +can show otg fsm variables and some controller registers value: +cat /sys/kernel/debug/ci_hdrc.0/otg +cat /sys/kernel/debug/ci_hdrc.0/registers + +1.2 Test operations +------------------- +1) Power up 2 Freescale i.MX6Q sabre SD boards with gadget class driver loaded + (e.g. g_mass_storage). + +2) Connect 2 boards with usb cable with one end is micro A plug, the other end + is micro B plug. + + The A-device(with micro A plug inserted) should enumrate B-device. + +3) Role switch + On B-device: + echo 1 > /sys/bus/platform/devices/ci_hdrc.0/inputs/b_bus_req + + if HNP polling is not supported, also need: + On A-device: + echo 0 > /sys/bus/platform/devices/ci_hdrc.0/inputs/a_bus_req + + B-device should take host role and enumrate A-device. + +4) A-device switch back to host. + On B-device: + echo 0 > /sys/bus/platform/devices/ci_hdrc.0/inputs/b_bus_req + + A-device should switch back to host and enumrate B-device. + +5) Remove B-device(unplug micro B plug) and insert again in 10 seconds, + A-device should enumrate B-device again. + +6) Remove B-device(unplug micro B plug) and insert again after 10 seconds, + A-device should NOT enumrate B-device. + + if A-device wants to use bus: + On A-device: + echo 0 > /sys/bus/platform/devices/ci_hdrc.0/inputs/a_bus_drop + echo 1 > /sys/bus/platform/devices/ci_hdrc.0/inputs/a_bus_req + + if B-device wants to use bus: + On B-device: + echo 1 > /sys/bus/platform/devices/ci_hdrc.0/inputs/b_bus_req + +7) A-device power down the bus. + On A-device: + echo 1 > /sys/bus/platform/devices/ci_hdrc.0/inputs/a_bus_drop + + A-device should disconnect with B-device and power down the bus. + +8) B-device does data pulse for SRP. + On B-device: + echo 1 > /sys/bus/platform/devices/ci_hdrc.0/inputs/b_bus_req + + A-device should resume usb bus and enumrate B-device. + +1.3 Reference document +---------------------- +"On-The-Go and Embedded Host Supplement to the USB Revision 2.0 Specification +July 27, 2012 Revision 2.0 version 1.1a" diff --git a/Documentation/usb/mass-storage.txt b/Documentation/usb/mass-storage.txt index 59063ad7a60..e89803a5a96 100644 --- a/Documentation/usb/mass-storage.txt +++ b/Documentation/usb/mass-storage.txt @@ -13,7 +13,7 @@ operation. Note that the driver is slightly non-portable in that it assumes - a single memory/DMA buffer will be useable for bulk-in and bulk-out + a single memory/DMA buffer will be usable for bulk-in and bulk-out endpoints. With most device controllers this is not an issue, but there may be some with hardware restrictions that prevent a buffer from being used by more than one endpoint. diff --git a/Documentation/virtual/kvm/api.txt b/Documentation/virtual/kvm/api.txt index a9380ba54c8..0fe36497642 100644 --- a/Documentation/virtual/kvm/api.txt +++ b/Documentation/virtual/kvm/api.txt @@ -1794,6 +1794,11 @@ registers, find a list below: PPC | KVM_REG_PPC_MMCR0 | 64 PPC | KVM_REG_PPC_MMCR1 | 64 PPC | KVM_REG_PPC_MMCRA | 64 + PPC | KVM_REG_PPC_MMCR2 | 64 + PPC | KVM_REG_PPC_MMCRS | 64 + PPC | KVM_REG_PPC_SIAR | 64 + PPC | KVM_REG_PPC_SDAR | 64 + PPC | KVM_REG_PPC_SIER | 64 PPC | KVM_REG_PPC_PMC1 | 32 PPC | KVM_REG_PPC_PMC2 | 32 PPC | KVM_REG_PPC_PMC3 | 32 @@ -1868,6 +1873,7 @@ registers, find a list below: PPC | KVM_REG_PPC_PPR | 64 PPC | KVM_REG_PPC_ARCH_COMPAT 32 PPC | KVM_REG_PPC_DABRX | 32 + PPC | KVM_REG_PPC_WORT | 64 PPC | KVM_REG_PPC_TM_GPR0 | 64 ... PPC | KVM_REG_PPC_TM_GPR31 | 64 @@ -2066,7 +2072,7 @@ the "Server" class MMU emulation supported by KVM. This can in turn be used by userspace to generate the appropriate device-tree properties for the guest operating system. -The structure contains some global informations, followed by an +The structure contains some global information, followed by an array of supported segment page sizes: struct kvm_ppc_smmu_info { @@ -2126,7 +2132,7 @@ into the hash PTE second double word). 4.75 KVM_IRQFD Capability: KVM_CAP_IRQFD -Architectures: x86 +Architectures: x86 s390 Type: vm ioctl Parameters: struct kvm_irqfd (in) Returns: 0 on success, -1 on error @@ -2211,6 +2217,8 @@ KVM_S390_SIGP_STOP (vcpu) - sigp restart KVM_S390_PROGRAM_INT (vcpu) - program check; code in parm KVM_S390_SIGP_SET_PREFIX (vcpu) - sigp set prefix; prefix address in parm KVM_S390_RESTART (vcpu) - restart +KVM_S390_INT_CLOCK_COMP (vcpu) - clock comparator interrupt +KVM_S390_INT_CPU_TIMER (vcpu) - CPU timer interrupt KVM_S390_INT_VIRTIO (vm) - virtio external interrupt; external interrupt parameters in parm and parm64 KVM_S390_INT_SERVICE (vm) - sclp external interrupt; sclp parameter in parm @@ -2314,8 +2322,8 @@ struct kvm_create_device { 4.80 KVM_SET_DEVICE_ATTR/KVM_GET_DEVICE_ATTR -Capability: KVM_CAP_DEVICE_CTRL -Type: device ioctl +Capability: KVM_CAP_DEVICE_CTRL, KVM_CAP_VM_ATTRIBUTES for vm device +Type: device ioctl, vm ioctl Parameters: struct kvm_device_attr Returns: 0 on success, -1 on error Errors: @@ -2340,8 +2348,8 @@ struct kvm_device_attr { 4.81 KVM_HAS_DEVICE_ATTR -Capability: KVM_CAP_DEVICE_CTRL -Type: device ioctl +Capability: KVM_CAP_DEVICE_CTRL, KVM_CAP_VM_ATTRIBUTES for vm device +Type: device ioctl, vm ioctl Parameters: struct kvm_device_attr Returns: 0 on success, -1 on error Errors: @@ -2376,6 +2384,8 @@ Possible features: Depends on KVM_CAP_ARM_PSCI. - KVM_ARM_VCPU_EL1_32BIT: Starts the CPU in a 32bit mode. Depends on KVM_CAP_ARM_EL1_32BIT (arm64 only). + - KVM_ARM_VCPU_PSCI_0_2: Emulate PSCI v0.2 for the CPU. + Depends on KVM_CAP_ARM_PSCI_0_2. 4.83 KVM_ARM_PREFERRED_TARGET @@ -2738,6 +2748,21 @@ It gets triggered whenever both KVM_CAP_PPC_EPR are enabled and an external interrupt has just been delivered into the guest. User space should put the acknowledged interrupt vector into the 'epr' field. + /* KVM_EXIT_SYSTEM_EVENT */ + struct { +#define KVM_SYSTEM_EVENT_SHUTDOWN 1 +#define KVM_SYSTEM_EVENT_RESET 2 + __u32 type; + __u64 flags; + } system_event; + +If exit_reason is KVM_EXIT_SYSTEM_EVENT then the vcpu has triggered +a system-level event using some architecture specific mechanism (hypercall +or some special instruction). In case of ARM/ARM64, this is triggered using +HVC instruction based PSCI call from the vcpu. The 'type' field describes +the system-level event type. The 'flags' field describes architecture +specific flags for the system-level event. + /* Fix the size of the union. */ char padding[256]; }; diff --git a/Documentation/virtual/kvm/devices/vm.txt b/Documentation/virtual/kvm/devices/vm.txt new file mode 100644 index 00000000000..0d16f96c0ea --- /dev/null +++ b/Documentation/virtual/kvm/devices/vm.txt @@ -0,0 +1,26 @@ +Generic vm interface +==================================== + +The virtual machine "device" also accepts the ioctls KVM_SET_DEVICE_ATTR, +KVM_GET_DEVICE_ATTR, and KVM_HAS_DEVICE_ATTR. The interface uses the same +struct kvm_device_attr as other devices, but targets VM-wide settings +and controls. + +The groups and attributes per virtual machine, if any, are architecture +specific. + +1. GROUP: KVM_S390_VM_MEM_CTRL +Architectures: s390 + +1.1. ATTRIBUTE: KVM_S390_VM_MEM_CTRL +Parameters: none +Returns: -EBUSY if already a vcpus is defined, otherwise 0 + +Enables CMMA for the virtual machine + +1.2. ATTRIBUTE: KVM_S390_VM_CLR_CMMA +Parameteres: none +Returns: 0 + +Clear the CMMA status for all guest pages, so any pages the guest marked +as unused are again used any may not be reclaimed by the host. diff --git a/Documentation/virtual/kvm/ppc-pv.txt b/Documentation/virtual/kvm/ppc-pv.txt index 4643cde517c..319560646f3 100644 --- a/Documentation/virtual/kvm/ppc-pv.txt +++ b/Documentation/virtual/kvm/ppc-pv.txt @@ -94,10 +94,24 @@ a bitmap of available features inside the magic page. The following enhancements to the magic page are currently available: KVM_MAGIC_FEAT_SR Maps SR registers r/w in the magic page + KVM_MAGIC_FEAT_MAS0_TO_SPRG7 Maps MASn, ESR, PIR and high SPRGs For enhanced features in the magic page, please check for the existence of the feature before using them! +Magic page flags +================ + +In addition to features that indicate whether a host is capable of a particular +feature we also have a channel for a guest to tell the guest whether it's capable +of something. This is what we call "flags". + +Flags are passed to the host in the low 12 bits of the Effective Address. + +The following flags are currently available for a guest to expose: + + MAGIC_PAGE_FLAG_NOT_MAPPED_NX Guest handles NX bits correclty wrt magic page + MSR bits ======== diff --git a/Documentation/virtual/kvm/s390-diag.txt b/Documentation/virtual/kvm/s390-diag.txt index f1de4fbade1..48c4921794e 100644 --- a/Documentation/virtual/kvm/s390-diag.txt +++ b/Documentation/virtual/kvm/s390-diag.txt @@ -78,3 +78,5 @@ DIAGNOSE function code 'X'501 - KVM breakpoint If the function code specifies 0x501, breakpoint functions may be performed. This function code is handled by userspace. + +This diagnose function code has no subfunctions and uses no parameters. diff --git a/Documentation/vm/hwpoison.txt b/Documentation/vm/hwpoison.txt index 55006846660..6ae89a9edf2 100644 --- a/Documentation/vm/hwpoison.txt +++ b/Documentation/vm/hwpoison.txt @@ -84,6 +84,11 @@ PR_MCE_KILL PR_MCE_KILL_EARLY: Early kill PR_MCE_KILL_LATE: Late kill PR_MCE_KILL_DEFAULT: Use system global default + Note that if you want to have a dedicated thread which handles + the SIGBUS(BUS_MCEERR_AO) on behalf of the process, you should + call prctl(PR_MCE_KILL_EARLY) on the designated thread. Otherwise, + the SIGBUS is sent to the main thread. + PR_MCE_KILL_GET return current mode diff --git a/Documentation/vm/transhuge.txt b/Documentation/vm/transhuge.txt index 4a63953a41f..6b31cfbe2a9 100644 --- a/Documentation/vm/transhuge.txt +++ b/Documentation/vm/transhuge.txt @@ -360,13 +360,13 @@ on any tail page, would mean having to split all hugepages upfront in get_user_pages which is unacceptable as too many gup users are performance critical and they must work natively on hugepages like they work natively on hugetlbfs already (hugetlbfs is simpler because -hugetlbfs pages cannot be splitted so there wouldn't be requirement of +hugetlbfs pages cannot be split so there wouldn't be requirement of accounting the pins on the tail pages for hugetlbfs). If we wouldn't account the gup refcounts on the tail pages during gup, we won't know anymore which tail page is pinned by gup and which is not while we run split_huge_page. But we still have to add the gup pin to the head page too, to know when we can free the compound page in case it's never -splitted during its lifetime. That requires changing not just +split during its lifetime. That requires changing not just get_page, but put_page as well so that when put_page runs on a tail page (and only on a tail page) it will find its respective head page, and then it will decrease the head page refcount in addition to the diff --git a/Documentation/w1/w1.generic b/Documentation/w1/w1.generic index a31c5a24297..b2033c64c7d 100644 --- a/Documentation/w1/w1.generic +++ b/Documentation/w1/w1.generic @@ -82,7 +82,7 @@ driver - (standard) symlink to the w1 driver w1_master_add - Manually register a slave device w1_master_attempts - the number of times a search was attempted w1_master_max_slave_count - - the maximum slaves that may be attached to a master + - maximum number of slaves to search for at a time w1_master_name - the name of the device (w1_bus_masterX) w1_master_pullup - 5V strong pullup 0 enabled, 1 disabled w1_master_remove - Manually remove a slave device diff --git a/Documentation/w1/w1.netlink b/Documentation/w1/w1.netlink index 927a52cc051..ef2727192d6 100644 --- a/Documentation/w1/w1.netlink +++ b/Documentation/w1/w1.netlink @@ -30,7 +30,7 @@ Protocol. W1_SLAVE_CMD userspace command for slave device (read/write/touch) - __u8 res - reserved + __u8 status - error indication from kernel __u16 len - size of data attached to this header data union { __u8 id[8]; - slave unique device id @@ -44,10 +44,14 @@ Protocol. __u8 cmd - command opcode. W1_CMD_READ - read command W1_CMD_WRITE - write command - W1_CMD_TOUCH - touch command - (write and sample data back to userspace) W1_CMD_SEARCH - search command W1_CMD_ALARM_SEARCH - alarm search command + W1_CMD_TOUCH - touch command + (write and sample data back to userspace) + W1_CMD_RESET - send bus reset + W1_CMD_SLAVE_ADD - add slave to kernel list + W1_CMD_SLAVE_REMOVE - remove slave from kernel list + W1_CMD_LIST_SLAVES - get slaves list from kernel __u8 res - reserved __u16 len - length of data for this command For read command data must be allocated like for write command @@ -87,8 +91,7 @@ format: id0 ... idN Each message is at most 4k in size, so if number of master devices - exceeds this, it will be split into several messages, - cn.seq will be increased for each one. + exceeds this, it will be split into several messages. W1 search and alarm search commands. request: diff --git a/Documentation/x86/earlyprintk.txt b/Documentation/x86/earlyprintk.txt index f19802c0f48..688e3eeed21 100644 --- a/Documentation/x86/earlyprintk.txt +++ b/Documentation/x86/earlyprintk.txt @@ -33,7 +33,7 @@ and two USB cables, connected like this: ... ( If your system does not list a debug port capability then you probably - wont be able to use the USB debug key. ) + won't be able to use the USB debug key. ) b.) You also need a Netchip USB debug cable/key: diff --git a/Documentation/x86/i386/IO-APIC.txt b/Documentation/x86/i386/IO-APIC.txt index 30b4c714fbe..15f5baf7e1b 100644 --- a/Documentation/x86/i386/IO-APIC.txt +++ b/Documentation/x86/i386/IO-APIC.txt @@ -87,7 +87,7 @@ your PCI configuration: echo -n pirq=; echo `scanpci | grep T_L | cut -c56-` | sed 's/ /,/g' -note that this script wont work if you have skipped a few slots or if your +note that this script won't work if you have skipped a few slots or if your board does not do default daisy-chaining. (or the IO-APIC has the PIRQ pins connected in some strange way). E.g. if in the above case you have your SCSI card (IRQ11) in Slot3, and have Slot1 empty: diff --git a/Documentation/x86/x86_64/mm.txt b/Documentation/x86/x86_64/mm.txt index c584a51add1..afe68ddbe6a 100644 --- a/Documentation/x86/x86_64/mm.txt +++ b/Documentation/x86/x86_64/mm.txt @@ -12,6 +12,8 @@ ffffc90000000000 - ffffe8ffffffffff (=45 bits) vmalloc/ioremap space ffffe90000000000 - ffffe9ffffffffff (=40 bits) hole ffffea0000000000 - ffffeaffffffffff (=40 bits) virtual memory map (1TB) ... unused hole ... +ffffff0000000000 - ffffff7fffffffff (=39 bits) %esp fixup stacks +... unused hole ... ffffffff80000000 - ffffffffa0000000 (=512 MB) kernel text mapping, from phys 0 ffffffffa0000000 - ffffffffff5fffff (=1525 MB) module mapping space ffffffffff600000 - ffffffffffdfffff (=8 MB) vsyscalls |